SlideShare a Scribd company logo
DB2

®

DB2 Version 9
for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

GC10-4246-00
Quick beginning for db2 server
DB2

®

DB2 Version 9
for Linux, UNIX, and Windows

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

GC10-4246-00
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices.

Edition Notice
This document contains proprietary information of IBM. It is provided under a license agreement and is protected
by copyright law. The information contained in this publication does not include any product warranties, and any
statements provided in this manual should not be interpreted as such.
You can order IBM publications online or through your local IBM representative.
v To order publications online, go to the IBM Publications Center at www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order
v To find your local IBM representative, go to the IBM Directory of Worldwide Contacts at www.ibm.com/
planetwide
To order DB2 publications from DB2 Marketing and Sales in the United States or Canada, call 1-800-IBM-4YOU
(426-4968).
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993, 2006. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Who should read this book . . . . . . v

Part 1. Installing DB2 servers . . . . 1
Chapter 1. Installation overview . . . . 3
DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information .
DB2 installation methods . . . . . . . . . .
Supported combinations of client and server versions
An overview of installing your DB2 product
(Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux
and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
5
6
7

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites . . . 9
Disk and memory requirements . . . . . . . . 9
DB2 server installation (Windows) . . . . . . . 10
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and
servers (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DB2 services running on your system (Windows) 11
Required user accounts for installation of DB2
server products (Windows) . . . . . . . . 12
Preparing the environment for a partitioned DB2
server (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Granting user rights (Windows) . . . . . . 17
Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to
installing a DB2 product (Windows) . . . . . 18
DB2 system administrator group considerations
(Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fast communications manager (Windows) . . . 21
DB2 server installation (Linux and UNIX) . . . . 21
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and
servers (AIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and
servers (HP-UX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and
servers (Linux) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and
servers (Solaris Operating System) . . . . . . 27
Listing DB2 products installed on your system
(Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX) 30
DB2 users and groups (Linux and UNIX) . . . 31
Centralized user-management considerations
(Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries . . 33

Chapter 3. Before you install . . . . . 35
Extending the directory schema (Windows) . . .
IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for
DB2 products . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating group and user IDs for a DB2 database
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple CD installation (Linux and UNIX) . . .

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

. 35
. 35
. 37
. 38

Verifying port range availability on participating
computers (Windows) . . . . . . . . . .
Kernel parameters (Linux and UNIX) . . . . .
Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX) . . .
Recommended kernel configuration parameters
(HP-UX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying kernel parameters (Linux) . . . .
Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating
Environment) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional partitioned database environment
preinstallation tasks (Linux and UNIX) . . . .
Updating environment settings for a partitioned
DB2 installation (AIX) . . . . . . . . .
Setting up a working collective to distribute
commands to ESE workstations (AIX) . . .
Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to
your computer (Linux and UNIX) . . . . .
Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX)
Verifying port range availability on participating
computers (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . .
Creating file system for a partitioned database
environment (Linux and UNIX) . . . . .
Creating required users (Linux and UNIX) . .

. 39
. 40
. 40
. 41
. 41
. 43
. 43
. 43
. 45
. 46
47
. 48
. 49
. 57

Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server
product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Installing DB2 servers (Windows) . . . . . . .
Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX) . . . .
Setting up a partitioned database environment . .
Installing database partition servers on participating
computers using a response file (Linux and UNIX) .
Upgrading your 32-bit DB2 instances to 64-bit
instances (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . .
DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2
UDB Version 8 (Windows) . . . . . . . . .
Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)
Applying DB2 product licenses . . . . . . . .
Working with existing DB2 copies . . . . . . .

63
65
68
70
71
71
72
73
73

Part 2. After DB2 server installation 75
Chapter 5. After you install . . . . . . 77
Verifying the installation . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying the installation using the command line
processor (CLP) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying access to the registry on the
instance-owning computer (Windows) . . . .
Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using
First Steps (Linux and Windows) . . . . . .
Verifying a partitioned database server
installation (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . .
Verifying a partitioned database environment
installation (Windows) . . . . . . . . . .
DB2 product licensing . . . . . . . . . . .

77
77
77
78
79
80
81

iii
DB2 product license files . . . . . . . . .
Registering a DB2 product or feature license key
using the db2licm command . . . . . . . .
Registering a DB2 product or feature license key
using the License Center . . . . . . . . .
Checking DB2 license compliance . . . . . .
Upgrading a Try and Buy license . . . . . .
Changing DB2 product editions . . . . . . .
Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and
UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing DB2 product editions (Windows) . . .
Applying fix packs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up notification and contact lists . . . . .
Password rules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding your user ID to the DB2ADMNS and
DB2USERS user groups (Windows) . . . . . .
DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg . . . .
Updating the node configuration file (Linux and
UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling communications between database
partition servers (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . .
Enabling the execution of remote commands (Linux
and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Control Center administration (Linux) . .

81
81
82
83
84
84
84
86
87
88
89
89
90

97
98
99

Appendix A. Language support. . . . 103
103
. 104
. 105
. 105
. 106

Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2
products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Uninstalling DB2 products (Windows) . . . . .
Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows) . .
Uninstalling DB2 products (Linux and UNIX) . .
Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and
UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux
and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux
and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) . .
Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) . .
Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall
or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX) .

iv

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

Mounting the
Mounting the
Mounting the
Mounting the
Environment)

CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
. . .

(AIX) . . . . .
(HP-UX) . . . .
(Linux) . . . .
(Solaris Operating
. . . . . . .

.
.
.

.
.
.

. 115
. 116
. 116

.

.

. 117

Appendix D. Installing the DB2
Information Center . . . . . . . . . 119
DB2 Information Center installation options
Features of the DB2 Information Center .
Installing the DB2 Information Center using
DB2 Setup wizard (Linux) . . . . . .
DB2 Information Center daemon (Linux)
Installing the DB2 Information Center using
DB2 Setup wizard (Windows) . . . . .

. .
. .
the
. .
. .
the
. .

. 119
. 120
. 122
. 123
. 124

95

Part 3. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 101
Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows)
Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and
UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported DB2 interface languages . . . . .
Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup
wizard in another language . . . . . . .
Displaying the db2setup command in your
national language . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C. Mounting the DB2
product CD-ROM (Linux and UNIX) . . 115

109
109
110
110

Appendix E. DB2 Database technical
information . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Overview of the DB2 technical information . . .
Documentation feedback . . . . . . . .
DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format
Ordering printed DB2 books . . . . . . . .
Displaying SQL state help from the command line
processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing different versions of the DB2
Information Center . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying topics in your preferred language in the
DB2 Information Center . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on
your computer or intranet server . . . . . . .
DB2 tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB2 troubleshooting information . . . . . . .
Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F. Notices
Trademarks .

.

.

.

.

127
127
128
130
131
132
132
133
135
135
136

. . . . . . . . 137
.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. 139

Appendix G. First Steps . . . . . . . 141
First Steps interface . . . . .
Deleting a Firefox browser profile

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

. 141
. 142

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

111

Contacting IBM
111
112
112
113

. . . . . . . . . . 149
Who should read this book
This Quick Beginnings book is intended for users responsible for the following
tasks:
v Installing DB2 server products
v Migrating DB2 server products
v Setting up a DB2 server environment
For information on installing and configuring DB2 clients, see the Quick Beginnings
for DB2 clients book.
For information on migrating a previous DB2 version, see the Migration Guide.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

v
vi

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Part 1. Installing DB2 servers

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

1
2

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Chapter 1. Installation overview
DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information
For information about DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information, see
http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=73&uid=swg21219983.
Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6

DB2 installation methods
This topic provides information about DB2® installation methods. The following
table shows the installation methods that are available by operating system.
Table 1. Installation method by operating system.
Installation method

Windows®

Linux™ or UNIX®

DB2 Setup wizard

Yes

Yes

db2_install script

No

Yes

Response file installation

Yes

Yes

Manual installation

No

Yes

The following list describes DB2 installation methods.
DB2 Setup wizard
The DB2 Setup wizard is a GUI installer available on Linux, UNIX, and
Windows operating systems. The DB2 Setup wizard provides an
easy-to-use interface for installing DB2 products and for performing initial
setup and configuration tasks. The DB2 Setup wizard can also be used to
create instances and response files. The DB2 Setup wizard on Linux and
UNIX requires an X server to display the GUI.
db2_install script
DB2 product installations are no longer operating system packages, and as
a result, you can no longer use operating system commands for
installation. Any existing scripts that you use to interface and query with
DB2 installations will need to change.
The db2_install script installs all components for the DB2 product you
specify with the English interface support. You can select additional
languages to support with the -L parameter. You cannot select or deselect
components.
The db2_install script allows more control over the setup process, in
exchange for less control over the installation process, as it installs
everything in the language(s) you specify. The DB2 Setup wizard allows
you more control over the installation process by choosing exactly what
gets installed using the custom installation option.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

3
The db2_install script does not perform user and group creation, instance
creation, or configuration. This method of installation might be preferred in
cases where greater control over the setup process than the GUI installer
provides is required.
On Linux and UNIX operating systems, if you embed the DB2 installation
image in your own application, it is possible for your application to receive
installation progress information and CD location prompts from the
installer in computer-readable form.
Response file installation
A response file is a text file that contains setup and configuration values.
The file is read by the DB2 setup program and the installation is
performed according to the values that have been specified. There are a
number of ways to create a response file:
v Using the response file generator (Windows)
v Using the DB2 Setup wizard
v Customizing the sample response files that are provided for each DB2
product
Using the response file generator, you can create a response file that
replicates an existing installation. For example, you might install a DB2
client, fully configure the client, then generate a response file to replicate
the installation and configuration of the client to other computers. The
response file generator is available only on Windows.
The DB2 Setup wizard can create a response file based on the selections
you make as you proceed through the DB2 Setup wizard. Your selections
are recorded in a response file that you can save to a location on your
system. If you select a partitioned database installation, two response files
will be generated, one for the instance-owning computer and one for
participating computers.
You can export a client or server profile with the db2cfexp command to
save your client or server configuration, and then easily import the profile
using the db2cfimp command. A client or server profile exported with the
db2cfexp command can also be imported during a silent installation using
the CLIENT_IMPORT_PROFILE keyword.
For your convenience, you can create a response file without performing
an installation. This feature can be useful in an environment where a DBA
does not have the authority required to perform an installation. The DBA
can create a response file for the installation and provide it to the system
administrator who installs the product on the DBA’s behalf. On Linux and
UNIX, you need root authority to generate a response file.
An alternative to using the response file generator or the DB2 Setup
wizard to create a response file is to manually modify a sample response
file. Sample response files are provided on the DB2 product CD. The
sample response files provide details about all the valid keywords for each
product. They also provide access to parameters that cannot be set using
the DB2 Setup wizard.
On Linux and UNIX operating systems, if you embed the DB2 installation
image in your own application, it is possible for your application to receive
installation progress information and CD location prompts from the
installer in computer-readable form.
Manual installation (Linux and UNIX only)
This method is an advanced installation method that is not recommended

4

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
for most users. It requires the user to manually install payload files. A
payload file is a compressed tarball that contains all of the files and
metadata for an installable component.
Related tasks:
v “Embedding the DB2 installation image (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and
Configuration Supplement
v “Installing a DB2 product manually” in Installation and Configuration Supplement
v “Manually installing payload files (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and
Configuration Supplement
v “Response file installation of DB2 overview (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation
and Configuration Supplement
v “Response file installation of DB2 overview (Windows)” in Installation and
Configuration Supplement
Related reference:
v “db2_install - Install DB2 product command” in Command Reference
v “db2cfexp - Connectivity configuration export tool command” in Command
Reference
v “db2cfimp - Connectivity configuration import tool command” in Command
Reference
v “db2rspgn - Response file generator command (Windows)” in Command Reference
v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference

Supported combinations of client and server versions
This section describes which versions of a client can connect to which versions of a
server. This includes support for earlier versions and support for accessing DB2
databases on midrange and mainframe servers. For the most up-to-date
information, see http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html
Combinations of DB2 UDB Version 8 and DB2 Version 9:
DB2 UDB Version 8 is compatible with DB2 Version 9. That is, clients from either
version can access a remote server of either version. Note the following restrictions:
v There is a restriction when a DB2 client is located on the same system as a DB2
server, and they are different versions. In this case, local client-to-server
connections using Interprocess Communication (IPC) are not supported. Instead,
a connection can be established by treating the connection as a remote
connection (called a loopback connection) using TCP/IP.
Access to DB2 Version 9 servers from DB2 UDB Version 7 clients:
Access from DB2 UDB Version 7 clients is supported but with the same restrictions
as for accessing DB2 UDB Version 8 servers. Restrictions that apply to all DB2 UDB
Version 7 clients include:
v DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only SQL requests on a DB2 Version 9 server.
There is no support for utility or API requests.
Additional restrictions that apply to 32-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients include:

Chapter 1. Installation overview

5
v 32-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only connections to DB2 on Windows.
There is no support for connecting to DB2 on other operating systems. To
overcome this restriction, use a 32-bit DB2 Connect gateway.
Additional restrictions that apply to 64-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients include:
v 64-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only connections to DB2 on operating
systems other than Windows.
Combinations of DB2 Version 9 and DB2 products on midrange and mainframe
platforms:
DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows servers support access from the
following DB2 clients on midrange and mainframe platforms:
v DB2 for z/OS Version 7 and Version 8.
v DB2 for iSeries Version 5.
v DB2 for VM and VSE Version 7.
DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows clients can access the following
earlier versions of DB2 Connect:
v DB2 Connect Version 8.
DB2 Connect Personal Edition Version 9 can connect to the same DB2 server
versions as can DB2 Version 9 clients or servers.
Related concepts:
v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes
v “Client-to-server communications configuration overview” in Quick Beginnings
for DB2 Clients
v “DB2 client setup overview” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients
v “Types of clients - DB2 Runtime Client and DB2 Client” in Quick Beginnings for
DB2 Clients
v “Version 9 incompatibilities with previous releases and changed behaviors” in
Administration Guide: Planning

An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)
This topic outlines the steps for installing your DB2 server product on Windows.
Procedure:
To install your DB2 server product on Windows:
1. Review your DB2 product prerequisites accessible from the DB2 Setup wizard
Launchpad.
2. Review DB2 migration information if applicable.
3. Install your DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard. DB2 Setup wizard
features include:
v A launchpad from which you can view installation notes, product
prerequisites, and release notes, and learn about DB2 Version 9 features.
v Selecting DB2 installation type (typical, compact, or custom).
v Selecting DB2 product installation location.
v Setting up database partitioning options.

6

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v Setting the DB2 copy name.
v Enabling Extended Security.
v Setting the user interface and product messages. The user interface and
product messages are available in several languages and are installed in the
languages that you choose. By installing multiple languages, you can view
the interface and messages in your preferred languages.
v Setting up the DB2 Administration Server (including DAS user setup).
v Setting up Administration contact and health monitor notification.
v Setting up and configuring your instance setup and configuration (including
instance user setup).
v Preparing the DB2 tools catalog.
v Creating response files; you can save your installation choices in a response
file for later installation, or to duplicate the installation on another computer,
or to add another participating computer in a partitioned database
environment.
Related concepts:
v “Migration to DB2 Version 9” in Migration Guide
Related tasks:
v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup
and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63
Related reference:
v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference
v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference
v “Disk and memory requirements” on page 9
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10
v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on
page 12

An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)
This topic outlines steps for installing your DB2 server product on AIX®, HP-UX,
Linux, and Solaris Operating Environment.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

install your DB2 server product:
Review your DB2 product prerequisites.
Review DB2 migration information if applicable.
Modify kernel parameters on HP-UX, Linux, and Solaris Operating
Environment. On all platforms, except for Linux on x86_32, the user must
install a 64-bit kernel before proceeding with the installation, otherwise the
installation will fail.
4. If the DB2 product CD does not automount, mount your DB2 product CD.

Chapter 1. Installation overview

7
5. Install your DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard. DB2 Setup wizard
features include:
v A launchpad from which you can view installation notes and release notes,
and learn about DB2 Version 9 features.
v Selecting DB2 installation type (typical, compact, or custom).
v Selecting DB2 product installation location.
v Setting up database partitioning options for the DB2 instance.
v Setting the user interface and product messages. The user interface and
product messages are available in several languages and are installed in the
languages that you choose. By installing multiple languages, you can view
the interface and messages in your preferred languages.
v Setting up the DB2 Administration Server (including DAS user setup).
v Setting up Administration contact and health monitor notification.
v Setting up and configuring your instance setup and configuration (including
instance user setup).
v Preparing the DB2 tools catalog.
v Creating response files.
Related concepts:
v “Migration to DB2 Version 9” in Migration Guide
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX)” on page 21
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX)” on page 23
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating
System)” on page 27
v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference

8

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites
Disk and memory requirements
Disk requirements:
The disk space required for your product depends on the type of installation you
choose and the type of file system you have. The DB2 Setup wizard provides
dynamic size estimates based on the components selected during a typical,
compact, or custom installation.
On Windows, you might require significantly more space on FAT (File Allocation
Table) drives with large cluster sizes than with NTFS (New Technology File
System) drives.
Remember to include disk space for required software and communication
products.
Memory requirements:
At a minimum, a DB2 database system requires 256 MB of RAM. For a system
running just DB2 and the DB2 GUI tools, a minimum of 512 MB of RAM is
required. However, 1 GB of RAM is recommended for improved performance.
These requirements do not include any additional memory requirements for other
software that is running on your system.
When determining memory requirements, be aware of the following:
v DB2 products that run on HP-UX Version 11i v2 (B.11.23) for Itanium-based
systems require 512 MB of RAM at a minimum.
v For DB2 client support, these memory requirements are for a base of five
concurrent client connections. You will need an additional 16 MB of RAM per
five client connections.
v Memory requirements are affected by the size and complexity of your database
system, as well as by the extent of database activity and the number of clients
accessing your system.
In DB2 Version 9, the new self-tuning memory feature simplifies the task of
memory configuration by automatically setting values for several memory
configuration parameters. When enabled, the memory tuner dynamically
distributes available memory resources among several memory consumers
including sort, the package cache, the lock list and buffer pools.
v On Linux, SWAP space at least twice as large as RAM is recommended.
Related concepts:
v “Self tuning memory” in Performance Guide

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

9
DB2 server installation (Windows)
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers
(Windows)
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see
v www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, software,
and hardware prerequisites must be met:
Table 2. Windows installation prerequisites
Operating System

Service Pack

Hardware

Windows XP Professional
(32-bit)

Service Pack 2 or
later

All Intel® and AMD processors
capable of running the
supported Windows operating
systems (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows XP Professional x64
Windows 2003 Standard Edition
(32-bit and 64-bit)

Service Pack 1 or
later

Windows 2003 Advanced Edition
(32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 2003 Datacenter
Edition (32-bit and 64-bit)

Additional client considerations
DB2 products continue to be supported on Windows 98, Windows ME,
Windows NT®, and Windows 2000 until DB2 Universal Database Version
8.1 goes out of service. For existing installations and new installations of
DB2 products, upgrading to a more current operating system version of
Windows (such as Windows 2003) is recommended. Version 9 clients
cannot be installed on Windows 98, Windows ME, or Windows NT Server
4 operating systems. If you wish to continue running DB2 products on
back level releases of Windows, you require the following maintenance
levels:
v Windows NT Version 4 with Service Pack 6a or later
v Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or later
v Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack 2
Windows XP Service Pack 1 is required for running DB2 applications in
either of the following environments:
v Applications that have COM+ objects using ODBC; or
v Applications that use OLE DB Provider for ODBC with OLE DB
resource pooling disabled
If you are unsure about whether your application environment qualifies,
then it is recommended that you install the appropriate Windows service
level.
For more information about this COM+ issue, see the following Microsoft®
Knowledge Base article:
v http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;EN-US;306414

10

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Additional software considerations
v MDAC 2.8 is required. The DB2 Setup wizard will install MDAC 2.8 if it
is not already installed.

v

v

v
v
v

Note: If a previous version of MDAC (for example, 2.7) is already
installed, DB2 install will upgrade MDAC to 2.8. For a typical
install, MDAC 2.8 is installed. For a compact install, MDAC 2.8 is
not installed. For a custom install, MDAC 2.8 is installed but only
if you have not deselected the default which is to install it. If you
deselect MDAC as part of a custom install, it will not be installed.
If you plan to use LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), you
should use either a Microsoft LDAP client or the IBM® Tivoli® Directory
Server v6 client (also known as the IBM LDAP client which is included
with DB2). Prior to installation of the Microsoft Active Directory, you
will need to extend your directory schema using the db2schex utility,
which can be found on the installation media.
The Microsoft LDAP client is included with the operating system for
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
If you plan to use the Tivoli Storage Manager facilities for the backup
and restoration of your databases, you need the Tivoli Storage Manager
Client Version 4.2.0 or later.
– For Windows 64-bit operating systems, you require the TSM client
API Version 5.1.
If you have the IBM Antivirus program installed on your operating
system, it must be disabled or uninstalled to complete a DB2 installation.
TCP/IP support must be enabled to view online help.
One of the following browsers is required to view online help, run the
DB2 install launchpad (setup.exe), and to run First Steps (db2fs):
– Internet Explorer 5.5 and up
– Mozilla 1.4 and up
– Firefox 1.0 and up
– Netscape 7.0 and up

Related concepts:
v “Support changes for 32-bit and 64-bit DB2 servers” in Migration Guide
Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6
Related reference:
v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35
v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients

DB2 services running on your system (Windows)
The following table lists the DB2 services that run on your system when DB2 9.1 is
installed:

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

11
Table 3. DB2 Services
Service Display Name

Service Name

Description

DB2 - (db2copyname) <instance name>

<instance name>

Allows applications to create,
update, control, and manage
relational databases.

DB2 Governor
(db2copyname)

DB2GOVERNOR
_db2copyname

Collects statistics for
applications connected to DB2
databases.

DB2 Information Center
Server V9.1

DB2ICSERVER_V91

Provides documentation for
DB2 Universal Database™ and
related DB2 products.

DB2 License Server
(db2copyname)

DB2LICD _db2copyname

Monitors DB2 license
compliance.

DB2 Management Service DB2MGMTSVC _db2copyname Manages DB2 registry entries
(db2copyname)
for backward compatibility
purposes for the DB2 copy.
DB2 Query Patroller
(db2copyname)

DB2QP _db2copyname

DB2 Query Patroller

DB2 Remote Command
Server (db2copyname)

DB2REMOTECMD
_db2copyname

Supports remote DB2
command execution.

DB2 Security Server
(db2copyname)

DB2NTSECSERVER
_db2copyname

Authenticates DB2 database
users when the authentication
is performed at the client
computer.

DB2DAS - DB2DASXX

DB2DASXX (where XX is
00-99)

Supports local and remote
database administrative
requests.

Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10

Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server
products (Windows)
If you are installing a DB2 server product on Windows, you require the following
user accounts:
v An installation user account and
v Optional - one or more setup user accounts. You can create these accounts
during the installation.
– A DB2 Administration Server (DAS) user account
– A DB2 instance user account. You can also use the Local System account for
products other than DB2 Enterprise Server Edition.
The installation user account is the account of the user performing the installation.
The installation user account must be defined prior to running the DB2 Setup
wizard. The setup user accounts can be defined prior to installation or you can
have the DB2 Setup wizard create them for you.

12

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
All user account names must adhere to your system naming rules and to DB2
naming rules.
Extended security on Windows:
DB2 products offer extended Windows security. You can install DB2 with a user ID,
but unless that user ID belongs to either the DB2ADMNS or DB2USERS group,
that user ID won’t be able to run any DB2 commands.
The DB2 installer creates these two new groups. You can either specify a new
name during a custom installation or accept the default names.
To enable this security feature, select the Enable operating system security check
box on the Enable operating system security for DB2 objects panel during the
DB2 installation. Accept the default values for the DB2 Administrators Group field,
and the DB2 Users Group field. The default group names are DB2ADMNS and
DB2USERS. If there is a conflict with existing group names, you will be prompted
to change the group names. If required, you can specify your own values.
DB2 server user accounts:
Installation user account
A local or domain user account is required to perform the installation.
Normally, the user account must belong to the Administrators group on the
machine where you will perform the installation.
Alternatively, a non-Administrator user account can be used. This
alternative requires that a member of the Windows Administrators group
first configure the Windows elevated privileges settings to allow a
non-Administrator user account to perform an installation.
The user right ″Access this computer from the network″ is required for the
installation user account.
For domain accounts, to verify user IDs on the DB2 server, the installation
user ID must belong to the Domain Administrators group on the domain
where the accounts are going to be created.
You may also use the built-in Local System account to run the installation
for all products.
User rights granted by the DB2 installer:
The DB2 installation program does not grant the Debug Programs user
right. The DB2 installer grants the following user rights:
v Act as part of the operating system
v Create token object
v Lock pages in memory
v Log on as a service
v Increase quotas
v Replace a process level token
DB2 Administration Server (DAS) user account
A local or domain user account is required for the DB2 Administration
Server (DAS).
If you are performing a response file installation, you can also specify the
Local System account in the response file. For more details, refer to the
sample response files in the db2windowssamples directory.
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

13
The Local System account is available for all products, except DB2
Enterprise Server Edition and can be selected through the DB2 Setup
wizard.
The DB2 Administration Server (DAS) is a special DB2 administration
service used to support the GUI tools and assist with administration tasks
on local and remote DB2 servers. The DAS has an assigned user account
that is used to log the DAS service on to the computer when the DAS
service is started.
You can create the DAS user account before installing DB2 or you can have
the DB2 Setup wizard create it for you. If you want to have the DB2 Setup
wizard create a new domain user account, the user account you use to
perform the installation must have authority to create domain user
accounts. The user account must belong to the Administrators group on the
machine where you will perform the installation. This account will be
granted the following user rights:
v Act as part of the operating system
v Debug programs
Create token object
Lock pages in memory
Log on as a service
Increase quotas (adjust memory quotas for a process on Windows XP
and Windows Server 2003 operating systems)
v Replace a process level token
v
v
v
v

If extended security is enabled, then the DB2ADMNS group will have all
these privileges. You can simply add users to that group and you do not
need to add these privileges explicitly. However, the user still needs to be a
member of the Local Administrators group.
The Lock pages in memory privilege is required for AWE (Advanced
Windowing Extensions) support. The ″Debug programs″ privilege is only
needed when DB2 group lookup is explicitly specified to use the access
token.
If the user account is created by the install program, the user account will
be granted these privileges and if the user account already exists, this
account will also be granted these privileges. If the install grants the
privileges, some of them will only be effective on first log-on by the
account that was granted the privileges or upon reboot.
It is recommended that the DAS user have SYSADM authority on each of
the DB2 systems within your environment so that it can start or stop other
instances if required. By default, any user that is part of the Administrator
group has SYSADM authority.
DB2 instance user account
The user account must belong to the Administrators group on the machine
where you will perform the installation.
A local or domain user account is required for the DB2 instance. Every
DB2 instance has one user that is assigned when the instance is created.
DB2 logs on with this user name when the instance is started.
You may also use the built-in Local System account to run the installation
for all products, except for DB2 Enterprise Server Edition.

14

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
You can create the DB2 instance user account before installing DB2 or you
can have theDB2 Setup wizard create it for you. If you want to have the
DB2 Setup wizard create a new domain user account, the user account you
use to perform the installation must have authority to create domain user
accounts. This account will be granted the following user rights:
v Act as part of the operating system
v Debug programs
v Create token object
v Increase quotas
v Lock pages in memory
v Log on as a service
v Replace a process level token
If extended security is enabled, then the DB2ADMNS group will have all
these privileges. You can simply add users to that group and you do not
need to add these privileges explicitly. However, the user still needs to be a
member of the Local Administrators group.
The Lock pages in memory privilege is required for AWE (Advanced
Windowing Extensions) support. The ″Debug programs″ privilege is only
needed when DB2 group lookup is explicitly specified to use the access
token.
If the user account is created by the install program, the user account will
be granted these privileges and if the user account already exists, this
account will also be granted these privileges. If the install grants the
privileges, some of them will only be effective on first log-on by the
account that was granted the privileges or upon reboot.
Related concepts:
v “User, user ID and group naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6
v “Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to installing a DB2 product
(Windows)” on page 18

Preparing the environment for a partitioned DB2 server
(Windows)
This topic describes the steps required to prepare your Windows environment for a
partitioned installation of the DB2 product.
Restrictions:
Each participating computer must have the same operating system. For example,
you cannot have a partitioned database system that includes both Windows 2000
and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
Procedure:
To prepare your Windows environment for installation:

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

15
1. Ensure that the primary computer and participating computers belong to the
same Windows domain. Check the domain to which the computer belongs by
using the System Properties dialog, accessible through the Control Panel.
2. Ensure that time and date settings on the primary computer and participating
computers are consistent. To be considered consistent, the difference in GMT
time between all computers must be no greater than one hour.
System date and time can be modified using the Date/Time Properties dialog,
accessible through the Control Panel. You can use the max_time_diff
configuration parameter to change this restriction. The default is max_time_diff
= 60, which allows a difference of less than 60 minutes.
3. Ensure that each computer object that participates in the partitioned database
environment has the ″Trust computer for delegation″ privilege flagged.
4. Ensure that all participating computers can communicate with each other using
TCP/IP:
a. On one participating computer, enter the hostname command, which will
return the hostname of the computer.
b. On another participating computer, enter the following command:
ping hostname

where hostname represents the hostname of the primary computer. If the test
is successful, you will receive output similar to the following:
Pinging ServerA.ibm.com [9.21.27.230] with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128

Repeat these steps until you are sure that all participating computers can
communicate with each other using TCP/IP. Each computer must have a
static IP address.
If you are planning to use multiple network adapters, you can specify
which adapter to use to communicate between database partition servers.
Use the db2nchg command to specify the netname field in the db2nodes.cfg
file after the installation is complete.
5. During the installation you will be asked to provide a DB2 Administration
Server user account. This is a local or domain user account that will be used by
the DB2 Administration Server (DAS). The DAS is an administration service
used to support the GUI tools and assist with administration tasks. You can
define a user now or have the DB2 Setup wizard create one for you. If you
want to create a new domain user using the DB2 Setup wizard, the account
used to perform the installation must have authority to create domain users.
6. On the primary computer, where you will install the instance-owning partition,
you must have a domain user account that belongs to the local Administrators
group. You will log on as this user when you install DB2. You must add the
same user account to the local Administrators group on each participating
computer. This user must have the Act as part of the operating system user right.
7. Ensure that all computers in the instance have the database directory on the
same local drive letter.
8. During the installation you will be asked to provide a domain user account to
be associated with the DB2 instance. Every DB2 instance has one user assigned.
DB2 logs on with this user name when the instance is started. You can define a
user now, or you can have the DB2 Setup wizard create a new domain user for
you.

16

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
When adding a new node to a partitioned environment the DB2 copy name
must be the same on all computers.
If you want to create a new domain user using the DB2 Setup wizard, the
account used to perform the installation must have authority to create domain
users. The instance user domain account must belong to the local Administrators
group on all the participating computers and will be granted the following user
rights:
v Act as part of the operating system
v Create token object
v Lock pages in memory
v Log on as a service
v Increase quotas
v Replace a process level token
The installation program grants all of these privileges except for the Debug
programs privilege.
If extended security was selected, then the account must also be a member of
the DB2ADMNS group. The DB2ADMNS group already has these privileges so
the privileges would not be required to be added explicitly to the account.
Related reference:
v “db2nchg - Change database partition server configuration command” in
Command Reference
v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on
page 12

Granting user rights (Windows)
This topic describes the steps required to grant user rights on Windows operating
systems. Specific user rights are recommended for user accounts required to install
and set up DB2.
Prerequisites:
To grant advanced user rights on Windows you must be logged on as a local
Administrator.
Procedure:
1. Click Start and select Run ....
2. Type secpol.msc and click OK.
3. Select Local Security Policy.
4. In the left window pane, expand the Local Policies object, then select User
Rights Assignment.
5. In the right window pane, select the user right that you want to assign.
6. From the menu, select Action —> Security...
7. Click Add, then select a user or group to assign the right to, and click Add.
8. Click OK.
If your computer belongs to a Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 domain, the
domain user rights may override your local settings. In this case, your Network
Administrator will have to make the changes to the user rights.

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

17
Related concepts:
v “User, user ID and group naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related reference:
v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on
page 12

Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to installing a
DB2 product (Windows)
The usual method to install a DB2 product on Windows is to use an Administrator
user account. However, DB2 products can be installed using a non-administrator
account. To do so, a Windows Administrator must configure the elevated privileges
feature in Windows.
This task explains how a Windows Administrator can set up a computer with
elevated privileges to allow installation using a non-Administrator user account.
The related task of granting DB2 administration authorities to non-Administrator
users is also covered.
Typically a Windows Administrator would perform this task to enable another
person who does not have an Administrator account to install a DB2 product. The
role of this person might be only to install DB2 products or to also administer DB2
products once installed.
Prior to initiating this procedure, note the following restrictions on
non-Administrator installation using elevated privileges:
v Non-Administrator users can only install fix packs, add-on products, or upgrade
DB2 as long as prior installations or upgrades were also performed by a
non-Administrator user.
v Non-Administrator users cannot uninstall a DB2 product.
Procedure for setting up a computer with elevated privileges:
This procedure uses the Windows Group Policy Editor. Instructions for using
regedit instead are provided in additional notes.
1. Enter gpedit.msc at the command line.
2. Enable elevated privileges for the computer.
a. Click on Computer Configuration –> Administrative Templates –>Windows
Components –> Windows Installer.
b. Enter the following Group Policy settings:
v Enable: Always install with elevated privileges (mandatory)
v Enable: Enable user control over installs (mandatory)
v Enable: Disable Windows Installer. Then set Disable Windows Installer
to Never. (for Windows 2003 and XP).
v Enable: Enable user to patch elevated products (optional)
v Enable: Enable user to use media source while elevated (optional)
v Enable: Enable user to browse for source while elevated (optional)
3. Enable elevated privileges for the user account that will be performing the
installation.

18

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
a. Click on User Configuration –> Administrative Templates –>Windows
Components –> Windows Installer.
b. Enter the following Group Policy settings:
v Enable: Always install with elevated privileges (mandatory)
4. Perform setup related to the user account that will install DB2.
v Identify the user account that will install DB2. If necessary, create that
account.
v Give that account write permission for the drive on which an installation is
planned.
5. Optional: Complete additional steps applicable to installing fix packs:
v Provide read access to the sqllibcfg directory.
v Ensure that allowlockdownpatch is enabled (as described in the Windows
Installer SDK documentation) because fix pack installations are considered
minor upgrades to the product.
6. Refresh the computer’s security policy in any one of the following ways:
v Reboot the PC.
v For Windows XP and Windows 2000: at the command line, enter
gpupdate.exe.
v For Windows 2000: At the command line, enter secedit.exe / refreshpolicy
{machine_policy │user_policy}.
By following this procedure you will have set up the computer with elevated
privileges and set up a user account that will be able to install DB2 server
products, clients and fix packs
Using regedit instead of the Windows Group Policy Editor:
An alternative to using the Windows Group Policy Editor is to use regedit.
1. In the registry branch HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPolicies
MicrosoftWindows, add the key installer
2. Edit the key installer with the following values:
v For AlwaysInstallElevated, enter REG_DWORD=1.
v For AllowLockdownBrowse, enter REG_DWORD=1.
v For AllowLockdownMedia, enter REG_DWORD=1.
v For AllowLockdownPatch, enter REG_DWORD=1.
v For DisableMSI, enter REG_DWORD=0.
v For EnableUserControl, enter REG_DWORD=1.
3. In the registry branch HKEY_CURRENT_USERSOFTWAREPolicies
MicrosoftWindows, add the key installer
4. Edit the key installer with the following values:
v For AlwaysInstallElevated, enter REG_DWORD=1.
Removing elevated privileges:
After you have given elevated privileges, you can reverse this action. To do so,
remove the registry key Installer under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARE
PoliciesMicrosoftWindows.
Granting a non-administrator user DB2 administration authorities:

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

19
At this point, only members of the Windows Administrators group will have DB2
administration authorities. The Windows Administrator has the option to grant one
or more DB2 authorities, such as SYSADM, SYSMAINT, or SYSCTRL to the
non-Administrator user who installed the DB2 product.
Related concepts:
v “Authorization, privileges, and object ownership” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
Related reference:
v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on
page 12

DB2 system administrator group considerations (Windows)
By default, system administrative (SYSADM) authority is granted to any valid DB2
user account that belongs to the Administrators group on the computer where the
account is defined. If the account is a local account, then it must belong to the local
Administrators group. If the account is a domain account, then it must belong to
the Administrators group at the domain controller or the local Administrators
group.
For example, if a user logs on to a domain account and tries to access a DB2
database, the DB2 database server goes to a domain controller to enumerate
groups (including the Administrators group). You can force the DB2 database
server to always perform group lookup on the local computer by setting the
registry variable DB2_GRP_LOOKUP=local and adding the domain accounts (or
global groups) to the local group.
For a domain user to have SYSADM authority, they must belong to the local
Administrators group or the Administrators group at the domain controller. Since
the DB2 database server always performs authorization at the machine where the
account is defined, adding a domain user to the local Administrators group on the
server does not grant the domain user SYSADM authority to this group.
To avoid adding a domain user to the Administrators group at the domain
controller, create a global group and add the domain users to which you want to
grant SYSADM authority to it. Then update the DB2 configuration parameter
SYSADM_GROUP with the name of the global group.
To update the DB2 configuration parameter, enter the following commands:
db2 update dbm cfg using sysadm_group global_group
db2stop
db2start

Related concepts:
v “System administration authority (SYSADM)” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
Related reference:
v “sysadm_group - System administration authority group name configuration
parameter” in Performance Guide

20

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Fast communications manager (Windows)
The fast communications manager (FCM) provides communications support for
DB2 server products. Each database partition server has one FCM sender, and one
FCM receiver daemon to provide communications between database partition
servers to handle agent requests and to deliver message buffers. The FCM daemon
is started when you start the instance.
If communications fail between database partition servers or if they re-establish
communications, the FCM thread updates information (that you can query with
the database system monitor) and causes the appropriate action (such as the
rollback of an affected transaction) to be performed. You can use the database
system monitor to help you set the FCM configuration parameters.
You can specify the number of FCM message buffers with the fcm_num_buffers
database manager configuration parameter and the number of FCM channels with
thefcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter. The
fcm_num_buffers and fcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter
are set to AUTOMATIC as the default value. FCM monitors resource usage when
any of these parameter are set to automatic, and incrementally releases resources. It
is recommended to leave these parameters set to AUTOMATIC.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
v “Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Windows)” on
page 39

DB2 server installation (Linux and UNIX)
Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX)
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware,
and communications prerequisites must be met:
Table 4. AIX installation prerequisites
AIX Version

Operating System

Hardware

AIX Version 5.2.0

DB2 client is available using the 64-bit AIX
kernel.

One of:

DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, for either
single-partition or partitioned database
environment, is available with the required
64-bit AIX kernel.

v eServer™ pSeries®

DB2 client is available using the 64-bit AIX
kernel.

One of:

DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, for either
single-partition or partitioned database
environment, is available with the required
64-bit AIX kernel.

v eServer pSeries

AIX Version 5.3.0

v IBM RISC/6000

v IBM RISC/6000

Software considerations:
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

21
v (Clients only:) If you plan to use Kerberos Authentication, you require IBM
Network Authentication Service client v1.3 or later. The NAS client is provided
with the AIX Bonus CD.
v Use the bosboot command to switch to the 64-bit kernel.
To switch to a 64-bit kernel, you require root authority and should enter the
following commands:
ln -sf /usr/lib/boot/unix_64 /unix
ln -sf /usr/lib/boot/unix_64 /usr/lib/boot/unix
bosboot -a
shutdown -Fr

v DB2 Version 9 requires the “IBM C++ Runtime Environment Components for
AIX” which includes xlC.rte 8.0.0.4. This is available from the IBM AIX support
web site.
v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First
Steps (db2fs):
– Mozilla 1.4 and up
– Firefox 1.0 and up
– Netscape 7.0 and up
DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System):
The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not
recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a
remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of
potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that
involve:
v Performance (impacted by network performance)
v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure)
v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines)
v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult
As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including:
v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path
v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be
given to the mounting machine)
v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting
machines
v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up
and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features
v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment
v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the
mounting machine
For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File
System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made
available.
Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7
Related reference:

22

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35
v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients

Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX)
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware,
and communications prerequisites must be met:
Table 5. HP-UX installation prerequisites for HP-UX 11iv2
Operating System

Hardware

DB2 products can run on HP-UX 11iv2 (11.23.0505) for PA-RISC
2.x-based (PA-8x00) and Itanium-based systems with:

One of:

v May 2005 Base Quality (QPKBASE) bundle

v HP Integrity Series server

v HP 9000 Series 700 or 800 system

v May 2005 Applications Quality (QPAPPS) bundle
and the PHNE_32606 patch. (64-bit HP-UX kernel is required; server
only)

Kernel configuration considerations:
A system restart is required if you update the kernel configuration parameters. The
kernel configuration parameters are set in /etc/system. Depending on the values
of your kernel configuration parameters, you might need to modify some of them
before you install the DB2 Version 9 client or server products. If the kernel
configuration parameters are modified, a reboot is necessary to make the changes
to /etc/system effective.
Software considerations:
v If you are installing the Application Development Client, you must have a C
compiler to build SQL Stored Procedures.
v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First
Steps (db2fs):
– Mozilla 1.4 and up
– Firefox 1.0 and up
– Netscape 7.0 and up
DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System):
The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not
recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a
remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of
potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that
involve:
v Performance (impacted by network performance)
v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure)
v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines)
v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult
As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including:
v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

23
v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be
given to the mounting machine)
v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting
machines
v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up
and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features
v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment
v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the
mounting machine
For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File
System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made
available.
Related tasks:
v “Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX)” on page 40
Related reference:
v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients
v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35

Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
For the latest information on supported Linux distributions, point your browser to
http://www.ibm.com/db2/linux/validate.
The supported operating systems for Linux include:
v Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 (RHEL4) Update 2
v SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SLES9) Service Pack 2
To install a DB2 client or server product, the following distribution requirements,
hardware, and communications prerequisites must be met:
Table 6. Linux prerequisites
Distribution Requirements

Hardware

You should update your kernel configuration parameters DB2 server products are supported on:
in preparation for your Linux distribution. The default
v x86 (Intel Pentium®, Intel Xeon®, and AMD Athlon)
values for particular kernel parameters are not sufficient
v x86–64 (Intel EM64T and AMD64)
when running a DB2 database system.
v IA64 (Intel Itanium® 2 or higher)
You may also have other products or applications that
v POWER™ (any iSeries™ or pSeries that support Linux)
require Linux system resources. You should set the
v (Server only)eServer zSeries®.
kernel configuration parameters based on the needs of
– The Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) is not
your Linux system working environment.
supported.
The kernel configuration parameters are set in
v (Client only)64-bit zSeries or System z9™ boxes.
/etc/sysctl.conf. See the Modifying kernel parameters
(Linux) section of the DB2 Information Center.
Refer to your operating system manual for information
on setting and activating these parameters using the
sysctl command.

24

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Package requirements (server only):
The following tables list the package requirements for SUSE Linux and Red Hat
distributions for DB2 Version 9 partitioned servers.
v The pdksh Korn Shell package is required for all DB2 systems.
v A remote shell utility is required for partitioned database systems. DB2 supports
the following remote shell utilities:
– rsh
– ssh
By default, DB2 uses rsh when executing commands on remote DB2 nodes, for
example, when starting a remote DB2 database partition. To use the DB2 default,
the rsh-server package must be installed (see table below). For a comparison
between rsh and ssh, see the “Security issues when installing DB2” section of the
Administration Guide: Implementation.
If you choose to use the rsh remote shell utility, inetd (or xinetd) must be
installed and running as well. If you choose to use the ssh remote shell utility,
you need to set the DB2RSHCMD registry variable immediately after the DB2
installation is complete. If this registry variable is not set, rsh is used. For more
information on the DB2RSHCMD registry variable, see the Performance Guide
book.
v The nfs-utils Network File System support package is required for partitioned
database systems.
All required packages should be installed and configured before continuing with
the DB2 setup. For general Linux information, see your Linux distribution
documentation.
Package requirements for SUSE Linux
Package name

Description

pdksh

Korn Shell. This package is required for partitioned database
environments.

openssh

This package contains a set of server programs which allow
users to run commands on (and from) remote computers via a
secure shell. This package is not required if you use the default
configuration of DB2 with rsh.

rsh-server

This package contains a set of server programs which allow
users to run commands on remote computers, login in to other
computers, and copy files between computers (rsh, rexec, rlogin,
and rcp). This package is not required if you configure DB2 to
use ssh.

nfs-utils

Network File System support package. It allows access to local
files from remote computers.

Package requirements for Red Hat
Directory

Package name

Description

/System Environment/Shell

pdksh

Korn Shell. This package is required for
partitioned database environments.

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

25
Package requirements for Red Hat
Directory

Package name

Description

/Applications/Internet

openssh

This package contains a set of client
programs which allow users to run
commands on a remote computer via a
secure shell. This package is not
required if you use the default
configuration of DB2 with rsh.

/System Environment/
Daemons

openssh-server

This package contains a set of server
programs which allow users to run
commands from a remote computer via
a secure shell. This package is not
required if you use the default
configuration of DB2 with rsh.

/System Environment/
Daemons

rsh-server

This package contains a set of programs
which allow users to run commands on
a remote computer. Required for
partitioned database environments. This
package is not required if you configure
DB2 to use ssh.

/System Environment/
Daemons

nfs-utils

Network File System support package.
It allows access to local files from
remote computers.

Software considerations:
v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First
Steps (db2fs):
– Mozilla 1.4 and up
– Firefox 1.0 and up
– Netscape 7.0 and up
v An X Window System software capable of rendering a graphical user interface is
required if you want to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install DB2 or if you want
to use any DB2 graphical tools. (Available only on Linux for x86 and Linux on
AMD 64/EM64T.)
DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System):
The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not
recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a
remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of
potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that
involve:
v Performance (impacted by network performance)
v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure)
v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines)
v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult
As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including:
v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path
v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be
given to the mounting machine)

26

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting
machines
v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up
and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features
v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment
v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the
mounting machine
For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File
System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made
available.
Related concepts:
v “Security issues when installing the DB2 database manager” in Administration
Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Modifying kernel parameters (Linux)” on page 41
v “Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries” on page 33
Related reference:
v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients
v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35
v “Communications variables” in Performance Guide

Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris
Operating System)
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware,
and communications prerequisites must be met:
Table 7. Solaris Operating System installation prerequisites
Operating System

Hardware

DB2 client and server products are supported on the following
Solaris Operating System versions:

Solaris UltraSPARC-based computer

v Solaris 9
The following patches are also required:
– 111711-12
– 111712-12
v Solaris 10

Kernel configuration considerations:
A system restart is required if you update the kernel configuration parameters. The
kernel configuration parameters are set in /etc/system and if these parameters
require modification to accommodate the DB2 client, a reboot is necessary to make
the changes to /etc/system effective. These parameters must be set before you
install a DB2 client.
Software considerations:
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

27
v (Clients only:) If you plan to use Kerberos Authentication, you require Solaris
Operating System 9 or higher with IBM Network Authentication Service (NAS)
client v1.4 or higher. The NAS client can be downloaded from Web site:
https://www6.software.ibm.com/dl/dm/dm-nas-p.
v If you are installing the Application Development Client, you must have a C
compiler to build SQL Stored Procedures.
v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First
Steps (db2fs):
– Mozilla 1.4 and up
– Firefox 1.0 and up
– Netscape 7.0 and up
″Recommended & Security Patches″ can be obtained from the
http://sunsolve.sun.com Web site. From the SunSolve Online Web site, click on the
″Patches″ menu item in the left panel.
The Java™2 Standard Edition (J2SE) Solaris Operating System Patch Clusters and
the SUNWlibC software are also required and can be obtained from the
http://sunsolve.sun.com Web site.
For DB2 on 64-bit Fujitsu PRIMEPOWER systems, you require the following:
v Solaris 9 Kernel Update Patch 112233-01 or later to get the fix for patch
912041-01.
The Fujitsu PRIMEPOWER patches for the Solaris Operating System can be
downloaded from FTSI at: http://download.ftsi.fujitsu.com/.
DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System):
The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not
recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a
remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of
potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that
involve:
v Performance (impacted by network performance)
v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure)
v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines)
v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult
As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including:
v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path
v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be
given to the mounting machine)
v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting
machines
v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up
and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features
v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment
v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the
mounting machine

28

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File
System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made
available.
Related tasks:
v “Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 43
Related reference:
v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients
v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35

Listing DB2 products installed on your system (Linux and
UNIX)
With the ability to install multiple copies of DB2 products on your system and the
flexibility to install DB2 products and features in the path of your choice, you need
a tool to help you keep track of what is installed and where it is installed. On
supported Linux and UNIX operating systems, the db2ls command lists the DB2
products and features installed on your system, including the DB2 Version 9
HTML documentation.
The db2ls command can be used to list:
v where DB2 products are installed on your system and list the DB2 product level
v all or specific DB2 products and features in a particular installation path
Prerequisites:
At least one DB2 Version 9 product must already be installed for a symbolic link to
the db2ls command to be available in /usr/local/bin directory.
Restrictions:
The db2ls command is the only method to query a DB2 product. You cannot query
DB2 products using Linux or UNIX operating system native utilities. Any existing
scripts containing a native installation utility that you use to interface and query
with DB2 installations will need to change.
You cannot use the db2ls command on Windows operating systems.
Procedure:
To list the path where DB2 products are installed on your system and list the DB2
product level, enter:
db2ls

The command lists the following information for each DB2 product installed on
your system:
v Installation path
v Level
v Fix pack
v Installation date listing when the DB2 product was last modified.

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

29
To list information about DB2 products or features in a particular installation path
the q parameter must be specified:
db2ls -q -b baseInstallDirectory

where
v q specifies you are querying a product or feature. This parameter is mandatory.
If a DB2 Version 8 product is queried, a blank value is returned.
v b specifies the installation directory of the product or feature. This parameter is
mandatory if you are not running the command from the installation directory.
Depending on the parameters provided, the command lists the following
information:
v Installation path. This is specified only once, not for each feature.
v The following information is displayed:
– Response file ID for the installed feature, or if the p option is specified, the
response file ID for the installed product. For example
ENTERPRISE_SERVER_EDITION.
– Feature name, or if the p option is specified, product name.
– Product version, release, modification level, fix pack level (VRMF). For
example, 9.1.0.0
– Fix pack, if applicable. For example, if fix pack 1 is installed, the value
displayed is 1. This includes interim fix packs, such as fix pack 1a.
v If any of the product’s VRMF information do not match, a warning message
displays at the end of the output listing. The message suggests the fix pack to
apply.
Related concepts:
v “Multiple DB2 copies on the same computer (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation
and Configuration Supplement
Related tasks:
v “Installing a DB2 product using the db2_install or doce_install command (Linux
and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement
v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
v “Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)” on page 72
Related reference:
v “db2ls - List installed DB2 products and features command” in Command
Reference
v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation

Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX)
The fast communications manager (FCM) provides communications support for
DB2 server products. Each database partition server has one FCM sender, and one
FCM receiver daemon to provide communications between database partition
servers to handle agent requests and to deliver message buffers. The FCM daemon
is started when you start the instance.
If communications fail between database partition servers or if they re-establish
communications, the FCM daemons updates information (that you can query with

30

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
the database system monitor) and cause the appropriate action (such as the
rollback of an affected transaction) to be performed. You can use the database
system monitor to help you set the FCM configuration parameters.
You can specify the number of FCM message buffers with the fcm_num_buffers
database manager configuration parameter and the number of FCM channels with
thefcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter. The
fcm_num_buffers and fcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter
are set to AUTOMATIC as the default value. FCM monitors resource usage when
any of these parameter are set to automatic, and incrementally releases resources. It
is recommended to leave these parameters set to AUTOMATIC.
Related tasks:
v “Enabling communications between database partition servers (Linux and
UNIX)” on page 97
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

DB2 users and groups (Linux and UNIX)
The DB2 Setup wizard creates the following users and groups automatically (if
needed) during the installation of your DB2 product. If you are using the DB2
Setup wizard, you do not need to manually create these users and groups. Three
users and three groups are used to operate DB2 on Linux and UNIX.
Instance owner
The DB2 instance is created in the instance owner home directory. This
user ID controls all DB2 processes and owns all filesystems and devices
used by the databases contained within the instance. The default user is
db2inst1 and the default group is db2iadm1.
When using the DB2 Setup wizard, the default action is to create a new
user for your DB2 instance. The default name is db2inst1 – if that user
name already exists, DB2 will try to create another user name, db2inst2. If
that user name also exists, DB2 will keep searching through user names
db2inst3, db2inst4, and so on until it identifies the first user name that is
not already an existing user on the system as the default instance owner
ID. If you choose to proceed this user would be created by DB2. However,
you also have a choice to specify any existing user as the instance owner.
This method for user name creation also applies to the creation of fenced
users and DB2 administration server users.
Fenced user
The fenced user is used to run user defined functions (UDFs) and stored
procedures outside of the address space used by the DB2 database. The
default user is db2fenc1 and the default group is db2fadm1. If you do not
need this level of security, for example in a test environment, you may use
your instance owner as your fenced user.
DB2 administration server user
The user ID for the DB2 administration server user is used to run the DB2
administration server on your system. Default user is dasusr1 and default
group is dasadm1. This user ID is also used by the DB2 GUI tools to
perform administration tasks against the local server database instances
and databases.

Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

31
This user does not contain any databases and there is only one
administration server per machine. For example, one administration server
can service multiple database instances.
Related tasks:
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (AIX)” on page 57
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (HP-UX)” on page 58
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (Linux)” on page 60
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 61

Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and
UNIX)
In environments that include security software, such as NIS (Network Information
Services) or NIS+, there are some installation considerations. The DB2 installation
scripts attempt to update objects that are under the control of the security
packages, such as users and groups, and will not be able to do so if NIS or NIS+ is
being used for user management.
At instance creation, without a security component present, instance owner’s group
list is modified to include that of the database administrative server (DAS) user’s
primary group, if the DAS is created. If the instance creation program is unable to
modify these properties (it will not if NIS/NIS+ is controlling the group), it reports
that it could not. The warning message provides the necessary information to
manually make the changes.
These considerations hold true for any environment in which an external security
program does not allow the DB2 installation or instance creation programs to
modify user characteristics.
If the DB2 Setup wizard detects NIS on your computer, you are not given the
option of creating new users during the installation. Instead, you must choose
existing users.
Consider the following restrictions if you are using NIS or NIS+:
v Groups and users must be created on the NIS server before running the DB2
Setup wizard.
v Secondary groups must be created for the DB2 instance owner and the DB2
Administration Server on the NIS server. You must then add the primary group
of the instance owner to the secondary DB2 Administration Server group.
Likewise, you must add the primary DB2 Administration Server group to the
secondary group for the instance owner.
v On a partitioned DB2 database system, before you create an instance, there must
be an entry for the instance in the etc/services file. For example, if you want to
create an instance for the user db2inst1, you require an entry similar to the
following:
DB2_db2inst1

Related tasks:

32

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

50000/tcp
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
System)” on page 27

for
for
for
for

DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2

clients
clients
clients
clients

and
and
and
and

servers
servers
servers
servers

(AIX)” on page 21
(HP-UX)” on page 23
(Linux)” on page 24
(Solaris Operating

Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries
To install a DB2 product on an IBM zSeries that is running Linux, you must make
the installation image accessible to the Linux operating system. You can use FTP to
send the installation image to the operating system, or use an NFS mount to make
the product CD available to the operating system.
Prerequisites:
You have already obtained your DB2 product installation image.
Using FTP to access the installation image:
From the IBM zSeries computer running Linux:
1. Enter the following command:
ftp yourserver.com

where yourserver.com represents the FTP server where the DB2 product
installation image resides.
2. Enter your user ID and password.
3. Enter the following commands:
bin
get product file

where product file represents the appropriate product package name.
Using the DB2 product CD over NFS to access the installation image:
To use the product CD on a Linux operating system:
1. Mount the appropriate product CD.
2. Export the directory where you mounted the CD. For example, if you mounted
the CD under /cdrom, then export the /cdrom directory.
3. On the IBM zSeries computer running Linux, NFS mount this directory using
the following command:
mount -t nfs -o ro nfsservername:/cdrom /local_directory_name

where nfsservername represents the hostname of the NFS server, cdrom
represents the name of the directory being exported on the NFS server, and
local_directory_name represents the name of the local directory.
4. From the IBM zSeries computer running Linux, change to the directory where
the CD is mounted. You can do this by entering the cd /local_directory_name
command, where local_directory_name represents the mount point of your
product CD.
Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites

33
Related tasks:
v “Installing a DB2 Connect server product (Linux)” in Quick Beginnings for DB2
Connect Servers
v “Mounting the CD-ROM (Linux)” on page 116

34

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Chapter 3. Before you install
Extending the directory schema (Windows)
If you plan to use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory
server feature with Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003, you should extend the
Active Directory schema to contain DB2 object classes and attribute definitions.
You should perform this task before you install any DB2 products.
Extending the directory schema ensures that:
v The default DB2 instance, created during the installation, is cataloged as a DB2
node in Active Directory provided the installation user ID had sufficient
privileges to write to Active Directory.
v Any databases that the user creates after installation will automatically be
cataloged into Active Directory.
If you decide to install your DB2 product and create databases before you extend
the directory schema, you will have to manually register the node and catalog the
databases.
Prerequisites:
Your Windows user account must have Schema Administration authority.
Procedure:
To extend the directory schema:
1. Log onto the domain controller.
2. Run the db2schex.exe program from the installation CD with a user account
that has Schema Administration authority. You can run this program without
logging off and logging on again, as follows:
runas /user:MyDomainAdministrator x:db2Windowsutilitiesdb2schex.exe

where x: represents the CD drive letter.
When db2schex.exe completes, you can proceed with the installation of your
DB2 product.
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10
v “CATALOG LDAP DATABASE command” in Command Reference
v “REGISTER command” in Command Reference

IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products
You require the appropriate level of IBM Software Development Kit (SDK) for Java
listed below to use Java-based tools and to create and run Java applications,
including stored procedures and user-defined functions.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

35
If the IBM SDK for Java is required by a component being installed and the SDK
for Java is not already installed in that path, the SDK for Java will be installed if
you use either the DB2 Setup wizard or a response file to install the product.
The SDK for Java is not installed with the DB2 Runtime client.
The following table lists the installed SDK for Java levels for DB2 according to
operating system platform:
Operating System Platform

SDK for Java level

Windows x86

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Windows x64

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Windows IA64

SDK 1.4.2 Service Release 3

AIX 5

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Solaris Operating Environment SDK 1.4.2_07
HP-UX for PA-RISC 2

HP SDK for J2SE HP-UX 11i platform, adapted by IBM for
IBM Software, Version 1.4.2

HP-UX for Itanium(R)-based
systems

HP SDK for J2SE HP-UX 11i platform, adapted by IBM for
IBM Software, Version 1.4.2

Linux on x86

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Linux on IPF

SDK 1.4.2 Service Release 3

Linux on AMD64/EM64T

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Linux on zSeries

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Linux on POWER

SDK 5 Service Release 1

Notes:
1. With the exception of HP-UX, Linux on IPF, Solaris Operating Environment,
and Windows IA64, although the table above lists the installed SDK for Java
levels, SDK 1.4.2 to SDK 5 is also supported. The SDK for Java levels can be
downloaded from the developerWorks® web page at: http://www.ibm.com/
developerworks/java/jdk/index.html
Note: For Windows operating system platforms, use the IBM Development
Package for Eclipse downloads.
2. DB2 GUI tools only run on Linux on x86, Linux on AMD64/EM64T, Windows
x86, and Windows x64.
3. On Windows x86 and Linux on x86:
v the 32-bit SDK is installed
v 32-bit applications and Java external routines are supported
4. On Linux on IPF:
v only 64-bit applications and Java external routines are supported
5. On all supported platforms (except Windows x86, Linux on x86, and Linux on
IPF):
v 32-bit applications are supported
v 32-bit Java external routines are not supported
v 64-bit applications and Java external routines are supported
Related tasks:
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65

36

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63

Creating group and user IDs for a DB2 database installation
Three users and groups are required.
The DB2 Setup wizard will create these users and groups for you during the
installation process. If you want, you can create them ahead of time.
The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in
the table below. You can specify your own user and group names as long as they
adhere to system naming rules and DB2 naming rules.
The user IDs you create will be required to complete subsequent setup tasks.
Table 8. Default users and groups
User

Example user name

Example group name

Instance owner

db2inst1

db2iadm1

Fenced user

db2fenc1

db2fadm1

DB2 administration server
user

dasusr1

dasadm1

v The instance owner home directory is where the DB2 instance will be created.
v The fenced user is used to run user defined functions (UDFs) and stored
procedures outside of the address space used by the DB2 database.
v The user ID for the DB2 administration server user is used to run the DB2
administration server on your system.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to create users and groups.
Procedure:
To create the required groups and user IDs for DB2:
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. Enter the appropriate commands for your operating system.
Note: These command line examples do not contain passwords. They are
examples only. You can use the passwd username parameter from the
command line to set the password.
AIX

To create groups on AIX, enter the following commands:
mkgroup id=999 db2iadm1
mkgroup id=998 db2fadm1
mkgroup id=997 dasadm1

Create users for each group:
mkuser id=1004 pgrp=db2iadm1 groups=db2iadm1
home=/home/db2inst1 db2inst1
mkuser id=1003 pgrp=db2fadm1 groups=db2fadm1
home=/home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1
mkuser id=1002 pgrp=dasadm1 groups=dasadm1
home=/home/dasusr1 dasusr1

Chapter 3. Before you install

37
HP-UX
To create groups on HP-UX, enter the following commands:
groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1
groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1
groupadd -g 997 dasadm1

Create users for each group:
useradd -g db2iadm1 -d /home/db2instl -m db2inst1
useradd -g db2fadm1 -d /home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1
useradd -g dbasgrp -d /home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1

Linux To create groups on Linux, enter the following commands:
groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1
groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1
groupadd -g 997 dasadm1

Create users for each group:
useradd -u 1004 -g db2iadm1 -m -d /home/db2inst1 db2inst1
useradd -u 1003 -g db2fadm1 -m -d /home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1
useradd -u 1002 -g dasadm1 -m -d /home/dasusr1 dasusr1

Solaris
To create groups on Solaris, enter the following commands:
groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1
groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1
groupadd -g 997 dasadm1

Create users for each group:
useradd -g db2iadm1 -u 1004 -d /export/home/db2inst1 -m db2inst1
useradd -g db2fadm1 -u 1003 -d /export/home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1
useradd -g dasadm1 -u 1002 -d /export/home/dasusr1 -m

dasusr1

Related concepts:
v “General naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Installing a DB2 product manually” in Installation and Configuration Supplement

Multiple CD installation (Linux and UNIX)
Most DB2 product installation images are contained on a single CD. However, on
supported Linux or UNIX platforms, some DB2 product installation image sizes
could span more than a single CD, requiring multiple CDs to install the product.
If you are installing a non-English version of a DB2 product, you will need an
additional CD that contains national language support files. DB2 product files
specific to a language are now grouped on one or more CDs called a National
Language Package. There is a National Language Package for each supported
Linux and UNIX operating system. Each CD contains all supported languages for
all products except the DB2 Information Center (DOCE). An installation using a
National Language Package is only supported using the DB2 Setup wizard or by
using a response file, and only after a product has been installed. You cannot
manually install a National Language Package using the db2_install command.

38

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
When installing a DB2 product, or a National Language Package, the installation
image can be accessed either interactively or from a filesystem:
v To access the installation image interactively, you must insert the CDs when
prompted.
v To access the installation image from a filesystem, prior to installing a DB2
product you must copy the installation image from the CDs to a filesystem.
Then, during installation, specify the location of the filesystem.
Multiple CD installation support is not required for DB2 Version 9 on Windows.
If you are copying the installation images from physical CDs, the CD label contains
a label name. For example, if you are installing the Enterprise Server Edition, the
label name is ese1. When the installation image from the CD is copied to a
filesystem, the installation image is placed in a directory structure such as
ese/disk1. Similarly, when an additional CD is required, for example a National
Language Package with a label name such as nlpack2, the installation image is
copied to a directory structure such as nlpack/disk2. When the subdirectories are
in the same directory, the installer is able to automatically find the installation
images without prompting. This is referred to as automatic discovery.
If you are downloading installation images from the DB2 service site
http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support.html, untar the
downloaded images into the same directory. This will create the subdirectories in
the same directory, and allows the installer to automatically find the installation
images without prompting. As in the previous example of copying the installation
images from physical CDs, if you downloaded installation images for Enterprise
Server Edition and a National Language Package, subdirectories such as ese and
nlpack allow the installer to find the installation images automatically without
prompting.
Related tasks:
v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:
v “National language versions” in Administration Guide: Planning
v “Response file keywords (Windows and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration
Supplement

Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Windows)
This task describes the steps required to verify port range availability on
participating computers. The port range is used by the Fast Communications
Manager (FCM). FCM is a feature of DB2 that handles communications between
database partition servers.
When you install the instance-owning database partition server on the primary
machine, DB2 reserves a port range according to the specified number of database
partition servers participating in partitioned database environment. The default
range is four ports. The DB2 Setup wizard must be able to reserve an identical port
range when database partition servers are installed on participating computers; the
port range needs to be free on each of the database partition servers.

Chapter 3. Before you install

39
This task should be done after you install the instance-owning database partition
server and before you install any participating database partition servers.
Procedure:
To verify the port range availability on participating computers:
1. Open the services file. The default location of the services file is in the
%SystemRoot%system32driversetc directory, where %SystemRoot% is your
Windows root directory.
2. Locate the ports reserved for the DB2 Fast Communications Manager (FCM).
The entries should appear similar to the following:
DB2_DB2
DB2_DB2_1
DB2_DB2_2
DB2_DB2_END

60000/tcp
60001/tcp
60002/tcp
60003/tcp

DB2 reserves the first four available ports after 60000.
3. On each participating computer, open the services file and verify that the
ports reserved for DB2 FCM in the services file of the primary computer are
not being used.
4. In the event that the required ports are in use on a participating computer,
identify an available port range for all computers and update each service file,
including the services file on the primary computer.
Related concepts:
v “Fast communications manager (Windows)” on page 21
Related reference:
v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90

Kernel parameters (Linux and UNIX)
Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX)
For your DB2 product to perform properly on HP-UX, you may need to update
your system’s kernel configuration parameters. You must restart your computer if
you update your kernel configuration parameter values.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters.
Procedure:
To modify kernel parameters:
1. Enter the sam command to start the System Administration Manager (SAM)
program.
2. Double-click the Kernel Configuration icon.
3. Double-click the Configurable Parameters icon.
4. Double-click the parameter that you want to change and type the new value in
the Formula/Value field.
5. Click OK.

40

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
6. Repeat these steps for all of the kernel configuration parameters that you want
to change.
7. When you are finished setting all of the kernel configuration parameters, select
Action --> Process New Kernel from the action menu bar.
The HP-UX operating system automatically restarts after you change the values for
the kernel configuration parameters.
Related reference:
v “db2osconf - Utility for kernel parameter values command” in Command
Reference

Recommended kernel configuration parameters (HP-UX)
For HP-UX systems running a DB2 64-bit database system, run the db2osconf
command to suggest appropriate kernel configuration parameter values for your
system. The db2osconf utility can only be run from $DB2DIR/bin, where $DB2DIR is
the directory where you installed your DB2 product.
Related tasks:
v “Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX)” on page 40

Modifying kernel parameters (Linux)
Before installing a DB2 database system, you should update your Linux kernel
parameters. The default values for particular kernel parameters on Linux are not
sufficient when running a DB2 database system. DB2 automatically raises the IPC
limits where necessary based on the needs of the DB2 database system. However,
it may be more practical to set the limits permanently on your Linux system if you
have products or applications other than a DB2 database system.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters.
Procedure:
To update kernel parameters:
Red Hat and SUSE Linux
The following information can be used to determine if there are any
necessary changes required for your system.
The following is the output from the ipcs -l command. Comments have
been added following the // to show what the parameter names are.
# ipcs -l
------ Shared Memory Limits -------max number of segments = 4096
// SHMMNI
max seg size (kbytes) = 32768
// SHMMAX
max total shared memory (kbytes) = 8388608 // SHMALL
min seg size (bytes) = 1
------ Semaphore Limits -------max number of arrays = 1024
max semaphores per array = 250
max semaphores system wide = 256000
max ops per semop call = 32

//
//
//
//

SEMMNI
SEMMSL
SEMMNS
SEMOPM

Chapter 3. Before you install

41
semaphore max value = 32767
------ Messages: Limits -------max queues system wide = 1024
max size of message (bytes) = 65536
default max size of queue (bytes) = 65536

// MSGMNI
// MSGMAX
// MSGMNB

Beginning with the first section on Shared Memory Limits, SHMMAX and
SHMALL are the parameters that need to be looked at. SHMMAX is the
maximum size of a shared memory segment on a Linux system whereas
SHMALL is the maximum allocation of shared memory pages on a system.
For SHMMAX, the minimum required on x86 systems would be 268435456
(256 MB) and for 64-bit systems, it would be 1073741824 (1 GB).
SHMALL is set to 8 GB by default (8388608 KB = 8 GB). If you have more
physical memory than this, and it is to be used for DB2, then this
parameter should be increased to approximately 90% of the physical
memory as specified for your computer. For instance, if you have a
computer system with 16 GB of memory to be used primarily for DB2,
then 90% of 16 GB is 14.4 GB divided by 4 KB (the base page size) is
3774873. The ipcs output has converted SHMALL into kilobytes. The kernel
requires this value as a number of pages.
The next section covers the amount of semaphores available to the
operating system. The kernel parameter sem consists of 4 tokens, SEMMSL,
SEMMNS, SEMOPM and SEMMNI. SEMMNS is the result of SEMMSL
multiplied by SEMMNI. The database manager requires that the number of
arrays (SEMMNI) be increased as necessary. Typically, SEMMNI should be
twice the maximum number of connections allowed (MAXAGENTS)
multiplied by the number of logical partitions on the database server
computer plus the number of local application connections on the database
server computer.
The third section covers messages on the system.
MSGMNI affects the number of agents that can be started, MSGMAX
affects the size of the message that can be sent in a queue, and MSGMNB
affects the size of the queue.
MSGMAX should be change to 64 KB (that is, 65535 bytes), and MSGMNB
should be increased to 65535 on Server systems.
To modify these kernel parameters, we need to edit the /etc/sysctl.conf
file. If this file does not exist, it should be created. The following lines are
examples of what should be placed into the file:
kernel.sem=250 256000 32 1024
#Example shmmax for a 64-bit system
kernel.shmmax=1073741824
#Example shmall for 90 percent of 16 GB memory
kernel.shmall=3774873
kernel.msgmax=65535
kernel.msgmnb=65535

Run sysctl with -p parameter to load in sysctl settings from the default file
/etc/sysctl.conf.
sysctl -p

42

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
To make the changes effective after every reboot, boot.sysctl needs to be
active on SUSE Linux. On Red Hat, the rc.sysinit initialization script will
read the /etc/sysctl.conf file automatically.
Related tasks:
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24

Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment)
For the DB2 database system to operate properly, it is recommended that you
update your system’s kernel configuration parameters. You can use the db2osconf
utility to suggest recommended kernel parameters.
To use the db2osconf command, you must first install the DB2 database system.
The db2osconf utility can only be run from $DB2DIR/bin, where $DB2DIR is the
directory where you installed your DB2 product.
You must restart your system after modifying kernel parameters.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters.
Procedure:
To set a kernel parameter, add a line at the end of the /etc/system file as follows:
set parameter_name = value

For example, to set the value of the msgsys:msginfo_msgmax parameter, add the
following line to the end of the /etc/system file:
set msgsys:msginfo_msgmax = 65535

After updating the /etc/system file, restart the system.
Related reference:
v “db2osconf - Utility for kernel parameter values command” in Command
Reference

Additional partitioned database environment preinstallation tasks
(Linux and UNIX)
Updating environment settings for a partitioned DB2
installation (AIX)
This task describes the environment settings that you need to update on each
computer that will participate in your partitioned database system.
Procedure:
To update AIX environment settings:
Chapter 3. Before you install

43
1. Log on to the computer as a user with root authority.
2. Set the AIX maxuproc (maximum number of processes per user) device attribute
to 4096 by entering the following command:
chdev -l sys0 -a maxuproc=’4096’

Note: A bosboot/reboot may be required to switch to the 64-bit kernel if a
different image is being run.
3. Set the TCP/IP network parameters on all the workstations that are
participating in your partitioned database system to the following values. These
values are the minimum values for these parameters. If any of the
network-related parameters are already set to a higher value, do not change it.
thewall
sb_max
rfc1323
tcp_sendspace
tcp_recvspace
udp_sendspace
udp_recvspace
ipqmaxlen
somaxconn

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

65536
1310720
1
221184
221184
65536
65536
250
1024

To list the current settings of all network-related parameters, enter the
following command:
no -a | more

To set a parameter, enter the follow command:
no -o parameter_name=value

where:
v parameter_name represents the parameter you want to set.
v value represents the value that you want to set for this parameter.
For example, to set the tcp_sendspace parameter to 221184, enter the following
command:
no -o tcp_sendspace=221184

4. If you are using a high speed interconnect, you must set the spoolsize and
rpoolsize for css0 to the following values:
spoolsize
rpoolsize

16777216
16777216

To list the current settings of these parameters, enter the following command:
lsattr -l css0 -E

To set these parameters, enter the following commands:
/usr/lpp/ssp/css/chgcss -l css0 -a spoolsize=16777216
/usr/lpp/ssp/css/chgcss -l css0 -a rpoolsize=16777216

If you are not using the /tftpboot/tuning.cst file to tune your system, you
can use the DB2DIR/misc/rc.local.sample sample script file, where DB2DIR is
path where the DB2 product has been installed to, to update the
network-related parameters after installation. To update the network-related
parameters using the sample script file after installation, perform the following
steps:
a. Copy this script file to the /etc directory and make it executable by root by
entering the following commands:
cp /usr/opt/db2_09_01/misc/rc.local.sample /etc/rc.local
chown root:sys /etc/rc.local
chmod 744 /etc/rc.local

44

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
b. Review the /etc/rc.local file and update it if necessary.
c. Add an entry to the /etc/inittab file so that the /etc/rc.local script is
executed whenever the machine is rebooted. You can use the mkitab
command to add an entry to the /etc/inittab file. To add this entry, enter
the following command:
mkitab "rclocal:2:wait:/etc/rc.local > /dev/console 2>&1"

d. Ensure that /etc/rc.nfs entry is included in the /etc/inittab file by
entering the following command:
lsitab rcnfs

e. Update the network parameters without rebooting your system by entering
the following command:
/etc/rc.local

5. Ensure that you have enough paging space for a partitioned installation of DB2
ESE to run. If you do not have sufficient paging space, the operating system
will kill the process that is using the most virtual memory (this is likely to be
one of the DB2 processes). To check for available paging space, enter the
following command:
lsps -a

This command will return output similar to the following:
Page Space Physical Volume Volume Group Size
paging00
hdisk1
rootvg
60MB
hd6
hdisk0
rootvg
60MB
hd6
hdisk2
rootvg
64MB

%Used
19
21
21

Active
yes
yes
yes

Auto
yes
yes
yes

Type
lv
lv
lv

We recommend that the paging space available be equal to twice the amount of
physical memory installed on your computer.
6. If you are creating a small to intermediate size partitioned database system, the
number of network file system daemons (NFSDs) on the instance-owning
computer should be close to:
# of biod on a computer X # of computers in the instance

We recommended that you run 10 biod processes on every computer.
According to the above formula, on a four computer system with 10 biod
processes, you would use 40 NFSDs.
If you are installing a larger system, you can have up to 120 NFSDs on the
computer.
For additional information about NFS, refer to your NFS documentation.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Setting up a working collective to distribute commands to
ESE workstations (AIX)
In a partitioned database environment on AIX, you can set up a working collective
to distribute commands to the set of RS/6000® SP™ workstations that participate in
your partitioned database system. Commands can be distributed to the
workstations by the dsh command.
This can be useful when installing or administrating a partitioned database system
on AIX, to enable you quickly execute the same commands on all the computers in
your environment with less opportunity for error.
Chapter 3. Before you install

45
Prerequisites:
You must know the hostname of each computer that you want to include in the
working collective.
You must be logged on to the Control workstation as a user with root authority.
Procedure:
Have a file that lists the hostnames for all of the RS/6000 SP workstations that will
participate in your partitioned database system. To set up the working collective to
distribute commands to this list of workstations:
1. Create a file called eeelist.txt that will list the hostnames for all of the
workstations that will participate in the working collective.
For example, assume that you wanted to create a working collective with two
SP nodes called workstation1 and workstation2. The contents of this file would
be:
workstation1
workstation2

2. Update the working collective environment variable. To update this list, enter
the following command:
export WCOLL=path/eeelist.txt

where path is the location where eeelist.txt was created, and eeelist.txt is the
name of the file that you created that lists the RS/6000 SP workstations in the
working collective.
3. Verify that the names in the working collective are indeed the workstations that
you want, by entering the following command:
dsh -q

You will receive output similar to the following:
Working collective file /eeelist.txt:
workstation1
workstation2
Fanout: 64

Related tasks:
v “Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX)” on page 47

Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your
computer (Linux and UNIX)
This task describes the steps for copying the contents of your DB2 product CD to
the shared DB2 home file system.
Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD is a step unique to partitioned
database installations. If you are installing DB2 to multiple computers
simultaneously, installing from hard disk is significantly faster than installing from
the product CD.
This method is recommended for any system that includes more than four
computers.

46

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
The alternative is to NFS mount the product CD file system from each computer.
You may want to mount the product CD from each computer if you do not have
enough disk space on the DB2 home file system or if you are installing on fewer
than four computers.
Procedure:
To mount the DB2 product CD and copy its contents:
1. Create a directory on your /db2home file system for the DB2 product CD:
mkdir /db2home/db2cdrom

2. Copy the contents of the product CD to directory that you created:
cp -R /cdrom /db2home/db2cdrom

Related tasks:
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
v “Installation requirements
System)” on page 27

for
for
for
for

DB2
DB2
DB2
DB2

clients
clients
clients
clients

and
and
and
and

servers
servers
servers
servers

(AIX)” on page 21
(HP-UX)” on page 23
(Linux)” on page 24
(Solaris Operating

Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX)
Before setting up a database partitioned environment, you should verify that
Network File System (NFS) is running on each computer that will participate in
your partitioned database system.
Prerequisites:
NFS must be running on each computer.
Procedure:
To verify that NFS is running on each computer:
AIX

Type the following command on each computer:
lssrc -g nfs

The Status field for NFS processes should indicate active.
After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should
check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products. The
required processes are:
rpc.lockd
rpc.statd

HP-UX and Solaris Operating Environment
Type the following command on each computer:
showmount -e hostname

Enter the showmount command without the hostname parameter to check
the local system.
Chapter 3. Before you install

47
If NFS is not active you will receive a message similar to the following:
showmount: ServerA: RPC: Program not registered

After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should
check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products:
rpc.lockd
rpc.statd

You can use the following commands to check for these processes:
ps -ef | grep rpc.lockd
ps -ef | grep rpc.statd

Linux Type the following command on each computer:
showmount -e hostname

Enter the showmount command without the hostname parameter to check
the local system.
If NFS is not active you will receive a message similar to the following:
showmount: ServerA: RPC: Program not registered

After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should
check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products. The
required process is rpc.statd. You can use the ps -ef | grep rpc.statd
commands to check for this process.
If these processes are not running, consult your operating system documentation.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Verifying port range availability on participating computers
(Linux and UNIX)
This task describes the steps required to verify port range availability on
participating computers. The port range is used by the Fast Communications
Manager (FCM). FCM is a feature of DB2 that handles communications between
database partition servers.
When you install the instance-owning database partition server on the primary
machine, DB2 reserves a port range according to the specified number of database
partition servers participating in partitioned database environment. The default
range is four ports. The DB2 Setup wizard must be able to reserve an identical port
range when database partition servers are installed on participating computers; the
port range needs to be free on each of the database partition servers.
This task should be done after you install the instance-owning database partition
server and before you install any participating database partition servers.
Prerequisites:
To make changes to the services file, you require root authority.
Procedure:

48

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
To verify the port range availability on participating computers:
1. Open the services file located in the /etc/services directory.
2. Locate the ports reserved for the DB2 Fast Communications Manager (FCM).
The entries should appear similar to the following:
DB2_db2inst1
DB2_db2inst1_1
DB2_db2inst1_2
DB2_db2inst1_END

60000/tcp
60001/tcp
60002/tcp
60003/tcp

DB2 reserves the first four available ports after 60000.
3. On each participating computer, open the services file and verify that the
ports reserved for DB2 FCM in the services file of the primary computer are
not being used.
4. In the event that the required ports are in use on a participating computer,
identify an available port range for all computers and update each service file,
including the services file on the primary computer.
Related concepts:
v “Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX)” on page 30
Related reference:
v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90

Creating file system for a partitioned database environment
(Linux and UNIX)
Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database
system (AIX)
This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes
how to:
v create a DB2 home file system
v NFS export the home file system
v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer
It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or
greater. Later installation instruction will ask that you copy the contents of the DB2
product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product CD
will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will
require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can
mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to
copying the contents to disk.
Prerequisites:
You must have:
v root authority to create a file system
v Created a volume group where your file system is to physically reside.
Procedure:
To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the
following steps:
Chapter 3. Before you install

49
Creating the DB2 home file system
Log on to the primary computer (ServerA) in your partitioned database
system as a user with root authority and create a home file system for
your partitioned database system called /db2home.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.

Enter the smit jfs command.
Click on the Add a Journaled File System icon.
Click on the Add a Standard Journaled File System icon.
Select an existing volume group from the Volume Group Name list
where you want this file system to physically reside.
Set the SIZE of file system (SIZE of file system (in 512–byte blocks)
(Num.) field). This sizing is enumerated in 512-byte blocks, so if you
only need to create a file system for the instance home directory, you
can use 180 000, which is about 90 MB. If you need to copy the product
CD image over to run the installation, you can create it with a value of
20 000 000, which is about 1 GB.
Enter the mount point for this file system in the MOUNT POINT field.
In this example, the mount point is /db2home.
Set the Mount AUTOMATICALLY at system restart field to yes.
The remaining fields can be left to the default settings.
Click OK.

Exporting the DB2 home file system
1. NFS export the /db2home file system so that it is available to all of the
computers that will participate in your partitioned database system:
a. Enter the smit nfs command.
b. Click on the Network File System (NFS) icon.
c. Click on the Add a Directory to Exports List icon.
d. Enter the pathname and directory to export (for example, /db2home)
in the PATHNAME of directory to export field.
e. Enter the name of each workstation that will participate in your
partitioned database system in the HOSTS allowed root access
field. Use a comma (,) as the delimiter between each name. For
example, ServerA, ServerB, ServerC. If you are using a high speed
interconnect, we recommend that you specify the high speed
interconnect names for each workstation in this field as well. The
remaining fields can be left to the default settings.
f. Click OK.
2. Log out.
Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer
Log on to each participating computer (ServerB, ServerC, ServerD) and NFS
mount the file system that you exported by performing the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.

50

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

Enter the smit nfs command.
Click on the Network File System (NFS) icon.
Click on the Add a File System for Mounting icon.
Enter the pathname of the mount point in the PATHNAME of the
mount point (Path) field.
The path name of the mount point is where you should create the
DB2 home directory. For this example, use/db2home.
5. Enter the pathname of the remote directory in the PATHNAME of the
remote directory field.
For our example, you should enter the same value that you entered in
the PATHNAME of the mount point (Path) field.
6. Enter the hostname of the machine where you exported the file system
in the HOST where the remote directory resides field.
This is the hostname of the machine where the file system that you
are mounting was created.
To improve performance, you may want to NFS mount the file system
that you created over a high speed interconnect. If you want to mount
this file system using a high speed interconnect, you must enter its
name in the HOST where remote directory resides field.
You should be aware that if the high speed interconnect ever becomes
unavailable for some reason, every workstation that participates in
your partitioned database system will lose access to the DB2 home
directory.
7. Set the MOUNT now, add entry to /etc/filesystems or both? field to
both.
8. Set the /etc/filesystems entry will mount the directory on system
RESTART field to yes.
9. Set the MODE for this NFS file system field to read-write.
10. Set the Mount file system soft or hard field to soft.
A soft mount means that the computer will not try for an infinite
period of time to remotely mount the directory. A hard mount means
that your machine will infinitely try to mount the directory. This could
cause problems in the event of a system crash. We recommend that
you set this field to soft.
The remaining fields can be left to the default settings.
11. Ensure that this file system is mounted with the Allow execution of
SUID and sgid programs in this file system? field set to Yes. This is
the default setting.
12. Click OK.
13. Log out.
Related tasks:
v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and
UNIX)” on page 46
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database
system (HP-UX)
This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes
how to:
v create a DB2 home file system
v NFS export the home file system
v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer
It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or
greater. Later installation instruction will ask that you copy the contents of the DB2
product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product CD
Chapter 3. Before you install

51
will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will
require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can
mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to
copying the contents to disk.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to create a file system.
Procedure:
To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the
following steps:
Creating the DB2 home file system
Manually:
1. Select a disk partition or logical volume and use a utility like newfs to
create this file system. For more information, enter the man newfs
command.
2. Mount this file system locally and add an entry to the /etc/fstab file
so that this file system is mounted each time the system is restarted.
Using SAM:
1. Enter the sam command.
2. Click on the Disks and File Systems icon.
3. Click on the File Systems icon.
4. Select Action —> Add Local File systems.
5. You can choose either to use or not to use a Logical Volume Manager. It
is recommended to use a Logical Volume Manager.
Exporting the DB2 home file system
If you are installing DB2 ESE on a cluster of HP-UX systems, you can add
an entry to the /etc/exports file to export this file system via NFS, or use
SAM.
To export the file system using SAM:
1. Enter the sam command.
2. Click on the Networking and Communications icon.
3. Click on the Networked File Systems icon.
4. Click on the Exported Local File Systems icon.
5. Click the Action menu and select Add Exported File System
6. Enter the pathname and directory to export (for example, /db2home) in
the Local Directory Name field.
7. Click the User Access button and add read-write access for the other
computers in the instance in the window that appears.
8. Click the Root User Access button and add access for the other
computers in the instance in the window that appears.
9. Click OK.
10. Log out.
Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer
After you have exported this file system, you must mount this file system
on each of the participating computers.

52

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
On
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

each participating computer:
Enter the sam command.
Click on the Networking and Communications icon.
Click on the Networked File Systems icon.
Click on the Mounted Remote File Systems icon.
Click the Action menu and select Add Remote File System Using
NFS
6. Enter the mount point of the file system to mount (for example,
/db2home) in the Local Directory Name field.
7. Enter the name of the remote server (for example, ServerA) in the
Remote Server Name field.
8. Enter the pathname and directory of the remote directory (for
example, /db2home) in the Remote Directory Name field.

9. Set the Mount At System Boot option on.
10. Click the NFS Mount Options button and set soft mount type and
the Allow SetUID Execution option on.
A soft mount means that the computer will not try for an infinite
period of time to remotely mount the directory. A hard mount means
that your machine will infinitely try to mount the directory. This could
cause problems in the event of a system crash. We recommend that
you set this field to soft.
The remaining fields can be left to the default settings.
11. Click OK.
12. Log out.
Related tasks:
v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and
UNIX)” on page 46
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Linux)
This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes
how to:
v create a DB2 home file system
v NFS export the home file system
v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer
You must have a file system that is available to all machines that will participate in
your partitioned database system. This file system will be used as the instance
home directory.
For configurations that use more than one machine for a single database instance,
NFS (Network File System) is used to share this file system. Typically, one machine
in a cluster is used to export the file system using NFS, and the remaining
machines in the cluster mount the NFS file system from this machine. The machine
that exports the file system has the file system mounted locally.
For more command information, see your Linux distribution documentation.
Procedure:
Chapter 3. Before you install

53
To create this file system:
1. On one machine, select a disk partition or create one using fdisk.
2. Using a utility like mkfs, create a file system on this partition. The file system
should be large enough to contain the necessary DB2 program files as well as
enough space for your database needs.
3. Locally mount the file system you have just created and add an entry to the
/etc/fstab file so that this file system is mounted each time the system is
rebooted. For example:
/dev/hda1
/db2home
ext3
defaults
1 2
4. To automatically export an NFS file system on Linux at boot time, add an entry
to the /etc/exports file. Be sure to include all of the host names participating
in the cluster as well as all of the names that a machine might be known as.
Also, ensure that each machine in the cluster has root authority on the exported
file system by using the ″root″ option.
The /etc/exportfs is an ASCII file which contains the following type of
information:
/db2home machine1_name(rw) machine2_name(rw)

To export the NFS directory, run
/usr/sbin/exportfs -r

5. On each of the remaining machines in the cluster, add an entry to the
/etc/fstab file to NFS mount the file system automatically at boot time. As in
the following example, when you specify the mount point options, ensure that
the file system is mounted at boot time, is read-write, is mounted hard,
includes the bg (background) option, and that setuid programs can be run
properly.
fusion-en:/db2home /db2home nfs rw,timeo=7,
hard,intr,bg,suid,lock
where fusion-en represents the machine name.
6. NFS mount the exported file system on each of the remaining machines in the
cluster by entering the following command:
mount /db2home

If the mount command fails, use the showmount command to check the status
of the NFS server. For example:
showmount -e fusion-en

This showmount command should list the file systems which are exported
from the machine named fusion-en. If this command fails, the NFS server may
not have been started. Run the following command as root on the NFS server
to start the server manually:
/etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs restart

Assuming the present run level is 3, you can have this command run
automatically at boot time by renaming K20nfs to S20nfs under the following
directory: /etc/rc.d/rc3.d.
7. Ensure that the following steps were successful:
a. On a single machine in the cluster, you have created a file system to be
used as the instance and home directory.
b. If you have a configuration that uses more than one machine for a single
database instance, you have exported this file system using NFS.

54

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
c. You have mounted the exported file system on each of the remaining
machines in the cluster.
Related tasks:
v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and
UNIX)” on page 46
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris
Operating Environment)
This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes
how to:
v create a DB2 home file system
v NFS export the home file system
v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer
It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or
greater. Later installation instructions will ask that you copy the contents of the
DB2 product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product
CD will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will
require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can
mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to
copying the contents to disk.
There are a number of ways to create a local file system on a Solaris Operating
Environment system. If you want to use a product, such as Veritas, to create the
file system, refer to the product’s documentation.
Prerequisites:
You must have root authority to create a file system.
Procedure:
To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the
following steps:
Creating the DB2 home file system
1. On the primary computer (ServerA), select a disk partition or configure
one using the format command. When using the format command,
ensure that the disk partitions being used do not overlap. Overlapping
partitions can cause data corruption or file system failures. Ensure you
have correctly entered the command, as mistakes can cause serious
problems.
2. Using a utility like newfs or mkfs, create a file system on this partition.
The file system should be large enough to contain the necessary DB2
files as well as other non-DB2 files. A minimum of 300 MB is
recommended.
3. Locally mount the file system you have just created and add an entry
to the /etc/vfstab file so that this file system is mounted each time the
system is rebooted. For example:
/dev/dsk/c1t0d2s2

/dev/rdsk/c1t0d2s2 /db2home

ufs

2

yes

-

Exporting the DB2 home file system
Chapter 3. Before you install

55
1. To automatically export an NFS file system on Solaris at boot time, add
an entry to the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. Be sure to include all of the host
names of the participating computers as well as all of the names that a
given computer might be known as. Also, ensure that each computer
has root authority on the exported file system by using the ″root″
option.
In the following example, an entry for a four computer partitioned
database system is added to the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. The participating
computers, ServerB, ServerC, and ServerD, are given permission to
mount the file system /db2home, which will be used as the DB2 home
file system.
share -F nfs -o 
rw=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com,
root=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com 
rw=ServerC.torolab.ibm.com, 
root=ServerC.torolab.ibm.com
rw=ServerD.torolab.ibm.com,
root=ServerD.torolab.ibm.com 
-d "homes" /db2home

If a computer is known by more than one hostname, all aliases must be
included in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. For example, if ServerB was also
known by the name ServerB-tokenring, the entry in the
/etc/dfs/dfstab for ServerB would appear as follows:
rw=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com:ServerB-tokenring.torolab.ibm.com,
root=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com:ServerB-tokenring.torolab.ibm.com 

2. On each of the participating computers, add an entry to the
/etc/vfstab file to NFS mount the file system automatically at boot
time. As in the following example, when you specify the mount point
options, ensure that the file system is mounted at boot time, is
read-write, is mounted hard, includes the bg (background) option, and
that suid programs can be run properly:
ServerA:/db2home - /db2home nfs - yes
rw,hard,intr,bg,suid
Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer
1. Create and NFS mount the exported file system on each of the
participating computers in the partitioned database environment by
entering the following commands:
mkdir /db2home
mount /db2home

If the mount command fails, use the showmount command to check the
status of the NFS server. For example:
showmount -e ServerA

This showmount command should list the file systems which are
exported from the computer named ServerA. If this command fails, the
NFS server may not have been started. To start the server manually,
run the following commands as root on the NFS server:
/usr/lib/nfs/mountd
/usr/lib/nfs/nfsd -a 16

These commands are run automatically at boot time if there are any
entries in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. After starting the NFS server, export
the NFS file system again by running the following command:
sh /etc/dfs/dfstab

56

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Ensure that you have completed the following steps:
1. On a single computer in the partitioned database environment, you have
created a file system to be used as the instance and home directory.
2. You have exported this file system via NFS.
3. You have mounted the exported file system on each participating computer.
Related tasks:
v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and
UNIX)” on page 46
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Creating required users (Linux and UNIX)
Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a
partitioned database environment (AIX)
Three users and groups are required to operate a DB2 database. The user and
group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following
table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to
your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules.
If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the
DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you.
Table 9. Required users and groups (AIX)
Required user

User name

Group name

Instance owner

db2inst1

db2iadm1

Fenced user

db2fenc1

db2fadm1

Administration server user

dasusr1

dasadm1

If the Administration server user is an existing user, this user must exist on all the
participating computers before the installation. If you use the DB2 Setup wizard to
create a new user for the Administration server on the instance-owning computer,
then this user is also created (if necessary) during the response file installations on
the participating computers. If the user already exists on the participating
computers, the user must have the same primary group.
Prerequisites:
v You must have root authority to create users and groups.
v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see
NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may
be required to when defining DB2 users and groups.
Restrictions:
The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming
rules, and those of DB2.
Procedure:
To create all three of these users, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the primary computer.
Chapter 3. Before you install

57
2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that
will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the
Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following
commands:
mkgroup id=999 db2iadm1
mkgroup id=998 db2fadm1
mkgroup id=997 dasadm1

3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step
using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the
DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home).
mkuser id=1004 pgrp=db2iadm1 groups=db2iadm1 home=/db2home/db2inst1
core=-1 data=491519 stack=32767 rss=-1 fsize=-1 db2inst1
mkuser id=1003 pgrp=db2fadm1 groups=db2fadm1 home=/db2home/db2fenc1
db2fenc1
mkuser id=1002 pgrp=dasadm1 groups=dasadm1 home=/home/dasusr1
dasusr1

4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following
commands:
passwd db2inst1
passwd db2fenc1
passwd dasusr1

5. Log out.
6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1,
db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password
since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system.
7. Log out.
8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will
participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform
this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
Related reference:
v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32

Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a
partitioned database environment (HP-UX)
Three users and groups are required to operate DB2. The user and group names
used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may
specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system
naming rules and DB2 naming rules.
If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the
DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you.
Table 10. Required users and groups
Required user

Group name

Instance owner

db2inst1

db2iadm1

Fenced user

db2fenc1

db2fadm1

Administration server user

58

User name

dasusr1

dasadm1

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also
exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2
Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance
owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the
response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists
on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group.
Prerequisites:
v You must root authority to create users and groups.
v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see
NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may
be required to when defining DB2 users and groups.
Restrictions:
The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming
rules, and those of DB2.
Procedure:
To create all three of these users, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the primary computer.
2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that
will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the
Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following
commands:
groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1
groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1
groupadd -g 997 dasadm1

3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step
using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the
DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home).
useradd -u 1004 db2iadm1 -d /db2home/db2inst1 -m db2inst1
useradd -u 1003 db2fadm1 -d /db2home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1
useradd -u 1002 dbasgrp -d /home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1

4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following
commands:
passwd db2inst1
passwd db2fenc1
passwd dasusr1

5. Log out.
6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1,
db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password
since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system.
7. Log out.
8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will
participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform
this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
Related reference:
Chapter 3. Before you install

59
v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32

Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a
partitioned database environment (Linux)
Three users and groups are required to operate a DB2 database. The user and
group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following
table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to
your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules.
If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the
DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you.
Table 11. Required users and groups
Required user

user name

group name

Instance owner

db2inst1

db2iadm1

Fenced user

db2fenc1

db2fadm1

Administration server user

dasusr1

dasadm1

If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also
exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2
Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance
owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the
response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists
on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group.
Prerequisites:
v You must have root authority to create users and groups.
v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see
NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may
be required when defining DB2 users and groups.
Restrictions:
The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming
rules, and those of DB2.
Procedure:
To create all three of these users, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the primary computer.
2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that
will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the
Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following
commands:
groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1
groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1
groupadd -g 997 dasadm1

Ensure that the specific numbers you are using do not currently exist on any of
the machines.

60

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step
using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the
DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home).
useradd -u 1004 -g db2iadm1 -m -d /db2home/db2inst1 db2inst1 -p password1
useradd -u 1003 -g db2fadm1 -m -d /db2home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1 -p password2
useradd -u 1002 -g dasadm1 -m -d /home/dasusr1 dasusr1 -p password3

4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following
commands:
passwd db2inst1
passwd db2fenc1
passwd dasusr1

5. Log out.
6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1,
db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password
since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system.
7. Log out.
8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will
participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform
this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
Related reference:
v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32

Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a
partitioned database environment (Solaris Operating
Environment)
Three users and groups are required to operate DB2. The user and group names
used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may
specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system
naming rules and DB2 naming rules.
If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the
DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you.
Table 12. Required users and groups
Required user

user name

group name

Instance owner

db2inst1

db2iadm1

Fenced user

db2fenc1

db2fadm1

Administration server user

dasusr1

dasadm1

If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also
exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2
Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance
owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the
response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists
on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group.
Prerequisites:
v You must have root authority to create users and groups.
Chapter 3. Before you install

61
v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see
NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups.
Restrictions:
The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming
rules, and those of DB2.
Procedure:
To create all three of these users, perform the following steps:
1. Log on to the primary computer.
2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that
will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the
Administration Server (for example, dasadm1 ) by entering the following
commands:
groupadd id=999 db2iadm1
groupadd id=998 db2fadm1
groupadd id=997 dasadm1

3. Create a user for each group using the following commands. The home
directory for each user will be the DB2 home directory that you previously
created and shared (/db2home).
useradd -g db2iadm1 -d /db2home/db2instl -m db2inst1 passwd mypasswrd
useradd -g db2fadm1 -d /db2home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1 passwd mypasswrd
useradd -g dbasgrp -d /export/home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1 passwd mypasswrd

4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following
commands:
passwd db2inst1
passwd db2fenc1
passwd dasusr1

5. Log out.
6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1,
db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password
since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system.
7. Log out.
8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will
participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform
this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
Related reference:
v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32

62

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product
Installing DB2 servers (Windows)
This task describes how to start the DB2 Setup wizard on Windows. You will use
the DB2 Setup wizard to define your installation and install your DB2 product on
your system.
Prerequisites:
Before you start the DB2 Setup wizard:
v If you are planning on setting up a partitioned database environment, see the
"Setting up a partitioned database environment" topic.
v Ensure that your system meets installation, memory, and disk requirements.
v If you are planning to use LDAP on Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 to
register the DB2 server in Active Directory, you should extend the directory
schema before you install.
v You must have a local Administrator user account with the recommended user
rights to perform the installation.
v Although not mandatory, it is recommended that you close all programs so that
the installation program can update any files on the computer without requiring
a reboot.
Restrictions:
v The DB2 copy name and the instance name cannot start with a numeric value.
v The DB2 copy name and the instance name must be unique among all DB2
copies.
v The use of XML features is restricted to a database that is defined with the code
set UTF-8 and that has only one database partition.
Procedure:
To start the DB2 Setup wizard:
1. Log on to the system with the local Administrator account that you have
defined for the DB2 installation.
2. Insert your DB2 product CD into the drive. If enabled, the auto-run feature
automatically starts the DB2 Setup launchpad. If the auto-run does not work,
use Windows Explorer to browse the DB2 product CD and double-click on the
setup icon.
3. From the DB2 Setup launchpad, you can view installation prerequisites and the
release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You may want to
review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking
information.
4. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window will display the
products available for installation.
If you have no existing DB2 products installed on your computer, launch the
installation by clicking Install New. Proceed through the installation following
the DB2 Setup wizard's prompts.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

63
If you have at least one existing DB2 product installed on your computer, you
can:
v Click Install New to create a newDB2 copy
v Click Work with Existing to upgrade an existing DB2 copy, to add
functionality to an existing DB2 copy, or to install an add-on product.
v Click Migrate to migrate an existing DB2 Version 8 copy.
5. The DB2 Setup wizard will determine the system language, and launch the
setup program for that language. Online help is available to guide you through
the remaining steps. To invoke the online help, click Help or press F1. You can
click Cancel at any time to end the installation.
Your DB2 product will be installed, by default, in the x:Program
FilesIBMsqllib directory, where x: represent the drive letter of the drive where
you have installed your DB2 product.
If you are installing on a system where this directory is already being used, the
DB2 product installation path will have _xx added to it, where _xx are digits,
starting at 01 and increasing depending on how many DB2 copies you have
installed.
You can also specify your own DB2 product installation path.
For information on errors encountered during installation, review the installation
log file located in the My DocumentsDB2LOG directory. The log file uses the
following format: DB2-ProductAbrrev-DateTime.log, for example, DB2-ESE-Tue Apr
04 17_04_45 2006.log.
If you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2 documentation either on your
local computer or on another computer on your network, then you must install the
DB2 Information Center. TheDB2 Information Center contains documentation for
the DB2 database system and DB2 related products. By default, DB2 information
will be accessed from the web if the DB2 Information Center is not locally
installed.
DB2 Express memory limits and the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter:
If you are installing DB2 Express Edition or DB2 Express-C Edition on a system
that has more memory than the maximum memory limit of 4GB, as outlined in the
terms and conditions of the product, you need to explicitly set the DATABASE_MEMORY
configuration parameter to 4GB or less, so that the Self Tuning Memory Manager
will work within your licensed memory limits.
Note: If you have more than one database on that server, the sum of all database
memory usage cannot exceed 4GB.
You can use the Control Center or the UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION
command to make this change. For example, to set the DATABASE_MEMORY limit to
4GB, enter the following command:
DB2 UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION using DATABASE_MEMORY 1000000 IMMEDIATE;
CONNECT RESET;

Also, when using the Configuration Advisor to assist you in configuring the
performance of your database, you need to set the Target Memory on the Server
page to a percentage of your total system memory that will ensure you stay under
the 4GB memory limit.

64

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Related concepts:
v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes
v “DB2 database object naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
Related tasks:
v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup
and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “Migrating a DB2 server (Windows)” in Migration Guide
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68
v “Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)” on page 72
Related reference:
v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference
v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “Disk and memory requirements” on page 9
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10
v “Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup wizard in another language”
on page 105

Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)
This task describes how to start the DB2 Setup wizard on Linux and UNIX
systems. The DB2 Setup wizard is used to define your installation preferences and
to install your DB2 product on your system.
Prerequisites:
Before you start the DB2 Setup wizard:
v Ensure that your system meets installation, memory, and disk requirements.
v You must have root authority to perform the installation.
v The DB2 product image must be available.
v The DB2 Setup wizard is a graphical installer. You must have X windows
software capable of rendering a graphical user interface for the DB2 Setup
wizard to run on your machine. Ensure that the X windows server is running.
Ensure that you have properly exported your display. For example, export
DISPLAY=9.26.163.144:0.
v If NIS/NIS+ or similar security software is used in your environment, you must
manually create required DB2 users before you start the DB2 Setup wizard.
Refer to the referenced Centralized user-management considerations topic before
you begin.
Restrictions:
The use of XML features is restricted to a database that is defined with the code set
UTF-8 and has only one database partition.
Procedure:

Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product

65
To start the DB2 Setup wizard:
1. Log on to the system as a user with root authority.
2. Change to the directory where the DB2 product CD is mounted by entering the
following command:
cd /cdrom

where /cdrom represents mount point of the DB2 product CD.
3. If you downloaded the DB2 product image, you must decompress and untar
the product file.
a. Decompress the product file:
gzip -d product.tar.gz

where product is the name of the product that you downloaded.
b. Untar the product file:
tar -xvf product.tar

c. Change directory:
cd ./product/disk1

4. Enter the ./db2setup command from the directory where the product image
resides to start the DB2 Setup wizard.
5. The IBM DB2 Setup Launchpad opens. From this window, you can view
installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to
the installation. You may want to review the installation prerequisites and
release notes for late-breaking information.
6. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window will display the
products available for installation.
Launch the installation by clicking Install New. Proceed through the
installation following the DB2 Setup wizard's prompts.
Once you have initiated the installation, proceed through the DB2 Setup wizard
installation panels and make your selections. Installation help is available to
guide you through the remaining steps. To invoke the installation help, click
Help or press F1. You can click Cancel at any time to end the installation.
Your DB2 product will be installed, by default, in one of the following
directories:
AIX, HP-UX, Solaris Operating Environment
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1
Linux /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1
If you are installing on a system where this directory is already being used, the
DB2 product installation path will have _xx added to it, where _xx are digits,
starting at 01 and increasing depending on how many DB2 copies you have
installed.
You can also specify your own DB2 product installation path.
The installation logs, db2setup.log and db2setup.err will be located, by default, in
the /tmp directory. You can specify the location of the log files.
The db2setup.log file captures all DB2 installation information including errors.
The db2setup.err file captures any error output that is returned by Java (for
example, exceptions and trap information).

66

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
There is no longer a db2setup.his file. Instead, the DB2 installer saves a copy of
the db2setup.log file in the DB2_DIR/install/logs/ directory, and renames it
db2install.history. If the name already exists, then the DB2 installer renames it
db2install.history.xxxx, where xxxx is 0000-9999, depending on the number of
installations you have on that machine.
Each installation copy has a separate list of history files. If an installation copy is
removed, the history files under this install path will be removed as well. This
copying action is done near the end of the installation and if the program is
stopped or aborted before completion, then the history file will not be created.
On Linux 32-bit, if you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2
documentation either on your local computer or on another computer on your
network, then you must install the DB2 Information Center. The DB2 Information
Center contains documentation for the DB2 database system and DB2 related
products.
DB2 Express memory limits and the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter:
If you are installing DB2 Express Edition or DB2 Express-C Edition on a system
that has more memory than the maximum memory limit of 4GB, as outlined in the
terms and conditions of the product, you need to explicitly set the DATABASE_MEMORY
configuration parameter to 4GB or less, so that the Self Tuning Memory Manager
will work within your licensed memory limits.
Note: If you have more than one database on that server, the sum of all database
memory usage cannot exceed 4GB.
You can use the Control Center or the UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION
command to make this change. For example, to set the DATABASE_MEMORY limit to
4GB, enter the following command:
DB2 UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION using DATABASE_MEMORY 1000000 IMMEDIATE;
CONNECT RESET;

Also, when using the Configuration Advisor to assist you in configuring the
performance of your database, you need to set the Target Memory on the Server
page to a percentage of your total system memory that will ensure you stay under
the 4GB memory limit.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
v “DB2 database object naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup
and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “Migrating a DB2 server (Linux and UNIX)” in Migration Guide
Related reference:
v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32
v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference
v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product

67
Setting up a partitioned database environment
This topic describes how to set up a partitioned database environment. You will
use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your instance-owning database server and to
create the response files that will in turn be used to create your participating
database servers.
If you have purchased DB2 Enterprise Server Edition (ESE), you can create a
partitioned instance. This option is called Database Partitioning Feature. A database
partition is part of a database that consists of its own data, indexes, configuration
files, and transaction logs. A partitioned database is a database with two or more
partitions.
To take advantage of the Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) of ESE, you must
have a DPF license key in addition to the ESE license key.
Prerequisites:
v During instance creation, a number of ports equal to the number of participating
DB2 database servers that the instance is capable of supporting will be reserved
in the /etc/services on Linux and UNIX and in the %SystemRoot%system32
driversetcservices on Windows. These ports will be used by the Fast
Communication Manager. The reserved ports will be in the following format:
DB2_InstanceName
DB2_InstanceName_1
DB2_InstanceName_2
DB2_InstanceName_END

The only mandatory entries are the beginning (DB2_InstanceName) and ending
(DB2_InstanceName_END) ports. The other entries are reserved in the services
file so that other applications do not use these ports
v To support multiple participating DB2 database servers, the computer on which
you want to install DB2 must belong to an accessible domain. However, you can
add local partitions to this computer even though the computer doesn’t belong
to a domain.
v On Linux and UNIX systems, a remote shell utility is required for partitioned
database systems. DB2 supports the following remote shell utilities:
– rsh
– ssh
By default, DB2 uses rsh when executing commands on remote DB2 nodes, for
example, when starting a remote DB2 database partition. To use the DB2 default,
the rsh-server package must be installed (see table below). For a comparison
between rsh and ssh, see the “Security issues when installing DB2” section of the
Administration Guide: Implementation.
If you choose to use the rsh remote shell utility, inetd (or xinetd) must be
installed and running as well. If you choose to use the ssh remote shell utility,
you need to set the DB2RSHCMD registry variable immediately after the DB2
installation is complete. If this registry variable is not set, rsh is used. For more
information on the DB2RSHCMD registry variable, see the Performance Guide
book.
Restrictions:
The use of XML features prohibits later use of the Data Partitioning Feature (DPF).

68

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Procedure:
To set up a partitioned database environment:
1. Install your instance-owning database server using the DB2 Setup wizard. For
detailed instructions, see the appropriate “Installing DB2 servers” topic.
v On the Select installation, response files creation, or both window, ensure
that you select the Save my installation settings in a response files option.
After the installation has completed, two files will be copied to the directory
specified in the DB2 Setup wizard: PROD_ESE.rsp and PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp.
The PROD_ESE.rsp file is the response file for instance-owning database
servers. The PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp file is the response file for participating
database servers.
v On the Set up partitioning options for the DB2 instance window, ensure
that you select Multiple partition instance, and enter the maximum number
of logical partitions.
2. Make the DB2 product source code available to all participating computers in
the partitioned database environment.
3. Distribute the participating database servers response file
(PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp).
4. Install a DB2 database server on each of the participating computers using the
db2setup command on Linux and UNIX, or the setup command on Windows:
Linux and UNIX
Go to the directory where the DB2 product code is available and run:
./db2setup -r /responsefile_directory/response_file_name

Windows
setup -r x:responsefile_directoryresponse_file_name

For example, here is the command using the PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp as the
response file:
Linux and UNIX
Go to the directory where the DB2 product code is available and run:
./db2setup -r /db2home/PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp

where /db2home is the directory where you have copied the response
file.
Windows
setup -r c:resp_filesPROD_ESE_addpart.rsp

where c:resp_files is the directory where you have copied the
response file.
Related tasks:
v “Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (HP-UX)”
on page 51
v “Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Linux)” on page 53
v “Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris Operating
Environment)” on page 55
v “Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (AIX)” on
page 49
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (AIX)” on page 57
Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product

69
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (HP-UX)” on page 58
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (Linux)” on page 60
v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database
environment (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 61
v “Installing database partition servers on participating computers using a
response file (Linux and UNIX)” on page 70
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63
v “Updating environment settings for a partitioned DB2 installation (AIX)” on
page 43
Related reference:
v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90

Installing database partition servers on participating computers using
a response file (Linux and UNIX)
In this task you will use the response file you created using the DB2 Setup wizard
to install database partition servers on participating computers.
Prerequisites:
v You have installed DB2 on the primary computer using the DB2 Setup wizard
and have created a response file for installing on participating computers.
v You must have root authority on participating computers.
Procedure:
To install additional database partition servers using a response file:
1. As root, log on to a computer that will participate in the partitioned database
environment.
2. Change to the directory where you copied the contents of the DB2 product
CD-ROM:
cd /db2home/db2cdrom

3. Enter the ./db2setup command as follows:
./db2setup -r /responsefile_directory/response_file_name

In our example, we saved the response file, AddPartitionResponse.file, to the
/db2home directory. The command for our example, would be:
./db2setup -r /db2home/AddPartitionResponse.file

4. Check the messages in the log file when the installation finishes.
You must log onto each participating computer and perform a response file
installation.
If you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2 documentation either on your
local computer or on another computer on your network, then you must install the
DB2 Information Center. The DB2 Information Center contains documentation for
the DB2 database system and DB2 related products.
Related tasks:

70

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on
page 122
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Upgrading your 32-bit DB2 instances to 64-bit instances (Windows)
DB2 32-bit and 64-bit instances cannot exist on the same system. Any 32-bit
instances will be removed when you install any DB2 Version 9 64-bit database
product.
You cannot install a 64-bit DB2 Version 9 copy on a system with multiple 32-bit
DB2 Version 9 copies.
Procedure:
If you have more than one 32-bit DB2 Version 9 copy on your system and want to
upgrade to 64-bit, perform the following steps:
1. Move all your 32-bit instances over to one DB2 copy using the db2iupdt
command
2. Uninstall the 32-bit DB2 copies, except for the one where you have moved all
your 32-bit instances over to
3. Install DB2 Version 9 64-bit which will upgrade your 32-bit DB2 Version 9
instances to 64-bit DB2 Version 9 instances.
Related tasks:
v “Listing instances” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related reference:
v “db2iupdt - Update instances command” in Command Reference

DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2 UDB Version 8
(Windows)
DB2 Version 9 on Windows introduces the ability to install multiple copies of DB2
servers on the same system. Each DB2 installation copy can either be at the same
level or at a different level of DB2.
When installing a DB2 product on a machine that already has a DB2 Version 9
copy installed, the ″Work with Existing″ window appears, which provides a list of
DB2 installations to work with. Through this interface, you can install a new DB2
copy or work with and update an existing DB2 copy.
Installing DB2 Version 9 on a machine with an existing DB2 UDB Version 8
copy:
Co-existence with a DB2 UDB Version 8 copy does have some restrictions:
v The DB2 UDB Version 8 DAS cannot administer DB2 Version 9 installations. A
DB2 Version 9 DAS can administer both DB2 Version 9 and DB2 UDB Version 8
instances.
v The DB2 UDB Version 8 must always be the default DB2 copy on the physical
machine.

Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product

71
v Multiple DB2 32-bit and 64-bit versions cannot co-exist on Windows x64. If you
install a DB2 64-bit version of the product, then the DB2 32-bit version will be
removed from the system.
.
Testing DB2 Version 9 before migrating an existing DB2 UDB Version 8 copy:
You can install a copy of DB2 Version 9 on a machine that has DB2 UDB Version 8
already installed on it. You can create DB2 Version 9 instances and use them to test
your environment at a DB2 Version 9 level. When you have completed your testing
and are satisfied with DB2 Version 9, you can migrate your instances using the
db2imigr command and migrate the DB2 Administration Server using the dasmigr
command. You can optionally remove DB2 UDB Version 8 and then set the DB2
Version 9 copy to be the default DB2 copy.
For more information about migration, see the migration related links.
Related concepts:
v “Multiple DB2 copies on the same computer (Windows)” in Administration Guide:
Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Migrating a DB2 server (Windows)” in Migration Guide
v “Migrating DB2 servers in Microsoft Cluster Server environments” in Migration
Guide
v “Migrating instances” in Migration Guide
v “Migrating the DB2 Administration Server (DAS)” in Migration Guide
Related reference:
v “dasmigr - Migrate the DB2 administration server command” in Command
Reference
v “db2imigr - Migrate instance command” in Command Reference

Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)
You can use the Default DB2 Selection wizard to select the default DB2 copy on
your computer. Applications will use this default DB2 copy by default.
Applications which are not enabled to use multiple DB2 copies will only be able to
use the default DB2 copy. The otherDB2 copies on your computer can still be
accessed and used.
You can launch the Default DB2 Selection wizard by running the db2swtch.exe
command located in the sqllibbin directory of your DB2 copy.
Procedure:
v Read the introductory text on the Introduction panel and then click Next.
v On the Select your default DB2 copy, the wizard will display the DB2 copies
that have been detected on your computer.
v Select the DB2 copy that you want to set as your new default DB2 copy.
v Click Next to set the selected DB2 copy as the default DB2 copy on this
computer.

72

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v The Summary panel displays which DB2 copy has been set as your default DB2
copy on this computer.
v Click Finish to close the Default DB2 Selection wizard.
Related tasks:
v “DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2 UDB Version 8 (Windows)”
on page 71

Applying DB2 product licenses
The DB2 product installation can apply an unlicensed version of the DB2 product.
To correctly license your product, you must register the proper license key with
your DB2 product. The license key and fully detailed license registration
procedures are available on the product Activation CD.
If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the
installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the
installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard.
Prerequisites:
You must have installed your DB2 product.
Procedure:
To enable DB2 features or to be in compliance with your current product
entitlement, you might be required to:
v Install a new DB2 product license key
v Install the DB2 code that will install the appropriate license keys
Related tasks:
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command”
on page 81
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on
page 82
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Working with existing DB2 copies
If you have an existing DB2 Version 9 copy installed on your system, when you
start the DB2 Launchpad, it will display the available products that you can install.
You can install a new DB2 copy or you can also click Work with Existing. The
Work with Existing window opens and displays the existing DB2 copies on your
system and the possible operation that can be performed. For example on
Windows, the actions shown are add new function, install and upgrade. Add-on
products are always installed using the Work with Existing option.
Related tasks:
v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63

Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product

73
74

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Part 2. After DB2 server installation

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

75
76

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Chapter 5. After you install
Verifying the installation
Verifying the installation using the command line processor
(CLP)
You can verify the installation by creating a sample database and running SQL
commands to retrieve sample data.
Prerequisites:
v The sample database component, found in the features selection, must be
installed on your system and is included in a typical installation.
v You require a user with SYSADM authority.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

verify the installation:
Log on to the system as a user with SYSADM authority.
Start the database manager by entering the db2start command.
Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database.
This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion
message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete.

The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE
when it is created.
4. Connect to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in
department 20, and reset the database connection. Enter the following
commands from the command line processor (CLP):
connect to sample
"select * from staff where dept = 20"
connect reset

After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to
free up disk space. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the
SAMPLE database.
Related tasks:
v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and
Windows)” on page 78

Verifying access to the registry on the instance-owning
computer (Windows)
This step is only required if you are setting up a partitioned database environment.
After installing DB2 on a participating computer, you should verify that you have
access to the registry on the instance-owning computer. This verification step
should be run from all participating computers.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

77
Prerequisites:
You must have DB2 installed.
Procedure:
To verify access to the registry on the instance-owning computer:
1. From a command prompt, type the regedit command. The Registry Editor
window opens.
2. Click the Registry menu item.
3. Select Connect Network Registry.
4. Type the name of the instance-owning computer in the Computer name field.
If the information is returned, then you have successfully verified that you have
access to the registry on the instance-owning computer.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps
(Linux and Windows)
You should verify that the DB2 server installation has completed successfully by
accessing data from the SAMPLE database.
Prerequisites:
v You must have the Control Center and the First Steps component installed to
perform this task.
First Steps is listed as a getting started component in the feature selection
window in the DB2 Setup wizard. It is installed as part of a Typical installation
or may be selected when performing a Custom installation.
The Control Center component is only available on Linux (x86 and
AMD64/EM64T only) and Windows.
Procedure:
1. On Linux, log on to the system as the instance owner.
2. On Windows, click Start and, select Programs -> IBM DB2 -> [DB2 Copy Name]
-> Set-up Tools > First Steps. On Linux and Windows, you can start First Steps
by typing the db2fs command.
3. Select Database Creation in the First Steps launchpad. On the Database
Creation page, you will see links to the DB2 Information Center for creating the
SAMPLE database and the Create SAMPLE Database button. Click Create
SAMPLE Database to launch the Create SAMPLE Databases window.
4. You have the options to choose the type of database objects to create and the
database location. You can choose the drive on which to create the SAMPLE
database on Windows, and the directory on which to create the SAMPLE
database on Linux.
5. This command may take a few minutes to process. When the SAMPLE database
has been created, you will receive a completion message. Click OK.
6. Launch the Control Center. On Windows, click Start and, select Programs ->
IBM DB2 -> [DB2 Copy Name] -> General Administration Tools —> Control
Center.. On Linux systems, type the db2cc command

78

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
7. In the left pane of the Control Center screen, expand the object tree to view the
SAMPLE database and SAMPLE database objects. Select the Tables object to view
the SAMPLE database tables in the right pane of the Control Center screen.
Right-click on the table name staff and select Query. In the command editor
window, click the run button to execute the query and see the result set.
After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to
free up disk space. However, you will need to keep the sample database if you
plan to make use of the sample applications.
Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database.
Related tasks:
v “Verifying the installation using the command line processor (CLP)” on page 77
Related reference:
v “db2fs - First steps command” in Command Reference

Verifying a partitioned database server installation (Linux and
UNIX)
To verify that your DB2 server installation was successful, you will create a sample
database and run SQL commands to retrieve sample data and to verify that the
data has been distributed to all participating database partition servers.
Prerequisites:
You have completed all of the installation steps.
Procedure:
To create the SAMPLE database:
1. Log on to the primary computer (ServerA) as the instance-owning user. In our
installation example, db2inst1 is the instance-owning user.
2. Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database. By default, the
sample database will be created in the instance-owner’s home directory. In our
example /db2home/db2inst1/ is the instance owner’s home directory. The
instance owner’s home directory is the default database path.
This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion
message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete.
The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE
when it is created.
3. Start the database manager by entering the db2start command.
4. Enter the following DB2 commands from a DB2 command window to connect
to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in
department 20:
db2 connect to sample
db2 "select * from staff where dept = 20"

5. To verify that data has been distributed across database partition servers, enter
the following commands from a DB2 command window:
db2 select distinct dbpartitionnum(empno) from employee;

Chapter 5. After you install

79
The output will list the database partitions used by the employee table. The
specific output will depend on the number of database partitions in the
database and the number of database partitions in the database partition group
that is used by the tablespace where the employee table was created.
After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to
free up disk space. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the
SAMPLE database.
Related reference:
v “db2sampl - Create sample database command” in Command Reference

Verifying a partitioned database environment installation
(Windows)
To verify that your DB2 server installation was successful, you will create a sample
database and run SQL commands to retrieve sample data and to verify that the
data has been distributed to all participating database partition servers.
Prerequisites:
You have completed all of the installation steps.
Procedure:
To create the SAMPLE database:
1. Log on to the primary computer (ServerA). as user with SYSADM authority.
2. Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database.
This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion
message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete.
The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE
when it is created.
3. Start the database manager by entering the db2start command.
4. Enter the following DB2 commands from a DB2 command window to connect
to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in
department 20:
db2 connect to sample
db2 "select * from staff where dept = 20"

5. To verify that data has been distributed across database partition servers, enter
the following commands from a DB2 command window:
select distinct dbpartitionnum(empno) from employee;

The output will list the database partitions used by the employee table. The
specific output will depend on the number of database partitions in the
database and the number of database partitions in the database partition group
that is used by the tablespace where the employee table was created.
After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to
free up disk space. However, it is useful to keep the sample database, if you plan
to make use of the sample applications.
Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database.

80

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Related tasks:
v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68

DB2 product licensing
DB2 product license files
Each DB2 product and feature has a license file associated with it. The license file
is found on the associated activation CD supplied as a part of the product media.
You should register the license file before using the DB2 product.
The management of licenses for DB2 products or features is done through the
License Center within the Control Center, or, through the db2licm License
Management Tool command.
To assist you in managing your licenses, a compliance report lists the compliance
or noncompliance of DB2 features with your current product entitlement.
If you installed a DB2 product with a try and buy license and now want to
upgrade to a full license, you do not need to reinstall the DB2 product. You simply
upgrade your license. This is also true for upgrading from one license type to
another, for example upgrading from a User license to a CPU license. For details
see Upgrading your DB2 license.
Related concepts:
v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “DB2 installation methods” on page 3
Related tasks:
v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command”
on page 81
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on
page 82
v “Upgrading a Try and Buy license” on page 84
Related reference:
v “db2licm - License management tool command” in Command Reference

Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the
db2licm command
You should register a DB2 product or feature license key on each computer where
the DB2 product or feature is installed. For more information on these product
options, see the DB2 Version 9 packaging information on the web.
If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the
installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the
installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard.
Procedure:

Chapter 5. After you install

81
To register a DB2 license key, enter:
db2licm -a filename

where filename is the full pathname and filename for the license file that
corresponds to the product or feature. The license file is located in the
/db2/license directory located on the Activation CD associated with your DB2
product or feature.
To register a DB2 product or feature license key as the instance owner:
1. Create the instance environment and become the instance owner.
2. Register the DB2 license with the appropriate command:
v For Linux and UNIX operating systems:
db2instance_path/adm/db2licm -a filename.lic

v For Windows operating systems:
db2instance_pathadmdb2licm -a filename.lic

where db2instance_path is where the DB2 instance was created and filename is
the full pathname and filename for the license file that corresponds to the
product you have purchased. The license file is in the /db2/license directory
located in the root directory of your Activation CD for the product or feature.
Related concepts:
v “License management” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on
page 82
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the
License Center
You should register a DB2 product or feature license key where the DB2 product or
feature is installed. For more information on these product options, see the DB2
Version 9 packaging information on the web.
If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the
installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the
installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard.
Procedure:
To register a DB2 license key:
1. Start the DB2 Control Center and select License Center from the Tools menu.
2. Select the system for which you are installing a license. Select the instance on
your systems. Select the product from installed products. The Installed
Products field will display the name of the product that you have installed.
3. Select Add from the License menu.
4. In the Add License window, select the license file:

82

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v On Windows servers: x:db2licenselicense_filename.lic
v On Linux or UNIX servers: /cd/db2/license/license_filename.lic
where x: or /cd represents the CD drive or mount point containing the DB2
Activation CD for the DB2 product or feature.
5. Click Apply to add the license key.
Related concepts:
v “License management” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command”
on page 81
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Checking DB2 license compliance
Each DB2 product and feature has a license file associated with it. The license file
should be registered before using the DB2 product or feature. The License Center
lists product information on the main panel. DB2 products that do not have the
license registered show the License Type as not registered.
To verify license compliance of DB2 features, you can generate a compliance
report. The compliance report lists DB2 features out of compliance with your
current product entitlement. Each DB2 feature status is listed as either:
v In compliance: indicating no violations are detected
v Violation: indicating the feature is not licensed and has been used.
Note: Some DB2 functionality is only available under license when purchased as
part of a DB2 feature.
You can generate a compliance report using the License Center or the db2licm
command.
Procedure:
To generate the compliance report from the License Center, select
License→Generate Compliance Report.
To generate compliance report using the db2licm command, enter the following
command from the command line:
v For Linux and UNIX operating systems:
db2instance_path/adm/db2licm -g filename

v For Windows operating systems:
db2instance_pathadmdb2licm -g filename

where
v db2instance_path is where the DB2 instance was created.
v filename specifies the file name where output is to be stored.

Chapter 5. After you install

83
DB2 features showing a violation must have the license key registered using either
the License Center or the db2licm command. See the related links for details.
Related concepts:
v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on
page 82
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command”
on page 81
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81
v “db2licm - License management tool command” in Command Reference

Upgrading a Try and Buy license
If you installed a DB2 product with a try and buy license and now want to
upgrade to a full license you need to upgrade the product license key. You can also
use this method to upgrade from one license type to another. For example, to
upgrade from a User license to a CPU license.
Restrictions:
You cannot use this method to upgrade from one DB2 product to another.
Procedure:
To upgrade your DB2 license:
1. Download the activation CD from Passport Advantage.
2. Register the license key using the License Center.
Related concepts:
v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “DB2 installation methods” on page 3
Related tasks:
v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83
v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on
page 82
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Changing DB2 product editions
Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and UNIX)
When changing from one DB2 product edition to another, the following steps are
required to preserve all information from the original DB2 product installation. For

84

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
example, if you are upgrading from DB2 Workgroup Server Edition to DB2
Enterprise Server Edition, these steps must be completed or you will have to install
future fix packs on both products.
Do not run the db2_deinstall command. This action will remove all DB2 product
components.
You do not need to create a new instance during the installation of the new DB2
product edition. Existing instances will be reconfigured by running the db2iupdt
command when the installation is complete.
Prerequisites:
Your system must comply with the system prerequisites for the DB2 product
edition that you are installing.
Restrictions:
These instructions apply only when switching among the same version of a DB2
product.
Procedure:
To change DB2 product editions:
1. Complete the DB2 product installation for the new edition.
2. To add the license file for the new product edition you must run the db2licm
command.
db2licm -a LicenseFile

The license file is found in the db2/license directory on the product activation
CD.
3. Log in as a user with root authority.
4. Obtain a list of the names of all instances on your system using the db2ilist
command:
DB2DIR/db2ilist

where DB2DIR by default is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1 on Linux and
/opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 on UNIX-based operating systems.
5. To reconfigure the instances, run the db2iupdt command on all instances:
DB2DIR/bin/db2iupdt InstanceName where InstanceName represents the name
of the instance.
6. When all the instances have been updated, you must remove the product
signature from the DB2 product that was originally installed by performing the
following actions. Find the product signature by opening the
ComponentList.htm file in the db2/PLAT directory, on the DB2 product CD. PLAT
is the platform that the DB2 product is installed on.
Related tasks:
v “Changing DB2 product editions (Windows)” on page 86
Related reference:
v “DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information” on page 3

Chapter 5. After you install

85
Changing DB2 product editions (Windows)
When changing from one DB2 product edition to another, the following steps are
required to preserve all information from the original DB2 product installation. For
example, if you are upgrading from DB2 Workgroup Server Edition to DB2
Enterprise Server Edition, these steps must be completed or you will have to install
future fix packs on both products.
Prerequisites:
Your system must comply with the system prerequisites for the new DB2 product
edition that you are installing.
If there were any fix packs installed on the original DB2 product edition, you
should obtain the image for that fix pack level and install that directly, as opposed
to installing the DB2 product and then applying the fix pack. The reason for this is
that each DB2 fix pack image is a full refresh image.
Restrictions:
These instructions apply only when switching among the same version of a DB2
product on Windows.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

change DB2 product editions:
Log on as a user with administrator access.
Stop all DB2 processes and services.
Insert the DB2 product CD of the new edition you are installing, into the drive.
The IBM DB2 product Launchpad will open.
4. The DB2 product Setup Wizard will determine the system language, and will
start the setup program for that language.
To start the DB2 product Setup wizard manually
a. Click Start and select the Run option.
b. In the Open field, type the following command:
x:setup /i language

where x represents your CD drive and language is the territory identifier for
your language, for example, EN for English.
If the /i flag is not specified, the installation program will run in the default
language of the operating system
Click OK
5. Start the installation and proceed by following the setup program’s prompts.
Online help is available to guide you through these steps. To invoke the online
help, click Help or press F1. You can click Cancel at any time to end the
installation.
6. To add the license file for the new product edition you must run the db2licm
command.
db2licm -a LicenseFile

The license file is found in the db2license directory on the product activation
CD.

86

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
7. Remove the original edition of the DB2 product using the Add/Remove
Control Panel window.
8. When the original DB2 product edition is completely uninstalled, reactivate the
administration server and the services using the db2start command or the
Services window of the Control Panel.
Related tasks:
v “Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and UNIX)” on page 84
Related reference:
v “DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information” on page 3

Applying fix packs
A DB2 fix pack contains updates and fixes for problems (Authorized Program
Analysis Reports, or ″APARs″) found during testing at IBM, as well as fixes for
problems reported by customers. Every fix pack is accompanied by a document,
called APARLIST.TXT, that describes the fixes it contains.
Each fix pack contains a Readme and a set of Release Notes:
v The fix pack Readme provides instructions for installing and uninstalling the fix
pack.
v The Release Notes contain information about changes to the product.
You can access and read both the fix pack Readme and the Release Notes by
selecting the link for fix pack downloads at the DB2 Support Web site before
installing a DB2 product. The DB2 Support Web site is found at
http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support.html.
Fix packs are cumulative. This means that the latest fix pack for any given version
of DB2 contains all of the updates from previous fix packs for the same version of
DB2. It is recommended that you keep your DB2 environment running at the latest
fix pack level to ensure problem-free operation.
There are two types of fix pack images:
v A fix pack for each individual DB2 product. This fix pack can be applied on an
existing installation of the product, or can be used to perform a full product
installation where there is no existing DB2 installation.
v Universal fix pack (Linux or UNIX only). A universal fix pack services
installations where more than one DB2 product has been installed.
If national languages have been installed, you also require a separate national
language fix pack. The national language fix pack can only be applied if it is at the
same fix pack level as the installed DB2 product. If you are applying a universal
fix pack, you must apply both the universal fix pack and the national language fix
pack to update the DB2 products.
When installing a fix pack on a multi-partition database system, the system must
be offline and all computers participating in the instance must be upgraded to the
same fix pack level.
Prerequisites:
Each fix pack has specific prerequisites. See the Readme that accompanies the fix
pack for details.
Chapter 5. After you install

87
Procedure:
1. Access and download the latest DB2 fix pack by selecting the link for fix pack
downloads from the DB2 Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/software/
data/db2/udb/support.html.
Related reference:
v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference
v “installFixPack - Update installed DB2 products command” in Command
Reference
v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference

Setting up notification and contact lists
For your DB2 product to contact you or others regarding the health of your
databases, you will have to set up notification and contact lists. If you did not do
this during the DB2 installation, you can manually set up these lists.
Procedure:
To set up notification and contact lists:
1. Log on as the instance owner or a user with SYSADM authority.
2. If the SMTP server was not specified during the installation process, you can
configure it manually using the following command:
db2 update admin cfg using smtp_server host1

where host1 represents the TCP/IP host name for the SMTP server used for
e-mail notification. You can also update this information using the Create
Database with Automatic Maintenance wizard, or the Troubleshoot Alert
Notification wizard in the Health Center.
3. If you want the contact information to be located on a remote DB2
administration server (DAS), you can specify the contact_host parameter using
the following command:
db2 update admin cfg using contact_host host2

where host2 represents the TCP/IP host name where the DAS is running. If the
contact_host parameter is not specified, the DAS assumes the contact
information is local.
4. Turn on the scheduler using the following command:
db2 update admin cfg using sched_enable on

5. For these changes to take effect, you need to restart the DAS use the following
commands:
db2admin stop
db2admin start

6. From either the Task Center or the Health Center, click the Contacts icon
in the Task bar. Select System name, then click Add Contact. Type in contact
information and then click OK.
Related reference:
v “db2admin - DB2 administration server command” in Command Reference

88

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Password rules
When choosing a password, be aware that:
v On UNIX, your password can be a maximum of eight (8) characters.
v On Windows, your password can be a maximum of fourteen (14) characters.
Some operating systems may have more password rules, such as minimum length
and simplicity. See the appropriate operating system documentation.
Related concepts:
v “General naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation

Adding your user ID to the DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS user groups
(Windows)
After successfully completing a DB2 installation, you now have to add users to the
DB2ADMNS or the DB2USERS groups to give them access to your DB2 product.
The DB2 installer creates two new groups. You can either use a new name or
accept the default names. The default group names are DB2ADMNS and
DB2USERS.
Prerequisites:
v You must have installed a DB2 product.
v You must have selected the Enable operating system security check box on the
Enable operating system security for DB2 object panel during the installation of
your DB2 product.
Procedure:
To add users to the appropriate group:
1. Launch the Computer Management tool. Click Start and Select -> Settings ->
Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management.
2. Select Local Users and Groups.
3. Select Users.
4. Select the user you want to add.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the Member Of tab.
7. Click Add.
8. Select the appropriate group.
9. Click OK.
If you did the install and chose not to enable the new security feature you can still
do so post-install by running the db2extsec.exe command.
Once you enable this security feature using the db2extsec.exe command, you have
two options for backing out:
1. Run the db2extsec.exe command again immediately WITHOUT making any
additional changes to the system. If there have been any changes at all made to
the system you must use option 2.
2. Add the Everyone group to the DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS groups.
Chapter 5. After you install

89
Related concepts:
v “Extended Windows security using DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS groups” in
Administration Guide: Implementation
Related reference:
v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on
page 12
v “db2extsec - Set permissions for DB2 objects command” in Command Reference

DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg
This topic provides information about the format of the node configuration file
(db2nodes.cfg). The db2nodes.cfg file is used to define the database partition
servers that participate in a DB2 instance. The db2nodes.cfg file is also used to
specify the IP address or host name of a high-speed interconnect, if you want to
use a high-speed interconnect for database partition server communication.
The format of the db2nodes.cfg file is as follows:
nodenumber

hostname

logicalport

netname

resourcesetname

nodenumber, hostname, logicalport, netname, and resourcesetname are defined in
the following section.
The format of the db2nodes.cfg file on Windows is different than the same file on
UNIX. On Windows, the column format is:
nodenumber hostname computername logicalport netname

nodenumber

resourcesetname

A unique number, between 0 and 999, that identifies a database
partition server in a partitioned database system.
To scale your partitioned database system, you add an entry for
each database partition server to the db2nodes.cfg file. The
nodenumber value that you select for additional database partition
servers must be in ascending order, however, gaps can exist in this
sequence. You can choose to put a gap between the nodenumber
values if you plan to add logical partition servers and wish to keep
the nodes logically grouped in this file.
This entry is required.

hostname

The TCP/IP host name of the database partition server for use by
the FCM.
This entry is required.

logicalport

Specifies the logical port number for the database partition server.
This field is used to specify a particular database partition server
on a workstation that is running logical database partition servers.
DB2 reserves a port range (for example, 60000 - 60003) in the
etc/services file for inter-partition communications at the time of
installation. This logicalport field in db2nodes.cfg specifies which
port in that range you want to assign to a particular logical
partition server.
If there is no entry for this field, the default is 0. However, if you
add an entry for the netname field, you must enter a number for
the logicalport field.

90

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
If you are using logical database partitions, the logicalport value
you specify must start at 0 and continue in ascending order (for
example, 0,1,2).
Furthermore, if you specify a logicalport entry for one database
partition server, you must specify a logicalport for each database
partition server listed in your db2nodes.cfg file.
This field is optional only if you are not using logical database
partitions or a high speed interconnect.
Specifies the host name or the IP address of the high speed
interconnect for FCM communication.

netname

If an entry is specified for this field, all communication between
database partition servers (except for communications as a result of
the db2start, db2stop, and db2_all commands) is handled through
the high speed interconnect.
This parameter is required only if you are using a high speed
interconnect for database partition communications.
resourcesetname
The resourcesetname defines the operating system resource that the
node should be started in. The resourcesetname is for process
affinity support, used for MLNs, provided with a string type field
formerly known as quadname.
This parameter is only supported on AIX, HP-UX, and Solaris
Operating Environment.
On AIX 5.2, this concept is known as ″resource sets″ and on Solaris
Operating Environment it is called ″projects″. Refer to your
operating systems documentation for more information on resource
management.
On HP-UX, the resourcename parameter is a name of PRM group.
Refer to ″HP-UX Process Resource Manager. User Guide.
(B8733-90007)″ documentation from HP for more information.
On Windows operating systems, process affinity for a logical node
can be defined through the db2processor registry variable. See the
related links section for more information on system environment
variables.
The netname parameter must be specified if the resourcesetname
parameter is used.
Example configurations:
Use the following example configurations to determine the appropriate
configuration for your environment.
One computer, four database partitions servers
If you are not using a clustered environment and want to have four
database partition servers on one physical workstation called ServerA,
update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows:
0
1
2
3

ServerA
ServerA
ServerA
ServerA

0
1
2
3

Chapter 5. After you install

91
Two computers, one database partition server per computer
If you want your partitioned database system to contain two physical
workstations, called ServerA and ServerB, update the db2nodes.cfg file as
follows:
0
1

ServerA
ServerB

0
0

Two computers, three database partition server on one computer
If you want your partitioned database system to contain two physical
workstations, called ServerA and ServerB, and ServerA is running 3
database partition servers, update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows:
4
6
8
9

ServerA
ServerA
ServerA
ServerB

0
1
2
0

Two computers, three database partition servers with high speed switches
If you want your partitioned database system to contain two computers,
called ServerA and ServerB (with ServerB running two database partition
servers), and use a high speed interconnect called switch1 and switch2,
update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows:
0
1
2

ServerA
ServerB
ServerB

0
0
1

switch1
switch2
switch2

Examples using resourcename:
These restrictions apply to the following examples:
v This example shows the usage of resourcename when there is no high speed
interconnect in the configuration.
v The netname is fourth column and a hostname also can be specified on that
column where there is no switch name and you want to use resourcename. The
fifth parameter is resourcename if it is defined. The resource group specification
can only show as the fifth column in the db2nodes.cfg file. This means that for
you to specify a resource group, you must also enter a fourth column. The
fourth column is intended for a high speed switch.
v If you do not have a high speed switch or you do not want to use it, you must
then enter the hostname (same as the second column). In other words, the DB2
database management system does not support column gaps (or interchanging
them) in the db2nodes.cfg files. This restriction already applies to the first three
columns, and now it applies to all five columns.
AIX example:
Here is an example of how to set up the resource set for AIX 5.2.
In this example, there is one physical node with 32 processors and 8 logical
database partitions (MLNs). This example shows how to provide process affinity to
each MLN.
1. Define resource sets in /etc/rset:
DB2/MLN1:
owner
group
perm
resources
DB2/MLN2:

92

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00000,sys/cpu.00001,sys/cpu.00002,sys/cpu.00003
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00004,sys/cpu.00005,sys/cpu.00006,sys/cpu.00007

DB2/MLN3:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00008,sys/cpu.00009,sys/cpu.00010,sys/cpu.00011

DB2/MLN4:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00012,sys/cpu.00013,sys/cpu.00014,sys/cpu.00015

DB2/MLN5:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00016,sys/cpu.00017,sys/cpu.00018,sys/cpu.00019

DB2/MLN6:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00020,sys/cpu.00021,sys/cpu.00022,sys/cpu.00023

DB2/MLN7:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00024,sys/cpu.00025,sys/cpu.00026,sys/cpu.00027

DB2/MLN8:
owner
group
perm
resources

=
=
=
=

db2inst1
system
rwr-rsys/cpu.00028,sys/cpu.00029,sys/cpu.00030,sys/cpu.00031

2. Enable memory affinity by typing the following command: vmo -p -o
memory_affinity=1.
3. Give instance permissions to use resource sets:
chuser capabilities=
CAP_BYPASS_RAC_VMM,CAP_PROPAGATE,CAP_NUMA_ATTACH

db2inst1

4. Add the resource set name as the fifth column in db2nodes.cfg:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta
regatta

DB2/MLN1
DB2/MLN2
DB2/MLN3
DB2/MLN4
DB2/MLN5
DB2/MLN6
DB2/MLN7
DB2/MLN8

HP-UX example:
The sample shows how to use PRM groups for CPU shares on machine with 4
CPUs and 4 MLNs and we want to set 24% of CPU share per MLN, leaving 4% for
other applications. The DB2 instance name is db2inst1.
1. Edit GROUP section of /etc/prmconf:

Chapter 5. After you install

93
OTHERS:1:4::
db2prm1:50:24::
db2prm2:51:24::
db2prm3:52:24::
db2prm4:53:24::

2. Add instance owner entry to /etc/prmconf:
db2inst1::::OTHERS,db2prm1,db2prm2,db2prm3,db2prm4

3. Initialize groups and enable CPU manager by entering the following command:
prmconfig -i
prmconfig -e CPU

4. Add PRM group names as a fifth column to db2nodes.cfg:
1
2
3
4

voyager
voyager
voyager
voyager

0
1
2
3

voyager
voyager
voyager
voyager

db2prm1
db2prm2
db2prm3
db2prm4

PRM configuration (steps 1-3) may be done using interactive GUI tool xprm.
Linux example:
On Linux operating systems, the resourcesetname column defines a number that
corresponds to a Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) node on the system. The
numactl system utility must be available in addition to a 2.6 kernel with NUMA
policy support. Refer to the man page for numact1 for more information about
NUMA support on Linux operating systems.
This example shows how to set up a four node NUMA computer with each logical
node associated with a NUMA node.
1. Ensure that NUMA capabilities exist on your system.
2. Issue the following command:
$ numactl --hardware

Output similar to the following displays:
available: 4
node 0 size:
node 0 free:
node 1 size:
node 1 free:
node 2 size:
node 2 free:
node 3 size:
node 3 free:

nodes (0-3)
1901 MB
1457 MB
1910 MB
1841 MB
1910 MB
1851 MB
1905 MB
1796 MB

3. In this example, there are four NUMA nodes on the system. Edit the
db2nodes.cfg file as follows to associate each Multiple Logical Node (MLN)
with a NUMA node on the system:
0
1
2
3

hostname
hostname
hostname
hostname

0
1
2
3

hostname
hostname
hostname
hostname

0
1
2
3

Solaris Operating Environment example:
Here is an example of how to set up the project for Solaris Version 9.
In this example, we have 1 physical node with 8 processors: one CPU will be used
for the default project, three (3) CPUs will used by the Application Server, and four
(4) CPUs for DB2. The instance name is db2inst1.

94

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
1. Create a resource pool configuration file using an editor. For this example, the
file will be called pool.db2. Here’s the content:
create system hostname
create pset pset_default (uint pset.min = 1)
create pset db0_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1)
create pset db1_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1)
create pset db2_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1)
create pset db3_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1)
create pset appsrv_pset (uint pset.min = 3; uint pset.max = 3)
create pool pool_default (string pool.scheduler="TS";
boolean pool.default = true)
create pool db0_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS")
create pool db1_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS")
create pool db2_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS")
create pool db3_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS")
create pool appsrv_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS")
associate pool pool_default (pset pset_default)
associate pool db0_pool (pset db0_pset)
associate pool db1_pool (pset db1_pset)
associate pool db2_pool (pset db2_pset)
associate pool db3_pool (pset db3_pset)
associate pool appsrv_pool (pset appsrv_pset)

2. Edit the /etc/project file to add the DB2 projects and appsrv project as follows:
system:0::::
user.root:1::::
noproject:2::::
default:3::::
group.staff:10::::
appsrv:4000:App Serv project:root::project.pool=appsrv_pool
db2proj0:5000:DB2 Node 0 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db0_pool
db2proj1:5001:DB2 Node 1 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db1_pool
db2proj2:5002:DB2 Node 2 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db2_pool
db2proj3:5003:DB2 Node 3 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db3_pool

3. Create the resource pool: # poolcfg -f pool.db2.
4. Activate the resource pool: # pooladm -c
5. Add the project name as the fifth column in db2nodes.cfg file:
0
1
2
3

hostname
hostname
hostname
hostname

0
1
2
3

hostname
hostname
hostname
hostname

db2proj0
db2proj1
db2proj2
db2proj3

Related tasks:
v “Updating the node configuration file (Linux and UNIX)” on page 95
v “Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Linux and UNIX)”
on page 48
Related reference:
v “System environment variables” in Performance Guide

Updating the node configuration file (Linux and UNIX)
The node configuration file (db2nodes.cfg), located in the instance owner’s home
directory, contains configuration information that tells DB2 which servers
participate in an instance of the partitioned database environment. A db2nodes.cfg
file exists for each instance in a partitioned database environment.

Chapter 5. After you install

95
The db2nodes.cfg file must contain one entry for each server participating in the
instance. When you create an instance, the db2nodes.cfg file is automatically
created and an entry for the instance-owning server is added.
For example, when you created the DB2 instance using the DB2 Setup wizard, on
the instance-owning server ServerA, the db2nodes.cfg file is updated as follows:
0

ServerA

0

This task provides steps for updating the db2nodes.cfg file to include entries for
participating computers.
Prerequisites:
v The DB2 application must be installed on all participating computers.
v A DB2 instance must exist on the primary computer.
v You must be a user with SYSADM authority.
v If you plan to use a high speed switch for communication between database
partition servers or if your partitioned configuration will have multiple logical
partitions, review the DB2 node configuration file topic for configuration examples
and information about file format of db2nodes.cfg.
Restrictions:
The hostnames used in the steps of the Procedure section must be fully qualified
hostnames.
Procedure:
To update the db2nodes.cfg file:
1. Log on as the instance owner (in our example, db2inst1 is the instance owner).
2. Ensure that the DB2 instance is stopped by entering:
INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2stop

where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance owner (the
db2nodes.cfg file is locked when the instance is running and can only be edited
when the instance is stopped).
For example, if your instance home directory is /db2home/db2inst1, enter the
following command:
/db2home/db2inst1/sqllib/adm/db2stop

3. Add an entry to the .rhosts file for each DB2 instance. Update the file by
adding the following:
<hostname> <db2instance>

where <hostname> is the TCP/IP host name of the database server and
<db2instance> is the name of the instance you use to access the database
server.
4. Add an entry to the db2nodes.cfg file of each participating server. When you
first view the db2nodes.cfg file, it should contain an entry similar to the
following:
0

ServerA

0

This entry includes the database partition server number (node number), the
TCP/IP host name of the server where the database partition server resides,
and a logical port number for the database partition server.

96

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
If you are installing the partitioned configuration described in the installation
overview, with four computers and a database partition server on each
computer, the updated db2nodes.cfg should appear similar to the following:
0
1
2
3

ServerA
ServerB
ServerC
ServerD

0
0
0
0

5. When you have finished updating the db2nodes.cfg file, enter the
INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2start command, where INSTHOME is the home
directory of the instance owner. For example, if your instance home directory is
/db2home/db2inst1, enter the following command:
/db2home/db2inst1/sqllib/adm/db2start

6. Log out.
Related reference:
v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90

Enabling communications between database partition servers (Linux
and UNIX)
This task describes how to enable communication between the database partition
servers that participate in your partitioned database system. Communication
between database partition servers is handled by the Fast Communications
Manager (FCM). To enable FCM, a port or port range must be reserved in the
/etc/services file on each computer in your partitioned database system.
Prerequisites:
You must have a user ID with root authority.
Restrictions:
You must perform this task on participating computers only. When you create an
instance using the DB2 Setup wizard, a port range is automatically reserved on the
primary (instance-owning) computer.
Procedure:
To enable communications between servers in a partitioned database environment:
1. Log on to the primary computer (instance owning computer) as a user with
root authority.
2. View the default port range that has been reserved in the /etc/services file. In
addition to the base configuration, the FCM ports should appear similar to the
following:
db2inst1
50000/tcp
#Add FCM port information
DB2_db2inst1
60000/tcp
DB2_db2inst1_1
60001/tcp
DB2_db2inst1_2
60002/tcp
DB2_db2inst1_END 60003/tcp

By default, the first available four ports above 60000 are reserved. One port is
for the instance-owning database partition server and three ports are for logical
database partition servers that you might choose to add to the computer after
installation is complete.
Chapter 5. After you install

97
DB2 port entries use the following format:
DB2_instance_name

port_number

where:
v instance_name is the name of the partitioned instance.
v port_number is the port number that you reserve for database partition server
communications.
3. In turn, log onto each participating computer as a root user and add identical
entries to the /etc/services file.
You can add a comment to describe each entry using the # comment identifier. For
example:
DB2_db2inst1
DB2_db2inst1_1
DB2_db2inst1_2
DB2_db2inst1_END

60000/tcp
60001/tcp
60002/tcp
60003/tcp

#
#
#
#

instance-owning partition port
logical partition port
logical partition port
logical partition port

Related concepts:
v “Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX)” on page 30
Related reference:
v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90

Enabling the execution of remote commands (Linux and UNIX)
You must update your .rhosts file in both a single-partition and partitioned
database environment to execute remote commands.
In a partitioned database system, each database partition server must have the
authority to perform remote commands on all the other database partition servers
participating in an instance. This authority can be granted by updating the.rhosts
file in the home directory for the instance. Because the home directory for the
instance is on the shared DB2 home file system, only one .rhosts file is required.
Prerequisites:
v You must have root authority.
v You must know the host name of each participating computer
v You must know the instance owner’s user name.
Procedure:
1. Log onto the primary computer as a user with root authority.
2. Create a .rhosts file in the instance home directory. For example, if your
instance home directory is /db2home/db2inst1, you can use a text editor to
create the .rhosts file by entering the following command:
vi /db2home/db2inst1/.rhosts

3. Add entries to the .rhosts file for each computer including the primary
computer. The .rhosts file has the following format:
hostname

instance_owner_user_name

Some systems might require a long host name to be specified, for example:
ServerA.yourdomain.com. Before you add host name entries to the .rhosts file,
make sure the host names in the /etc/hosts and the /etc/resolv.conf files can
be resolved.

98

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
The INSTHOME/.rhosts file should contain entries similar to the following:
ServerA.yourdomain.com
ServerB.yourdomain.com
ServerC.yourdomain.com
ServerD.yourdomain.com

db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1

Rather than specifying each host name individually, you can specify the
following entry in the .rhosts file, but this action may pose a security risk and
should only be done in a test environment.
+ db2inst1

If you have specified a high speed switch (netname) in the db2nodes.cfg file,
you should also add netname entries for each computer to the .rhosts file. The
netname values are specified in the fourth column of the db2nodes.cfg file. A
.rhosts file with high speed switch (netname) entries may look similar to the
following:
ServerA.yourdomain.com
ServerB.yourdomain.com
ServerC.yourdomain.com
ServerD.yourdomain.com
Switch1.yourdomain.com
Switch2.yourdomain.com
Switch3.yourdomain.com
Switch4.yourdomain.com

db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1
db2inst1

An alternative to using a .rhosts file is to use /etc/hosts.equiv file. The
/etc/hosts.equiv file would contain the exact same entries as the .rhosts file, but
must be created on each computer.
For more information about the .rhosts file or the /etc/hosts.equiv file, see your
operating system documentation.
Related tasks:
v “Creating a DB2 home file
page 49
v “Creating a DB2 home file
on page 51
v “Creating a file system for
v “Creating a file system for
Environment)” on page 55

system for a partitioned database system (AIX)” on
system for a partitioned database system (HP-UX)”
a partitioned DB2 server (Linux)” on page 53
a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris Operating

Enabling Control Center administration (Linux)
Before you can use the Control Center to administer your partitioned database
system, you must start the DB2 Administration server on all computers.
Procedure: To enable Control Center administration for a partitioned database
system:
Start the DB2 Administration Server on each computer
1. In turn, log on to each computer (ServerA, ServerB, ServerC, ServerD)
as the DB2 Administration Server user. In our example, dasusr1 is the
DAS user.
2. Enter the following command to start the DB2 Administration Server:
/DASHOME/das/bin/db2admin start

Chapter 5. After you install

99
where DASHOME is the home directory for the DB2 Administration
Server. In our example, the DASHOME is /db2home/dasusr1.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Starting and stopping the DB2 administration server (DAS)” in Administration
Guide: Implementation

100

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Part 3. Appendixes

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

101
102

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix A. Language support
Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows)
The interface language of DB2 is the language that appears in messages, help, and
graphical tool interfaces. When installing DB2, you have the option of installing
support for one or more languages. If, at some time after installation, you want to
change the interface language for DB2 to one of the other installed interface
languages, use the steps outlined in this task.
Do not confuse languages supported by DB2 with languages supported by the DB2
interface. Languages supported by DB2, that is, languages that data can exist in, are
a superset of languages supported by the DB2 interface.
Prerequisites:
The DB2 interface language you want to use must be installed on your system.
DB2 interface languages are selected and installed when you install DB2 using the
DB2 Setup wizard. If you change the interface language of DB2 to a supported
interface language that has not been installed, the DB2 interface language will
default to the operating system language first, and if that is not supported,
English.
Procedure:
Changing the interface language for DB2 on Windows requires that you change the
default language setting for your Windows operating system.
To change the DB2 interface language on Windows:
1. Through the Control Panel on your Windows operating system, select Regional
Options.
2. In the Regional Options dialog window, change the default language setting for
the system to the language in which you want to interface with DB2.
Refer to your operating system help for additional information about changing the
default system language.
Related tasks:
v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center”
on page 132
Related reference:
v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105
v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

103
Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and UNIX)
The interface language of the DB2 product is the language that appears in
messages, help, and graphical tool interfaces. When installing your DB2 product,
you have the option of installing support for one or more languages. If, at some
time after installation, you want to change the interface language to one of the
other installed interface languages, use the steps outlined in this task.
Do not confuse languages supported by the DB2 product with languages
supported by the DB2 interface. Languages supported by the DB2 product, that is,
languages that data can exist in, are a superset of languages supported by the DB2
interface.
Prerequisites:
Support for the DB2 interface language you want to use must be installed on your
system. DB2 interface language support is selected and installed when you install
DB2 using the DB2 Setup wizard. If you change the interface language of the DB2
product to a supported interface language that has not been installed, the DB2
interface language will default to the operating system language first, and if that is
not supported, English.
DB2 interface language support is selected and installed when you install your
DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard or by using the National Language
Package.
Procedure:
To check which public locales are available in your system, run the $ locale -a
command.
To change the DB2 interface language, set the LANG environment variable to the
desired locale.
For bourne (sh), korn (ksh), and bash shells:
LANG=<locale>
export LANG

For C shell:
setenv LANG <locale>

For example, to interface with the DB2 product in French, you must have the
French language support installed and you must set the LANG environment
variable to a French locale, for example, fr_FR.
Related tasks:
v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center”
on page 132
Related reference:
v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105
v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning

104

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Supported DB2 interface languages
DB2 language support for DB2 interfaces can be categorized into server group
languages and client group languages. Server group languages will translate most
messages, help, and DB2 graphical interface elements. Client group languages will
translate the DB2 Runtime Client component, which will include most messages
and certain help documentation.
Server group languages include: Brazilian Portuguese, Czech, Danish, Finnish,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Russian, Simplified
Chinese, Spanish, Swedish, and Traditional Chinese.
Client group languages include: Arabic, Bulgarian, Croatian, Dutch, Greek,
Hebrew, Hungarian, Portuguese, Romanian, Slovak, Slovenian, and Turkish.
Do not confuse languages supported by the DB2 product with languages
supported by the DB2 interface. Languages supported by DB2 product that is,
languages that data can exist in, are a superset of languages supported by the DB2
interface.
Related tasks:
v “Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and UNIX)” on page 104
v “Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows)” on page 103
v “Capturing error and diagnostic information during migration” in Migration
Guide
Related reference:
v “Conversion table files for euro-enabled code pages” in Administration Guide:
Planning
v “Conversion tables for code pages 923 and 924” in Administration Guide: Planning
v “National language versions” in Administration Guide: Planning
v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning

Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup wizard in another
language
If you want to run the DB2 Setup wizard in a language different from the default
language on your computer, you can start the DB2 Setup wizard manually,
specifying a language identifier. The language must be available on the platform
where you are running the installation.
Table 13. Language identifiers
Language

Language identifier

Arabic (available on Windows only)

ar

Brazilian Portuguese

br

Bulgarian

bg

Chinese, Simplified

cn

Chinese, Traditional

tw

Croatian

hr

Czech

cz
Appendix A. Language support

105
Table 13. Language identifiers (continued)
Language

Language identifier

Danish

dk

Dutch

nl

English

en

Finnish

fi

French

fr

German

de

Greek

el

Hungarian

hu

Italian

it

Japanese

jp

Korean

kr

Norwegian

no

Polish

pl

Portuguese

pt

Romanian

ro

Russian

ru

Slovak

sk

Slovenian

sl

Spanish

es

Swedish

se

Turkish

tr

Related reference:
v “Displaying the db2setup command in your national language” on page 106

Displaying the db2setup command in your national language
The db2setup command queries the operating system to determine the existing
language settings. If the language setting of your operating system is supported by
db2setup, then that language will be used.
If your system uses the same code pages but different locale names than those
supported by the DB2 interface, you can still see the translated db2setup by setting
your LANG environment variable to the appropriate value by entering the
following command:
bourne (sh), korn (ksh), and bash shells:
LANG=<locale>
export LANG

C shell:
setenv LANG <locale>

where locale is a locale supported by the DB2 interface.
Related reference:

106

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105
v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference
v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference

Appendix A. Language support

107
108

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products
Uninstalling DB2 products (Windows)
Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows)
This task provides steps for completely removing your DB2 product from your
Windows operating system. You should only perform this task if you no longer
require existing your DB2 instances and databases.
If you are uninstalling the DB2 default copy, and you have other DB2 copies on
your system, you should use the db2swtch command to choose a new default
copy before you proceed with the uninstallation. Also, if your database
administration server (DAS) is running under the copy being removed, you should
move your DAS to a copy that is not being removed. Otherwise, you will have to
recreate the DAS using db2admin create command after the uninstall and you
might have to reconfigure the DAS for some functionality to work.
Procedure:
To remove your DB2 product from Windows:
1. Drop all databases. You can drop databases using the Control Center or drop
database command. If you drop your databases, all of your data will be gone.
2. Stop all DB2 processes and services. This can be done through the Windows
Services panel or by issuing the db2stop command. If DB2 services and
processes are not stopped before attempting to remove your DB2 product, you
will receive a warning containing a list of processes and services that are
holding DB2 DLLs in memory.
3. You have two options for removing your DB2 product:
Add/Remove Programs
Accessible through the Windows Control Panel, use the Add/Remove
Programs window to remove your DB2 product. Refer to your
operating system’s help for more information about removing software
products from your Windows operating system.
db2unins command
You can run the db2unins command to remove your DB2 product.
Using this command, you can uninstall multiple DB2 products at the
same time using the /p parameter. You can also silently uninstall DB2
products by using /u parameter which will remove the DB2 products
specified in the response file. For more information, see the db2unins
command topic.
Unfortunately, your DB2 product cannot always be removed by using the Control
Panel - Add/Remove Programs facility or using the db2unins /p command or the
db2unins /u command. The following uninstallation option should ONLY be
attempted if the above method fails.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

109
To forcefully remove all DB2 copies from your Windows system, run the db2unins
/f command. This command will perform a brute force uninstallation of ALL DB2
copies on the system. Everything except user data, such as DB2 databases, will be
forcefully deleted.
Related tasks:
v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 110
v “Uninstalling a DB2 product using a response file (Windows)” in Installation and
Configuration Supplement
v “Changing the Default DB2 copy after installation (Windows)” in Administration
Guide: Implementation
Related reference:
v “db2swtch - Switch default DB2 copy command” in Command Reference
v “db2unins - Uninstall DB2 database product command” in Command Reference
v “DROP DATABASE command” in Command Reference

Uninstalling DB2 products (Linux and UNIX)
Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)
This task provides steps for removing a DB2 product from your Linux or UNIX
operating system. This task is not required to install a new version of a DB2
product. Each version of a DB2 product on Linux or UNIX has a different
installation path and can therefore coexist on the same computer.
Procedure:
To remove your DB2 product:
1. Optional: Drop all databases. You can drop databases using the Control Center
or the drop database command. Database files remain intact on your file
systems when you drop an instance without dropping databases first.
2. Stop the DB2 Administration Server.
3. Remove the Administration Server.
4. Stop DB2 instances.
5. Remove DB2 instances.
6. Remove DB2 products.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v
v
v
v

“Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111
“Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111
“Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112
“Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112

v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 109

110

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Related reference:
v “DROP DATABASE command” in Command Reference

Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)
You must stop the DB2 administration server (DAS) before you remove your DB2
product. You only need to perform this task if the DAS is associated with the DB2
copy you are uninstalling.
Procedure:
To stop the DB2 administration server:
1. Log in as the DB2 administration server owner.
2. Stop the DB2 administration server by entering the db2admin stop command.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
Related reference:
v “db2admin - DB2 administration server command” in Command Reference

Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)
You must remove the DB2 administration server (DAS) before you remove your
DB2 product. You only need to remove the DB2 DAS if this is the last DB2 Version
9 copy that you’re removing. Otherwise, you should run the dasupdt command
from the DB2 copy that you would like to have the DB2 DAS associated with.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

remove the DB2 administration server:
Log in as a user with root authority.
Stop the DB2 administration server.
Remove the DB2 administration server by entering the following command:
DB2DIR/instance/dasdrop

where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9
installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The
default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation
Related tasks:
v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
v “Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111

Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products

111
Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)
You must stop all DB2 instances associated with the DB2 copy you are uninstalling.
Instances associated with other DB2 copies should not be affected by uninstalling
the current copy.
Procedure:
To stop a DB2 instance:
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. To obtain a list of the names of all DB2 instances associated with your current
DB2 copy, enter the following command:
DB2DIR/bin/db2ilist

where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9
installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The
default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1.
3. Log out.
4. Log back in as the owner of the instance you want to stop.
5. Run the start up script if it is not included in .profile.
. INSTHOME/sqllib/db2profile
source INSTHOME/sqllib/db2cshrc

(bash, Bourne, or Korn shells)
(C shell)

where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance.
6. You might want to save the database manager configuration file, db2systm, the
db2nodes.cfg file, or user defined function or fenced stored procedure
applications in INSTHOME/sqllib/function.
7. Stop the DB2 database manager by entering the db2stop force command.
8. Confirm that the instance is stopped by entering the db2 terminate command.
9. Repeat these steps for each instance.
Related reference:
v “db2ilist - List instances command” in Command Reference
v “db2stop - Stop DB2 command” in Command Reference
v “FORCE APPLICATION command” in Command Reference

Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)
You can remove some or all of the DB2 instances on your system. Once an instance
is removed, you can use the DB2 databases owned by the instance if you catalog
them under another instance of the same release. Even though you remove the
instance, the databases are still intact and can be reused unless the database files
are expressly deleted.
Remove DB2 instances only if you are not planning to use your DB2 products, or if
you do not want to migrate existing instances to a later version of the DB2
product. Migration requires that both the new and old DB2 versions are still
installed. You cannot migrate an instance if the DB2 copy it is associated with has
been removed.
Procedure:
To remove an instance:

112

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. Remove the instance by entering the following command:
DB2DIR/instance/db2idrop InstName

where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9
installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The
default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1.
The db2idrop command removes the instance entry from the list of instances
and removes the INSTHOME/sqllib directory, where INSTHOME is the home
directory of the instance and where InstName is the login name of the instance.
If you are storing any files in /sqllib directory, these files will be removed by
this action. If you still need these files, you must make a copy of them before
dropping the instance.
3. Optional: As a user with root authority, remove the instance owner’s user ID
and group (if used only for that instance). Do not remove these if you are
planning to re-create the instance.
Remove the database files from the systems or drop the databases before
dropping the instance if you no longer need the databases. After dropping the
instance the database files remain intact.
This step is optional since the instance owner and the instance owner group
may be used for other purposes.
Related tasks:
v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
Related reference:
v “db2idrop - Remove instance command” in Command Reference

Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or
doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)
This task provides steps for removing DB2 products or DB2 components using the
db2_deinstall command. The db2_deinstall command removes all DB2 products
from your system. The doce_deinstall command removes the DB2 Information
Center that is in the same install path as the doce_deinstall tool. This command is
only available on the Linux operating systems.
You cannot remove DB2 products using a native operating system utility, such as
rpm or SMIT.
Prerequisites:
Before you remove DB2 products from your system:
v Ensure that you have performed all steps outlined in Uninstalling your DB2
product.
v You must have root authority to remove DB2 products.
Procedure:
To remove ALL DB2 products from a specific path:
1. Log in as user with root authority.

Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products

113
2. Access the path where the DB2 products are located. To locate the path of the
DB2 product to remove, see
3. Run the db2_deinstall -a command from the DB2DIR/install directory or the
doce_deinstall -a command from the DB2DIR/doc/install directory, where
DB2DIR is the location that you specified when you installed your DB2
product.
Related tasks:
v “Applying fix packs” on page 87
v “Listing DB2 products installed on your system (Linux and UNIX)” on page 29
v “Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112
v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 110
Related reference:
v “db2_deinstall - Uninstall DB2 products or features command” in Command
Reference
v “db2_install - Install DB2 product command” in Command Reference
v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation

114

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix C. Mounting the DB2 product CD-ROM (Linux and
UNIX)
Mounting the CD-ROM (AIX)
Prerequisites:
Root authority is required to perform this task.
Procedure:
To mount the CD-ROM on AIX using the System Management Interface Tool
(SMIT), perform the following steps:
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. Insert the CD-ROM in the drive.
3. Create a CD-ROM mount point by entering the mkdir -p /cdrom command,
where cdrom represents the CD-ROM mount point directory.
4. Allocate a CD-ROM file system using SMIT by entering the smit storage
command.
5. After SMIT starts, select File Systems —> Add / Change / Show / Delete File
Systems —> CDROM File Systems —> Add CDROM File System.
6. In the Add a File System window:
v Enter a device name for your CD-ROM file system in the DEVICE Name
field. Device names for CD-ROM file systems must be unique. If there is a
duplicate device name, you may need to delete a previously-defined
CD-ROM file system or use another name for your directory. In our example,
we will use /dev/cd0 as the device name.
v Enter the CD-ROM mount point directory in the MOUNT POINT window.
In our example, the mount point directory is /cdrom.
v In the Mount AUTOMATICALLY at system restart field, select yes to enable
automatic mounting of the file system.
v Click OK to close the window, then click Cancel three times to exit SMIT.
7. Next, mount the CD-ROM file system by entering the smit mountfs command.
8. In the Mount a File System window:
v Enter the device name for this CD-ROM file system in the FILE SYSTEM
name field. In our example, the device name is /dev/cd0.
v Enter the CD-ROM mount point in the Directory over which to mount field.
In our example, the mount point is /cdrom.
v Enter cdrfs in the Type of Filesystem field. To view the other kinds of file
systems you can mount, click List.
v In the Mount as READ-ONLY system field, select yes.
v Accept the remaining default values and click OK to close the window.
Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM,
place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the
CD-ROM mount point directory.
Related tasks:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

115
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX)” on page 21

Mounting the CD-ROM (HP-UX)
The following steps will enable you to successfully mount your DB2 for HP-UX
product CD-ROM.
Prerequisites:
Root authority is required to perform this task.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

mount your DB2 for HP-UX product CD-ROM:
Log in as a user with root authority.
Insert the CD-ROM in the drive.
If necessary, define a new directory as the mount point for the CD-ROM drive.
Define /cdrom as the mount point using the mkdir /cdrom command.
4. If necessary, identify the drive device file using the ioscan -fnC disk command.
This command lists all recognized CD-ROM drives and their associated device
files. The filename will be something similar to /dev/dsk/c1t2d0.
5. Mount the CD drive to the mount-point directory:
mount -F cdfs -o rr /dev/dsk/c1t2d0 /cdrom

6. Obtain a file listing to verify the mount using the ls /cdrom command.
7. Log out.
Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM,
place the CD in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the
CD-ROM mount point directory.
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX)” on page 23
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Mounting the CD-ROM (Linux)
Prerequisites:
Root authority is required to perform this task.
Procedure:
To mount the CD-ROM on Linux:
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. Insert the CD-ROM in the drive and enter the following command:
mount -t iso9660 -o ro /dev/cdrom /cdrom

where /cdrom represents the mount point of the CD-ROM.
3. Log out.

116

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM,
place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the
CD-ROM mount point directory.
Related reference:
v “DB2 product license files” on page 81

Mounting the CD-ROM (Solaris Operating Environment)
Prerequisites:
If you are mounting the CD-ROM drive from a remote system using NFS, the
CD-ROM file system on the remote computer must be exported with root access.
You must also mount that file system with root access on the local computer.
Procedure:
To
1.
2.
3.

mount the CD-ROM on Solaris Operating Environment:
Log in as a user with root authority.
Insert the CD-ROM into the drive.
If the Volume Manager (vold) is running on your system, the CD-ROM is
automatically mounted as /cdrom/cd_label if the CD has a label or
/cdrom/unnamed_cdrom if it is unlabeled.
If the Volume Manager is not running on your system, complete the following
steps to mount the CD-ROM:
a. Determine the name of the device by entering the following command:
ls -al /dev/sr* |awk ’{print "/" $11}’

This command returns the name of the CD-ROM device. In this example,
the command returns the string /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2.
b. Enter the following commands to mount the CD-ROM:
mkdir -p /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom
mount -F hsfs -o ro /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom

where /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 represents the name of the device that was
returned in the preceding step and /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom represents the
CD-ROM mount directory.
Note: If you are mounting the CD-ROM drive from a remote system using
NFS, the CD-ROM file system on the remote machine must be
exported with root access. You must also mount that file system with
root access on the local machine.
4. Log out.
Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM,
place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the
CD-ROM mount point directory.
Related tasks:
v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65
Related reference:

Appendix C. Mounting the DB2 product CD-ROM (Linux and UNIX)

117
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating
System)” on page 27

118

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center
DB2 Information Center installation options
The DB2 Information Center can be accessed from:
v the IBM Web site
v a server on your organization’s network
v a copy installed on your computer
By default, DB2 products access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site.
However, if you want to access the DB2 Information Center on an intranet server
or on your own computer, you must install the DB2 Information Center using the
DB2 Information Center CD found in your product Media Pack.
The following table provides recommendations on possible options for accessing
DB2 product documentation in the DB2 Information Center based on your work
environment.
Internet access

Intranet access

Recommendation

Yes

Yes

Access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web
site, or access the DB2 Information Center installed
on an intranet server.

Yes

No

Access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web
site.

No

Yes

Access the DB2 Information Center installed on an
intranet server.

No

No

Access the DB2 Information Center on a local
computer.

Accessing the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site:
The DB2 Information Center can be found on the Internet at http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2help. If you configure your local DB2
installation to use this version of the Information Center, you will always be
accessing the most up-to-date information about the DB2 product.
Use the db2set command to configure the registry variables on your computer to
access the DB2 Information Center from either the IBM Web site or from your
computer. You can also change these variables through the DB2 GUI tools, if you
have installed the DB2 GUI tools on your system.
Accessing the DB2 Information Center on your computer:
After installing your DB2 product, you need to install the DB2 Information Center
if you want to access DB2 documentation on this computer. Use the DB2
Information Center CD in the media pack to install the Information Center.
Accessing the DB2 Information Center on an intranet server:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

119
You may also choose to install a copy of the DB2 Information Center on an intranet
server so that everyone on the intranet can have access to DB2 documentation
without having to install the documentation on every machine.
Using a response file for product installation, you can configure every DB2 client
to access the documentation on the intranet server. The response file should
contain the configuration information necessary to access the DB2 Information
Center using the host name and the port number of the Information Center on the
intranet server.
You can also change the settings for already-installed DB2 clients to use the
Information Center hosted on your Intranet. Use the db2set command or the DB2
GUI tools to change the DB2 Information Center registry variables on each
computer. DB2_DOCHOST is the registry variable used for the host name, and
DB2_DOCPORT is the registry variable used for the port number. These values
must match those set on the intranet server where the DB2 Information Center is
installed.
Related concepts:
v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120
Related tasks:
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on
page 122
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)”
on page 124
v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet
server” on page 133
Related reference:
v “db2set - DB2 profile registry command” in Command Reference

Features of the DB2 Information Center
The DB2 Information Center gives you access to all of the information you need to
take full advantage of DB2 products. The DB2 Information Center also contains
information for major DB2 features and components including replication, and the
DB2 extenders.
The following features help you find and work with the information you need.
Note that some features require support for JavaScript™ be enabled.
Flexible options for accessing documentation
You can choose to view the DB2 documentation using the option that best
meets your needs:
v To view the most up-to-date information, you can access the DB2
Information Center from the IBM.com Web site at http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/
v To keep network traffic inside your intranet, you can install the DB2
Information Center on a single server on your intranet
v To reduce your dependence on network connections, you can install the
documentation on your own computers

120

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Search
You can search all of the topics in the DB2 Information Center by entering
a search term in the Search text field. You can retrieve exact matches by
enclosing terms in quotation marks (″), and you can refine your search
with wildcard operators (*, ?) and Boolean operators (AND, NOT, OR).
Table of contents
You can locate topics in the DB2 Information Center from the table of
contents. The table of contents is organized primarily by the kind of tasks
you can perform, but also includes entries for product overviews, goals,
reference information, an index, and a glossary.
v Product overviews describe the relationship between the available
products in the DB2 family, the features offered by each of those
products, and up to date release information for each of these products.
v Goal categories such as installing, administering, and developing include
topics that enable you to quickly complete tasks and develop a deeper
understanding of the background information for completing those
tasks.
v Reference topics provide detailed information about a subject, including
statement and command syntax, message help, and configuration
parameters.
v The index provides access to all of the documentation from an
alphabetized index.
v The glossary provides definitions of terms used in the DB2
documentation. The glossary is organized in alphabetical order by
glossary term.
Integrated multi-language support
The DB2 Information Center displays information in the preferred
language set in your browser preferences. If a topic is not available in your
preferred language, the DB2 Information Center displays the English
version of that topic. For local or intranet installations, only the languages
installed can be displayed.
The DB2 Information Center can be viewed in Firefox 1.0 and higher,
Mozilla-based browsers 1.7 and higher, or Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and
higher.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
Related tasks:
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on
page 122
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)”
on page 124
v “Accessing different versions of the DB2 Information Center” on page 132
v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center”
on page 132
v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center
v “Searching the Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center
v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet
server” on page 133
Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center

121
Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard
(Linux)
DB2 product documentation can be accessed in three ways:
v at the IBM Web site
v on an intranet server
v on a version installed on your computer
By default, DB2 products access DB2 documentation at the IBM Web site. If you
want to access the DB2 documentation on an intranet server or on your own
computer, you must install the documentation from the DB2 Information Center CD.
Using the DB2 Setup wizard, you can define your installation preferences and
install the DB2 Information Center on a computer that uses a Linux operating
system.
Prerequisites:
Review the prerequisite information in the Installation requirements for DB2 clients
and servers (Linux) topic.
For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html.
Restrictions:
v You must be logged on as a user with root authority to install the DB2
Information Center.
v You can only install one copy of the DB2 Version Information Center on your
system.
Procedure:
To install the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard:
1. Log on to the system.
2. Insert and mount the DB2 Information Center product CD on your system.
3. Change to the directory where the CD is mounted by entering the following
command:
cd /cd

4.
5.

6.
7.

122

where /cd represents the mount point of the CD.
Enter the ./db2setup command to start the DB2 Setup wizard.
The DB2 Setup Launchpad opens. From the launchpad, you can view
installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to
the installation. You should review the installation prerequisites and release
notes for late-breaking information.
Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window displays.
On the Install a Product page, if you do not have an existing DB2 Information
Center installed on your computer, launch the installation by clicking Install
New.
If you already have an existing DB2 Version 9 Information Center installed on
your computer, click Work with Existing to work with the existing DB2
Information Center.

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
8. On the Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard page, click Next. The DB2 Setup
wizard will guide you through the program setup process.
9. To proceed with the installation, you must accept the license agreement. On
the Software License Agreement page, select Accept and click Next.
10. On the Select installation, response file creation, or both page, select Install
DB2 Information Center on this computer. If you want to use a response file
to install the DB2 Information Center on this or other computers at a later
time, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer and save my
settings in a response file. You can specify where the response file will be
saved. Click Next.
11. Select the languages in which the DB2 Information Center will be installed on
the Select the languages to install page. By default, the DB2 Information
Center is installed in the /opt/ibm/db2ic/V9 directory. However, you can
specify your own installation path. Click Next.
12. Configure the DB2 Information Center for incoming communication on the
Specify the DB2 Information Center port page. Click Next to continue the
installation.
13. Review the installation choices you have made in the Start copying files page.
To change any settings, click Back. Click Finish to complete the installation of
the DB2 Information Center files onto your computer.
The installation logs, db2setup.log and db2setup.err will be located, by default, in
the /tmp directory. You can specify the location of the log files.
The db2setup.log file captures all DB2 installation information including errors.
The db2setup.err file captures any error output that is returned by Java (for
example, exceptions and trap information).
There is no longer a db2setup.his file. Instead, the DB2 installer saves a copy of
the db2setup.log file in the DB2_DIR/install/logs/ directory, and renames it
todb2install.history. If db2install.history already exists, the copy of the
db2setup.log will be renamed db2install.history.xxxx where xxxx are digits
starting at 0000 and increasing by 1 for the next log file.

DB2 Information Center daemon (Linux)
The DB2 Information Center daemon is the background process that runs the
Information Center on Linux. The daemon, which is part of the DB2 Information
Center installation, is initialized by the script db2icd which can be found in
INST_PATH/doc/bin where INST_PATH is the installation path for your DB2 product.

Starting or stopping the Information Center daemon (Linux)
The only time you should need to start or stop the daemon manually is when you
want to change the configuration variables for the daemon. Normally, the daemon
is started at system startup, according to the run levels created during the
installation of the DB2 Information Center.
Procedure:
To stop and start the Information Center daemon:
1. Log in as a user with root authority.
2. Halt the daemon if it is already running. At a command line, enter:
INIT_DIR/db2icd stop

where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously.
Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center

123
3. Change any of the variables for the daemon by editing the db2ic.conf file.
Currently, you can modify the TCP port number for the documentation service,
and the location of the temporary workspace used by the daemon while it is
running.
4. Start the daemon. At a command line, enter:
INIT_DIR/db2icd start

where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously.
When the daemon restarts, it uses the new environment variables.
There is also an option to shut down and restart the daemon immediately. At a
command line, enter:
INIT_DIR/db2icd restart

where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously.
You can check the status of the daemon at any time. At a command line, enter:
INIT_DIR/db2icd status

where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously. The
daemon returns the current status, and displays the process ID of the daemon if it
is active.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
Related tasks:
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)”
on page 124
v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command
(Linux and UNIX)” on page 113
v “Installing a DB2 product using a response file (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation
and Configuration Supplement
v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center
Related reference:
v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24
v “doce_deinstall - Uninstall DB2 Information Center command” in Command
Reference
v “doce_install - Install DB2 Information Center command” in Command Reference

Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard
(Windows)
DB2 product documentation can be accessed in three ways:
v at the IBM Web site
v on an intranet server
v on a version installed on your computer

124

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
By default, DB2 products access DB2 documentation at the IBM Web site. If you
want to access the DB2 documentation on an intranet server or on your own
computer, you must install the DB2 documentation from the DB2 Information Center
CD.
Using the DB2 Setup wizard, you can define your installation preferences and
install the DB2 Information Center on a computer that uses the Windows operating
system.
Prerequisites:
This section lists the hardware, operating system, software, and communication
requirements for installing the DB2 Information Center on Windows.
Operating system requirements
You require one of the following operating systems:
v Windows 2000
v Windows XP
v Windows Server 2003
The Information Center will run on 64-bit systems, but it does not exploit
the 64-bit architecture. Only 64-bit versions of Windows that run on Intel
processors are supported.
Software requirements
You require one of the following browsers:
v Firefox 1.0 and higher
v Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 and higher
v Mozilla-based browsers 1.7 and higher
Communication requirements
You require TCP/IP.
Restrictions:
v You require an account with administrative privileges to install the DB2
Information Center.
v You can only install one copy of the DB2 Version Information Center on your
system.
Procedure:
To install the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard:
1. Log on to the system with the account that you have defined for the DB2
Information Center installation.
2. Insert your DB2 product CD into the drive. If enabled, the auto-run feature
automatically starts the DB2 Setup launchpad. If the auto-run does not work,
use Windows Explorer to browse the DB2 product CD and double-click on the
setup icon.
3. From the DB2 Setup Launchpad, you can view installation prerequisites and
the release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You should
review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking
information.
4. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window displays

Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center

125
5. On the Install a Product window, if you do not have an existing DB2
Information Center installed on your computer, launch the installation by
clicking Install New.
If you already have an existing DB2 Version 9 Information Center installed on
your computer, click Work with Existing to work with the existing DB2
Information Center.
6. On the Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard window, click Next. The DB2
Setup wizard will guide you through the program setup process.
7. To proceed with the installation, you must accept the license agreement. On
the License Agreement page, select I accept the terms in the license
agreement and click Next.
8. On the Select installation, response file creation, or both page, select Install
DB2 Information Center on this computer. If you want to use a response file
to install the DB2 Information Center on this or other computers at a later
time, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer and save my
settings in a response file. You can specify where the response file will be
saved. Click Next.
9. Select the languages in which the DB2 Information Center will be installed on
the Select the languages to install page. By default, the DB2 Information
Center is installed in the C:Program FilesIBMDB2 Information
CenterVersion 9 directory. However, you can specify your own installation
path. Click Next.
10. Configure the DB2 Information Center for incoming communication on the
Specify the DB2 Information Center port page. Click Next to continue the
installation.
11. Review the installation choices you have made in the Start copying files page.
To change any settings, click Back. Click Install to copy the DB2 Information
Center files onto your computer.
For information on errors encountered during installation, review the installation
log file located in the My DocumentsDB2LOG directory. The log file uses the
following format: DB2-DOCE-DateTime.log, for example, DB2-DOCE-Tue Apr 11
08_38_35 2006.log
Related concepts:
v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
Related tasks:
v “Installing a DB2 product using a response file (Windows)” in Installation and
Configuration Supplement
v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center”
on page 132
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on
page 122
v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center
v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet
server” on page 133
Related reference:
v “db2rspgn - Response file generator command (Windows)” in Command Reference

126

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information
Overview of the DB2 technical information
DB2 technical information is available through the following tools and methods:
v DB2 Information Center
– Topics
– Help for DB2 tools
– Sample programs
– Tutorials
v DB2 books
– PDF files (downloadable)
– PDF files (from the DB2 PDF CD)
– printed books
v Command line help
– Command help
– Message help
v Sample programs
IBM periodically makes documentation updates available. If you access the online
version on the DB2 Information Center at ibm.com®, you do not need to install
documentation updates because this version is kept up-to-date by IBM. If you have
installed the DB2 Information Center, it is recommended that you install the
documentation updates. Documentation updates allow you to update the
information that you installed from the DB2 Information Center CD or downloaded
from Passport Advantage as new information becomes available.
Note: The DB2 Information Center topics are updated more frequently than either
the PDF or the hard-copy books. To get the most current information, install
the documentation updates as they become available, or refer to the DB2
Information Center at ibm.com.
You can access additional DB2 technical information such as technotes, white
papers, and Redbooks™ online at ibm.com. Access the DB2 Information
Management software library site at http://www.ibm.com/software/data/swlibrary/.

Documentation feedback
We value your feedback on the DB2 documentation. If you have suggestions for
how we can improve the DB2 documentation, send an e-mail to
db2docs@ca.ibm.com. The DB2 documentation team reads all of your feedback, but
cannot respond to you directly. Provide specific examples wherever possible so
that we can better understand your concerns. If you are providing feedback on a
specific topic or help file, include the topic title and URL.
Do not use this e-mail address to contact DB2 Customer Support. If you have a
DB2 technical issue that the documentation does not resolve, contact your local
IBM service center for assistance.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

127
Related concepts:
v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120
v “Sample files” in Samples Topics
Related tasks:
v “Invoking command help from the command line processor” in Command
Reference
v “Invoking message help from the command line processor” in Command
Reference
v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet
server” on page 133
Related reference:
v “DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format” on page 128

DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format
The following tables describe the DB2 library available from the IBM Publications
Center at www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order. DB2 Version 9 manuals in PDF
format can be downloaded from www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support/
manualsv9.html.
Although the tables identify books available in print, the books might not be
available in your country or region.
The information in these books is fundamental to all DB2 users; you will find this
information useful whether you are a programmer, a database administrator, or
someone who works with DB2 Connect™ or other DB2 products.
Table 14. DB2 technical information
Name

Available in print

Administration Guide:
Implementation

SC10-4221

Yes

Administration Guide: Planning

SC10-4223

Yes

Administrative API Reference

SC10-4231

Yes

Administrative SQL Routines and SC10-4293
Views

No

Call Level Interface Guide and
Reference, Volume 1

SC10-4224

Yes

Call Level Interface Guide and
Reference, Volume 2

SC10-4225

Yes

Command Reference

SC10-4226

No

Data Movement Utilities Guide
and Reference

SC10-4227

Yes

Data Recovery and High
Availability Guide and Reference

SC10-4228

Yes

Developing ADO.NET and OLE
DB Applications

SC10-4230

Yes

Developing Embedded SQL
Applications

128

Form Number

SC10-4232

Yes

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Table 14. DB2 technical information (continued)
Name

Form Number

Available in print

Developing SQL and External
Routines

SC10-4373

No

Developing Java Applications

SC10-4233

Yes

Developing Perl and PHP
Applications

SC10-4234

No

Getting Started with Database
Application Development

SC10-4252

Yes

Getting started with DB2
GC10-4247
installation and administration on
Linux and Windows

Yes

Message Reference Volume 1

SC10-4238

No

Message Reference Volume 2

SC10-4239

No

Migration Guide

GC10-4237

Yes

Net Search Extender
Administration and User’s Guide
Note: HTML for this
document is not installed from
the HTML documentation CD.

SH12-6842

Yes

Performance Guide

SC10-4222

Yes

Query Patroller Administration
and User’s Guide

GC10-4241

Yes

Quick Beginnings for DB2
Clients

GC10-4242

No

Quick Beginnings for DB2
Servers

GC10-4246

Yes

Spatial Extender and Geodetic
SC18-9749
Data Management Feature User’s
Guide and Reference

Yes

SQL Guide

SC10-4248

Yes

SQL Reference, Volume 1

SC10-4249

Yes

SQL Reference, Volume 2

SC10-4250

Yes

System Monitor Guide and
Reference

SC10-4251

Yes

Troubleshooting Guide

GC10-4240

No

Visual Explain Tutorial

SC10-4319

No

What’s New

SC10-4253

Yes

XML Extender Administration
and Programming

SC18-9750

Yes

XML Guide

SC10-4254

Yes

XQuery Reference

SC18-9796

Yes

Table 15. DB2 Connect-specific technical information
Name

Form Number

Available in print

DB2 Connect User’s Guide

SC10-4229

Yes

Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information

129
Table 15. DB2 Connect-specific technical information (continued)
Name

Form Number

Available in print

Quick Beginnings for DB2
Connect Personal Edition

GC10-4244

Yes

Quick Beginnings for DB2
Connect Servers

GC10-4243

Yes

Table 16. WebSphere® Information Integration technical information
Name

Form Number

Available in print

WebSphere Information
SC19-1020
Integration: Administration Guide
for Federated Systems

Yes

WebSphere Information
Integration: ASNCLP Program
Reference for Replication and
Event Publishing

SC19-1018

Yes

WebSphere Information
Integration: Configuration Guide
for Federated Data Sources

SC19-1034

No

WebSphere Information
Integration: SQL Replication
Guide and Reference

SC19-1030

Yes

Note: The DB2 Release Notes provide additional information specific to your
product’s release and fix pack level. For more information, see the related
links.
Related concepts:
v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127
v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes
Related tasks:
v “Ordering printed DB2 books” on page 130

Ordering printed DB2 books
If you require printed DB2 books, you can buy them online in many but not all
countries or regions. You can always order printed DB2 books from your local IBM
representative. Keep in mind that some softcopy books on the DB2 PDF
Documentation CD are unavailable in print. For example, neither volume of the DB2
Message Reference is available as a printed book.
Printed versions of many of the DB2 books available on the DB2 PDF
Documentation CD can be ordered for a fee from IBM. Depending on where you
are placing your order from, you may be able to order books online, from the IBM
Publications Center. If online ordering is not available in your country or region,
you can always order printed DB2 books from your local IBM representative. Note
that not all books on the DB2 PDF Documentation CD are available in print.

130

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Note: The most up-to-date and complete DB2 documentation is maintained in the
DB2 Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/
db2help/.
Procedure:
To order printed DB2 books:
v To find out whether you can order printed DB2 books online in your country or
region, check the IBM Publications Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/
publications/order. You must select a country, region, or language to access
publication ordering information and then follow the ordering instructions for
your location.
v To order printed DB2 books from your local IBM representative:
– Locate the contact information for your local representative from one of the
following Web sites:
- The IBM directory of world wide contacts at www.ibm.com/planetwide
- The IBM Publications Web site at http://www.ibm.com/shop/
publications/order. You will need to select your country, region, or
language to the access appropriate publications home page for your
location. From this page, follow the ″About this site″ link.
– When you call, specify that you want to order a DB2 publication.
– Provide your representative with the titles and form numbers of the books
that you want to order.
Related concepts:
v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127
Related reference:
v “DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format” on page 128

Displaying SQL state help from the command line processor
DB2 returns an SQLSTATE value for conditions that could be the result of an SQL
statement. SQLSTATE help explains the meanings of SQL states and SQL state class
codes.
Procedure:
To invoke SQL state help, open the command line processor and enter:
? sqlstate or ? class code

where sqlstate represents a valid five-digit SQL state and class code represents the
first two digits of the SQL state.
For example, ? 08003 displays help for the 08003 SQL state, and ? 08 displays help
for the 08 class code.
Related tasks:
v “Invoking command help from the command line processor” in Command
Reference
v “Invoking message help from the command line processor” in Command
Reference
Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information

131
Accessing different versions of the DB2 Information Center
For DB2 Version 9 topics, the DB2 Information Center URL is http://
publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/.
For DB2 Version 8 topics, go to the Version 8 Information Center URL at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v8/.
Related tasks:
v “Setting up access to DB2 contextual help and documentation” in Administration
Guide: Implementation

Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information
Center
The DB2 Information Center attempts to display topics in the language specified in
your browser preferences. If a topic has not been translated into your preferred
language, the DB2 Information Center displays the topic in English.
Procedure:
To display topics in your preferred language in the Internet Explorer browser:
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools —> Internet Options —> Languages...
button. The Language Preferences window opens.
2. Ensure your preferred language is specified as the first entry in the list of
languages.
v To add a new language to the list, click the Add... button.
Note: Adding a language does not guarantee that the computer has the fonts
required to display the topics in the preferred language.
v To move a language to the top of the list, select the language and click the
Move Up button until the language is first in the list of languages.
3. Clear the browser cache and then refresh the page to display the DB2
Information Center in your preferred language.
To display topics in your preferred language in a Firefox or Mozilla browser:
1. Select the Tools —> Options —> Languages button. The Languages panel is
displayed in the Preferences window.
2. Ensure your preferred language is specified as the first entry in the list of
languages.
v To add a new language to the list, click the Add... button to select a language
from the Add Languages window.
v To move a language to the top of the list, select the language and click the
Move Up button until the language is first in the list of languages.
3. Clear the browser cache and then refresh the page to display the DB2
Information Center in your preferred language.
On some browser and operating system combinations, you might have to also
change the regional settings of your operating system to the locale and language of
your choice.

132

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Related concepts:
v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127

Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or
intranet server
If you have a locally-installed DB2 Information Center, updated topics can be
available for download. The 'Last updated' value found at the bottom of most
topics indicates the current level for that topic.
To determine if there is an update available for the entire DB2 Information Center,
look for the 'Last updated' value on the Information Center home page. Compare
the value in your locally installed home page to the date of the most recent
downloadable update at http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support/
icupdate.html. You can then update your locally-installed Information Center if a
more recent downloadable update is available.
Updating your locally-installed DB2 Information Center requires that you:
1. Stop the DB2 Information Center on your computer, and restart the Information
Center in stand-alone mode. Running the Information Center in stand-alone
mode prevents other users on your network from accessing the Information
Center, and allows you to download and apply updates.
2. Use the Update feature to determine if update packages are available from
IBM.
Note: Updates are also available on CD. For details on how to configure your
Information Center to install updates from CD, see the related links.
If update packages are available, use the Update feature to download the
packages. (The Update feature is only available in stand-alone mode.)
3. Stop the stand-alone Information Center, and restart the DB2 Information
Center service on your computer.
Procedure:
To update the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet
server:
1. Stop the DB2 Information Center service.
v On Windows, click Start → Control Panel → Administrative Tools → Services.
Then right-click on DB2 Information Center service and select Stop.
v On Linux, enter the following command:
/etc/init.d/db2icdv9 stop

2. Start the Information Center in stand-alone mode.
v On Windows:
a. Open a command window.
b. Navigate to the path where the Information Center is installed. By
default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the C:Program
FilesIBMDB2 Information CenterVersion 9 directory.
c. Run the help_start.bat file using the fully qualified path for the DB2
Information Center:
<DB2 Information Center dir>docbinhelp_start.bat

v On Linux:
Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information

133
a. Navigate to the path where the Information Center is installed. By
default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the /opt/ibm/db2ic/V9
directory.
b. Run the help_start script using the fully qualified path for the DB2
Information Center:
<DB2 Information Center dir>/doc/bin/help_start

The systems default Web browser launches to display the stand-alone
Information Center.
3. Click the Update button ( ). On the right hand panel of the Information
Center, click Find Updates. A list of updates for existing documentation
displays.
4. To initiate the download process, check the selections you want to download,
then click Install Updates.
5. After the download and installation process has completed, click Finish.
6. Stop the stand-alone Information Center.
v On Windows, run the help_end.bat file using the fully qualified path for the
DB2 Information Center:
<DB2 Information Center dir>docbinhelp_end.bat

Note: The help_end batch file contains the commands required to safely
terminate the processes that were started with the help_start batch file.
Do not use Ctrl-C or any other method to terminate help_start.bat.
v On Linux, run the help_end script using the fully qualified path for the DB2
Information Center:
<DB2 Information Center dir>/doc/bin/help_end

Note: The help_end script contains the commands required to safely
terminate the processes that were started with the help_start script. Do
not use any other method to terminate the help_start script.
7. Restart the DB2 Information Center service.
v On Windows, click Start → Control Panel → Administrative Tools → Services.
Then right-click on DB2 Information Center service and select Start.
v On Linux, enter the following command:
/etc/init.d/db2icdv9 start

The updated DB2 Information Center displays the new and updated topics.
Related concepts:
v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119
Related tasks:
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on
page 122
v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)”
on page 124

134

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
DB2 tutorials
The DB2 tutorials help you learn about various aspects of DB2 products. Lessons
provide step-by-step instructions.
Before you begin:
You can view the XHTML version of the tutorial from the Information Center at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2help/.
Some lessons use sample data or code. See the tutorial for a description of any
prerequisites for its specific tasks.
DB2 tutorials:
To view the tutorial, click on the title.
Native XML data store
Set up a DB2 database to store XML data and to perform basic operations
with the native XML data store.
Visual Explain Tutorial
Analyze, optimize, and tune SQL statements for better performance using
Visual Explain.
Related concepts:
v “Visual Explain overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation

DB2 troubleshooting information
A wide variety of troubleshooting and problem determination information is
available to assist you in using DB2 products.
DB2 documentation
Troubleshooting information can be found in the DB2 Troubleshooting
Guide or the Support and Troubleshooting section of the DB2 Information
Center. There you will find information on how to isolate and identify
problems using DB2 diagnostic tools and utilities, solutions to some of the
most common problems, and other advice on how to solve problems you
might encounter with your DB2 products.
DB2 Technical Support Web site
Refer to the DB2 Technical Support Web site if you are experiencing
problems and want help finding possible causes and solutions. The
Technical Support site has links to the latest DB2 publications, TechNotes,
Authorized Program Analysis Reports (APARs or bug fixes), fix packs, and
other resources. You can search through this knowledge base to find
possible solutions to your problems.
Access the DB2 Technical Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/
software/data/db2/udb/support.html
Related concepts:
v “Introduction to problem determination” in Troubleshooting Guide
v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127

Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information

135
Terms and Conditions
Permissions for the use of these publications is granted subject to the following
terms and conditions.
Personal use: You may reproduce these Publications for your personal, non
commercial use provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not
distribute, display or make derivative work of these Publications, or any portion
thereof, without the express consent of IBM.
Commercial use: You may reproduce, distribute and display these Publications
solely within your enterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved.
You may not make derivative works of these Publications, or reproduce, distribute
or display these Publications or any portion thereof outside your enterprise,
without the express consent of IBM.
Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or
rights are granted, either express or implied, to the Publications or any
information, data, software or other intellectual property contained therein.
IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its
discretion, the use of the Publications is detrimental to its interest or, as
determined by IBM, the above instructions are not being properly followed.
You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full
compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including all United States
export laws and regulations.
IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE
PUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED ″AS-IS″ AND WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

136

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix F. Notices
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
all countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country/region or send inquiries, in
writing, to:
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country/region where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

137
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information that has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Canada Limited
Office of the Lab Director
8200 Warden Avenue
Markham, Ontario
L6G 1C7
CANADA
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement,
IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement
between us.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level
systems, and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements, or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility, or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change or
withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information may contain examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious, and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual
business enterprise is entirely coincidental.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information may contain sample application programs, in source language,
which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may
copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment
to IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing
application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the
operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples
have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot
guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs.
Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work must
include a copyright notice as follows:

138

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
© (your company name) (year). Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp.
Sample Programs. © Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_. All rights
reserved.

Trademarks
Company, product, or service names identified in the documents of the DB2
Version 9 documentation library may be trademarks or service marks of
International Business Machines Corporation or other companies. Information on
the trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both is
located at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies
and have been used in at least one of the documents in the DB2 documentation
library:
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
Intel, Itanium, Pentium, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.

Appendix F. Notices

139
140

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Appendix G. First Steps
First Steps interface
First Steps is a DB2 setup tool which introduces you to basic database maintenance
tasks, application development, and technical resources available for your DB2
products.
First Steps has been redesigned to be more like a portal, where you can find
information from a wide range of sources to perform tasks. The information in
First Steps is tailored by DB2 products. For example, if you have installed a DB2
database system, you can perform any of the following tasks with the assistance of
First Steps:
v Create the sample database or your own database.
v Basic administration tasks, such as back up, load data, and set up access.
v Database administration tasks, such as access configuration, database
partitioning, and migration.
v Create an application using any of the supported development environments.
v Review technical resources that provide more in-depth knowledge.
v Check for product updates.
Database administration
The instructions for database administration tasks reference mostly the
Command Line Processor (CLP) interface and the Control Center interface
to execute each task. The CLP is a text-based interface that is used to
execute DB2 commands, database utilities, and SQL statements. The
Control Center is a graphic interface that is used to manage and administer
database systems, databases, and database objects, and to open other
centers and tools. The CLP is delivered with the DB2 client. The Control
Center is delivered with the DB2 client for 32-bit Linux (x86-32), 64–bit
Linux (x86-64), and Windows (except on IPF).
Application development
First Steps includes information about development tools, programming
languages, and sample files available for DB2 application development. It
introduces DB2 database system programming features such as stored
procedures and user-defined functions that can extend your application
and use the DB2 server system resources. It also includes references to
assist you in implementing Web services and migrating application to DB2
database systems.
Technical resources
There are many technical resources available from DB2 Information
Management software Web sites, user communities, and IBM programs.
This interface highlights the most relevant of these technical resources to
assist you with database administration, application development, and
education.
Running First Steps
You can manually launch First Steps using the db2fs command:
$ db2fs
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

141
On Linux and UNIX operating systems
The db2fs command is located in the INSTHOME/sqllib/bin
directory, where INSTHOME is the instance home directory. You need
sysadm authority to run this command.
On Windows operating system
The db2fs command is located in the DB2DIRbin directory, where
DB2DIR is set to the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9
installation.
Alternatively, you can launch First Steps on Windows operating system
from the Start menu by selecting Programs —> IBM DB2 —> DB2 copy
name —> Set Up Tools —> First Steps or from the DB2 product folder on
the desktop.
To make full use of the resources provided by First Steps, you must have an
internet connection and access to the online DB2 Information Center.
Related concepts:
v “Access to the DB2 Information Center” in Administration Guide: Planning
v “Control Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation
v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120
Related tasks:
v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and
Windows)” on page 78
Related reference:
v “Command line processor features” in Command Reference
v “db2fs - First steps command” in Command Reference

Deleting a Firefox browser profile
If you use Firefox as your Web browser, a browser profile is created in the
following scenarios:
DB2 Setup Launchpad
If you install your DB2 product using the setup wizard, the DB2 Setup
Launchpad runs in a browser and automatically creates a Firefox profile
named DB2_LP.
DB2 First Steps
When you run DB2 First Steps, you are prompted to create a browser
profile. If you agree, a Firefox profile named DB2_FIRSTSTEPS is created.
If you use either of these profiles to view other Web pages that have javascript, the
javascript will run automatically without warnings. After you have run the DB2
Setup wizard or DB2 First Steps, you might want to delete the browser profile to
prevent javascript from running automatically when visiting other Web pages with
these profiles.
Procedure:
To delete a Firefox browser profile:
1. If any Firefox browsers are open, close them now.

142

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
2. Open the Firefox Profile Manager:
On Windows
a. Open the Windows Start menu and select Run...
b. Type firefox.exe -profilemanager and click OK. The Firefox Choose User Profile dialog opens.
On Linux
a.
b.
c.

and UNIX
Open a command prompt
Switch to the Firefox directory
Start Firefox with the -profilemanager switch. For example:
./firefox -profilemanager

3. Select the DB2_LP or DB2_FIRSTSTEPS profile.
4. Click Delete Profile...
5. Click Exit to close the Firefox - Choose User Profile dialog.
For further information on Firefox profiles, visit http://www.mozilla.org/support/
firefox/profile
Related concepts:
v “First Steps interface” on page 141
Related tasks:
v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and
Windows)” on page 78

Appendix G. First Steps

143
144

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Index
A
AIX
creating
DB2 home file systems, for a
partitioned database system 49
required users, for a partitioned
DB2 server installation 57
distributing commands to ESE
workstations 45
hardware prerequisites 21
installation prerequisites 21
installing
DB2 servers 7
mounting the CD-ROM 115
operating system prerequisites 21
updating environment settings 43
verifying
NFS is running 47

C
CD-ROM
mounting
AIX 115
HP-UX 116
Linux 116
Solaris Operating
Environment 117
changing
DB2 product editions
Linux and UNIX 84
Windows 86
Windows default language
setting 103
client configurations
non-supported 5
supported 5
code pages
supported 105
command line processor (CLP)
verifying the installation 77
commands
db2_deinstall 113
db2fs 141
db2idrop 112
db2ilist 112
db2nchg 15
db2osconf 41
db2sampl 77
db2secv82 89
db2setup 106
db2start 20
db2stop 112
doce_deinstall 113
enabling remote execution 98
force application 112
communications
addresses 30
fast communication manager 30

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

configuration parameters
fcm_num_buffers 21
contact lists
setting up 88
contacting IBM 147
copying
DB2 CD contents 46
creating
rhosts file 98
sample databases 78

D
daemon
configuration file
starting for information
center 122
database partition servers
enabling communications (UNIX) 97
installing
response files 70
database partitioning feature
enabling communications (UNIX) 97
databases
paritioned environment 68
DB2
code pages 105
installation methods 3
installing
applying fix packs 87
UNIX 3
verifying the installation 77
Windows 3
interface languages 105
locales 105
partitioned installation
updating AIX environment
settings 43
removing
UNIX 110
stopping instances
UNIX 112
stopping the Administration Server
UNIX 111
DB2 Administration Server (DAS)
removing 111
stopping 111
DB2 CD-ROM
copying to your computer 46
DB2 clients
installation prerequisites (AIX) 21
installation prerequisites (HP-UX) 23
installation prerequisites (Linux) 24
installation prerequisites (Solaris
Operating Environment) 27
installation prerequisites
(Windows) 10
DB2 Connect
installation methods 3
installing
UNIX 3

DB2 Connect (continued)
installing (continued)
Windows 3
DB2 database
for Linux on zSeries
installing 33
removing 109
reserved ports 39
uninstalling 109
user accounts (Windows) 12
DB2 Enterprise Server Edition
installing
Windows 15
DB2 groups
UNIX 31
DB2 home file system
partitioned database system
AIX 49
HP-UX 51
DB2 Information Center
features 120
installing 119, 122, 124
supported browsers 120
updating 133
versions 132
viewing in different languages 132
DB2 installation
verifying
using First Steps 78
DB2 instances
removing 112
stopping 112
DB2 license key
registering 81
using the License Center 82
DB2 packaging information 3
DB2 product editions
changing 84, 86
DB2 product information 3
DB2 product licenses
applying 73
DB2 products
installing manually
listing products 29
removing
listing products 29
UNIX 113
DB2 servers
creating
group IDs 37
user IDs 37
hardware prerequisites 23
installation prerequisites (AIX) 21
installation prerequisites (HP-UX) 23
installation prerequisites (Linux) 24
installation prerequisites (Solaris
Operating Environment) 27
installation prerequisites
(Windows) 10
installing
Windows 6

145
DB2 servers (continued)
installing on AIX 7
installing on Windows 63
partitioned
preparing the Windows
environment 15
DB2 services (Windows) 11
DB2 Setup wizard
installing DB2 servers
UNIX 65
language identifiers 105
DB2 system administrator group 20
DB2 users
UNIX 31
DB2 Version 9
co-existence with DB2 UDB Version
8 71
DB2 version co-existence
DB2 UDB Version 8 71
DB2 Version 9 71
db2_deinstall 113
DB2ADMNS
user groups 89
db2fcms / db2fcmr daemons
description 30
db2iupt command
upgrading your 32-bit DB2
instances 71
db2licm command
compliance report 83
managing licenses 81
registering licenses 81
db2nodes.cfg 95
specifying the netname field 15
db2nodes.cfg file 90
db2osconf command 41
db2setup
displaying
national languages 106
language setting 106
DB2USERS
user groups 89
Default DB2 Selection wizard 72
default language setting
Windows 103
Deleting
Firefox browser profile 142
directory schema
extending
on Windows 2000 and Windows
.NET 35
disk requirements
UNIX 9
Windows 9
doce_deinstall 113
documentation 127, 128
Information Center features 120
Information Center installation 119
terms and conditions of use 136
dropping
instances 112

E
enabling
Control Center administration
UNIX 99

146

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

enabling communications
database partitioning feature
(UNIX) 97
ESE workstations 45

F
Fast Communications Manager (FCM)
enabling communications between
database partition servers 97
message buffers 21
overview 21
port numbers 97
port range 39
Windows 21
FCM
Fast Communications Manager 21
fcm_num_buffers configuration
parameter 21
fenced user
definition 37
file sets
db2fcms / db2fcmr daemons 30
description 30
file systems
creating for a partitioned DB2 server
Linux 53
Solaris Operating Environment 55
Firefox
Deleting a browser profile 142
First Steps
Deleting a Firefox profile 142
interface 141
verifying
DB2 installation 78
fix pack
applying 87

G
group IDs
creating 37

H
hardware prerequisites
AIX 21
HP-UX 23
Linux 24
Solaris Operating Environment 27
harware prerequisites
Windows 10
help
displaying 132
for SQL statements 131
HP-UX
creating
DB2 home file system, for a
partitioned database system 51
required users, for a partitioned
DB2 installation 58
hardware prerequisites 23
installation prerequisites 23
kernel configuration parameters 41
modifying
kernel parameters 40

HP-UX (continued)
mounting the CD 116
operating system prerequisites
verifying
NFS is running 47

23

I
Information Center
features 120
installing 119, 122, 124
supported browsers 120
updating 133
versions 132
viewing in different languages 132
installation
Information Center 119, 122, 124
methods
UNIX 3
Windows 3
multiple CDs 38
installation prerequisites
AIX 21
Linux 24
Solaris Operating Environment 27
Windows 10
installing
database partition servers
response files 70
DB2 database user accounts
(Windows) 12
DB2 for Linux on S/390 33
hardware prerequisites (Linux) 24
hardware prerequisites (Solaris
Operating Environment) 27
hardware prerequisites
(Windows) 10
Java prerequisites (AIX) 21
Java requirements 10
manually
listing products 29
operating system prerequisites
(Linux) 24
operating system prerequisites (Solaris
Operating Environment) 27
operating system prerequisites
(Windows) 10
prerequisites (AIX) 21
prerequisites (HP-UX) 23
prerequisites (Linux) 24
prerequisites (Solaris Operating
Environment) 27
prerequisites (Windows) 10
Windows elevated privileges 18
instances
dropping 112
removing 112
stopping 112
interface languages 105
changing
UNIX 104
Windows 103
J
Java prerequisites
installing DB2 (HP-UX)

23

K
kernel configuration parameters
HP-UX 41
modifying (HP-UX) 40
modifying (Linux) 41
modifying (Solaris Operating
Environment) 43
kernel parameters
db2osconf (HP-UX) 41
HP-UX 41
modifying (HP-UX) 40
modifying (Linux) 41
modifying (Solaris Operating
Environment) 43

L
LANG environment variable
setting 104, 106
language identifiers
DB2 Setup wizard 105
Licence Center
compliance report 83
License Center
managing licenses 81
registering licenses
DB2 license key 82
upgrading licenses 84
licenses
applying 73
compliance report 83
registering 81, 82
upgrading 84
licensing information 81
checking compliance 83
Linux
creating
file system for partitioned DB2
servers 53
required users for partitioned DB2
servers 60
hardware prerequisites 24
installation requirements 24
installing DB2 database
on zSeries 33
modifying
kernel parameters 41
mounting the CD-ROM 116
operating system prerequisites 24
verifying
NFS is running 47
locales
supported 105

M
maintenance
password 89
memory requirements
UNIX 9

memory requirements (continued)
Windows 9
message buffers
Fast Communications Manager
.(FCM) 21
modifying
kernel parameters (HP-UX) 40
kernel parameters (Linux) 41
kernel parameters (Solaris Operating
Environment) 43
mounting
CD-ROM
AIX 115
HP-UX 116
Linux 116
Solaris Operating
Environment 117
multiple CDs
installation 38

port numbers
range availability
Windows 39
port range
availability
UNIX 48
port range availability 39
UNIX 97
port ranges
default (UNIX) 97
printed books
ordering 130
problem determination
online information 135
tutorials 135

R

national languages
displaying db2setup 106
Network File System (NFS)
verifying operation 47
network information service (NIS),
installation considerations 32
NFS (Network File System)
verifying operation 47
NIS (network information service),
installation considerations 32
node configuration file
updating (UNIX) 95
node configuration files
description 90
nodes
FCM daemon (UNIX) 30
notices 137
notification lists, setting up 88

registry
verifying access 77
remote
commands, enabling on UNIX 98
removing
DAS 111
DB2
UNIX 110
DB2 database
Windows 109
reserved ports
DB2 database 39
response file
multiple CDs 38
response files
installing
database partition servers 70
rhosts file
creating 98
updating 98
rules
password 89

O

S

operating system prerequisites
Linux 24
Solaris Operating Environment
Windows 10
operating systems prerequisites
AIX 21
HP-UX 23
ordering DB2 books 130

S/390
installing DB2 Database for Linux 33
sample databases
creating 78
DB2 database 78
warehousing 78
SDK levels for DB2 35
searching
DB2 documentation 120
security
NIS installation considerations 32
user groups 89
set-up
tool 141
setting
LANG environment variable 104, 106
setting up
contact lists 88
notification lists 88
Software Development Kit for Java
levels for DB2 database 35

N

27

P
paritioned database environment 68
partition database server
installing 80
verifying installation
Windows 80
partitioned database environments
server installation, verifying on
UNIX 79
password
maintenance 89
passwords
rules 89

Index

147
Solaris Operating Environment
creating
file systems, partitioned DB2
servers 55
required users, partitioned DB2
servers 61
hardware prerequisites 27
installation prerequisites 27
modifying
kernel parameters 43
mounting the CD-ROM 117
operating system prerequisites 27
verifying
NFS is running 47
SQL statements
displaying help 131
supported configurations
clients 5
SYSADM
Windows 20
SYSADM_GROUP configuration
parameter 20
system administrator group
DB2 database
Windows 20

T
terms and conditions
use of publications 136
troubleshooting
online information 135
tutorials 135
tutorials
troubleshooting and problem
determination 135
Visual Explain 135

U
uninstalling
DB2 database
Windows 109
UNIX
changing the DB2 interface
language 104
DB2 groups 31
DB2 users 31
default port ranges 97
enabling
Control Center administration 99
remote commands 98
installing
DB2 servers, using the DB2 Setup
wizard 65
removing
DB2 110
DB2 instances 112
DB2 products 113
listing products 29
updating the node configuration
file 95
verifying a partitioned database server
installation 79
updates
DB2 Information Center 133

148

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

updates (continued)
Information Center 133
updating
db2nodes.cfg (UNIX) 95
node configuration file 95
rhosts file 98
Upgrading 32-bit DB2 instances 71
Upgrading to 64-bit DB2 instances 71
user accounts
DB2 Administration Server
(Windows) 12
instance user (Windows) 12
required for installation
(Windows) 12
user groups
DB2ADMNS 89
DB2USERS 89
security 89
user IDs
creating 37
user privileges, Windows 17
users
creating for a partitioned DB2 server
AIX 57
HP-UX 58
Linux 60
Solaris Operating Environment 61

V
verifying
DB2 installation
using First Steps
verifying access
registry 77
verifying port range
availability
UNIX 48
Windows 39
Visual Explain
tutorial 135

78

W
Windows
changing default language
setting 103
DB2 system administrator group 20
DB2 user accounts 12
extending the directory schema
Windows 2000 and Windows
Server 2003 35
Windows Server 2003 35
Fast Communications Manager
(FCM) 21
granting user rights 17
hardware prerequisites 10
installation
elevated privileges 18
installation prerequisites 10
installing
DB2 server 6
DB2 servers with the DB2 Setup
wizard 63
operating system prerequisites 10
removing DB2 database 109

Windows (continued)
verifying
partition database server
installation 80
Windows elevated privileges
installing DB2 products 18
Windows services 11
wizards
Default DB2 Selection 72

Z
zSeries
installing DB2 Database for Linux

33
Contacting IBM
To contact IBM in your country or region, check the IBM Directory of Worldwide
Contacts at http://www.ibm.com/planetwide
To learn more about DB2 products, go to
http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006

149
150

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
Quick beginning for db2 server
Part Number: CT3ZLNA

GC10-4246-00

(1P) P/N: CT3ZLNA

Printed in Ireland
IBM DB2

DB2 Version 9

Spine information:

Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers

More Related Content

PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect installing and config...
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows text search guide
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows upgrading to db2 version 10.5
PDF
DB2 Upgrade instructions
PDF
W2 k williamstalling
DOC
Microsoft Windows Version 2
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows getting started with database app...
PDF
Ibm tivoli storage manager v6.1 server upgrade guide
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect installing and config...
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows text search guide
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows upgrading to db2 version 10.5
DB2 Upgrade instructions
W2 k williamstalling
Microsoft Windows Version 2
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows getting started with database app...
Ibm tivoli storage manager v6.1 server upgrade guide

What's hot (16)

PPT
Windows 3.0 And 3.1
PPT
Windows 2.0
PPT
Windows 2000 Presentation
PDF
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Early Adopter Guide
PDF
Ilf2012
PDF
Article may11 bsdmag
PPT
101 2.1 design hard disk layout v2
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect installing and config...
DOC
Lecture 1
PPTX
Windows 2000
PDF
IBM Flex System Storage Expansion Node
PPTX
presentation on windows os
PDF
The Unofficial VCAP / VCP VMware Study Guide
PPTX
Windows 95 Powepoint Presentation
PPT
2.1 design hard disk layout v2
PDF
Wd share space_release_notes_2_2_93_final
Windows 3.0 And 3.1
Windows 2.0
Windows 2000 Presentation
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Early Adopter Guide
Ilf2012
Article may11 bsdmag
101 2.1 design hard disk layout v2
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect installing and config...
Lecture 1
Windows 2000
IBM Flex System Storage Expansion Node
presentation on windows os
The Unofficial VCAP / VCP VMware Study Guide
Windows 95 Powepoint Presentation
2.1 design hard disk layout v2
Wd share space_release_notes_2_2_93_final
Ad

Similar to Quick beginning for db2 server (20)

PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect user's guide
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows getting started with db2 installa...
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows installing ibm data server clients
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing embedded sql applications
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows what's new for db2 version 10.5
PDF
Ibm tivoli directory server installation and configuration guide - sc272747
PDF
PDF
Client install
PDF
Installation guide (web sphereapplication server,db2,tivoli directory
PDF
Db2 version 9 for linux, unix, and windows
PDF
Db2 deployment guide
PDF
PDF
39031282 cc-ms-install
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing ado.net and ole db app...
PDF
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing perl, php, python, and...
PDF
Ibm tivoli storage manager for unix and linux backup archive client installat...
PDF
Dell IDRAC6 147859.pdf
PDF
Fasg02 mr
PDF
Ibm tivoli storage manager for enterprise resource planning data protection f...
PDF
Db2exc guide 952_mac_x86_64
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows db2 connect user's guide
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows getting started with db2 installa...
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows installing ibm data server clients
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing embedded sql applications
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows what's new for db2 version 10.5
Ibm tivoli directory server installation and configuration guide - sc272747
Client install
Installation guide (web sphereapplication server,db2,tivoli directory
Db2 version 9 for linux, unix, and windows
Db2 deployment guide
39031282 cc-ms-install
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing ado.net and ole db app...
Ibm db2 10.5 for linux, unix, and windows developing perl, php, python, and...
Ibm tivoli storage manager for unix and linux backup archive client installat...
Dell IDRAC6 147859.pdf
Fasg02 mr
Ibm tivoli storage manager for enterprise resource planning data protection f...
Db2exc guide 952_mac_x86_64
Ad

More from The Vision and Insight Corner (20)

PDF
Digital Governance: Strategi Tata Kelola Pemerintahan yang Efektif dan Transp...
PDF
Buku 130 Hari Kerja Pemerintahan Prabowo
PDF
Menghitung Kerugian Negara Berbasis Indikator Makro.pdf
PDF
Percepatan Penggunaan Produk DalamNegeri (P3DN) Melalui Kesinergian Pengawas...
DOCX
KERTASKERJA_AUDITKINERJA_P3DN V1.0.docx
PDF
Kebijakan Strategi Penggunaan Produk Dalam Negeri
PDF
Rancangan Indikator Kinerja Program P3DN dan Pengawasan Kolaboratifnya
PPTX
MANAJEMEN KINERJA: MENGGUNAKAN SISTEM PENGENDALIAN SECARA STRATEGIS SEBAGAI ‘...
PDF
Metamorfosis Menuju Auditor Millenial Handal
PDF
Tantangan Internal Auditor dalam Pandemi COVID-19: Bagaimana BPKP Melakukan T...
PDF
AKSELERASI PENERAPAN MR & PIBR DI KEMENTERIAN/LEMBAGA
PDF
6 Things Public Servants Need During COVID-19
PDF
The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Tax System
PDF
the Indonesian President Accountability Support Systems (PASS)
PDF
3. tayangan penyerahan balai kartini (LAKIP Pemda)
PDF
2. laporan deputi pada acara penyerahan (LAKIP Pemda)
PDF
1. penyerahan lhe akip kabupaten
PPTX
Paparan Menteri PAN dan RB: REFORMASI BIROKRASI Mewujudkan BIROKRASI BERSIH,...
PDF
PDF
Getting started with_data_studio_for_db2
Digital Governance: Strategi Tata Kelola Pemerintahan yang Efektif dan Transp...
Buku 130 Hari Kerja Pemerintahan Prabowo
Menghitung Kerugian Negara Berbasis Indikator Makro.pdf
Percepatan Penggunaan Produk DalamNegeri (P3DN) Melalui Kesinergian Pengawas...
KERTASKERJA_AUDITKINERJA_P3DN V1.0.docx
Kebijakan Strategi Penggunaan Produk Dalam Negeri
Rancangan Indikator Kinerja Program P3DN dan Pengawasan Kolaboratifnya
MANAJEMEN KINERJA: MENGGUNAKAN SISTEM PENGENDALIAN SECARA STRATEGIS SEBAGAI ‘...
Metamorfosis Menuju Auditor Millenial Handal
Tantangan Internal Auditor dalam Pandemi COVID-19: Bagaimana BPKP Melakukan T...
AKSELERASI PENERAPAN MR & PIBR DI KEMENTERIAN/LEMBAGA
6 Things Public Servants Need During COVID-19
The Impact of Industry 4.0 on Tax System
the Indonesian President Accountability Support Systems (PASS)
3. tayangan penyerahan balai kartini (LAKIP Pemda)
2. laporan deputi pada acara penyerahan (LAKIP Pemda)
1. penyerahan lhe akip kabupaten
Paparan Menteri PAN dan RB: REFORMASI BIROKRASI Mewujudkan BIROKRASI BERSIH,...
Getting started with_data_studio_for_db2

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PPTX
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
PDF
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
PDF
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
PDF
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PDF
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
PPTX
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PPTX
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PDF
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PPT
Teaching material agriculture food technology
PDF
KodekX | Application Modernization Development
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
Agricultural_Statistics_at_a_Glance_2022_0.pdf
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Approach and Philosophy of On baking technology
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
Teaching material agriculture food technology
KodekX | Application Modernization Development
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx

Quick beginning for db2 server

  • 1. DB2 ® DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers GC10-4246-00
  • 3. DB2 ® DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers GC10-4246-00
  • 4. Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Notices. Edition Notice This document contains proprietary information of IBM. It is provided under a license agreement and is protected by copyright law. The information contained in this publication does not include any product warranties, and any statements provided in this manual should not be interpreted as such. You can order IBM publications online or through your local IBM representative. v To order publications online, go to the IBM Publications Center at www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order v To find your local IBM representative, go to the IBM Directory of Worldwide Contacts at www.ibm.com/ planetwide To order DB2 publications from DB2 Marketing and Sales in the United States or Canada, call 1-800-IBM-4YOU (426-4968). When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. © Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993, 2006. All rights reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
  • 5. Contents Who should read this book . . . . . . v Part 1. Installing DB2 servers . . . . 1 Chapter 1. Installation overview . . . . 3 DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information . DB2 installation methods . . . . . . . . . . Supported combinations of client and server versions An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 5 6 7 Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites . . . 9 Disk and memory requirements . . . . . . . . 9 DB2 server installation (Windows) . . . . . . . 10 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DB2 services running on your system (Windows) 11 Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows) . . . . . . . . 12 Preparing the environment for a partitioned DB2 server (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Granting user rights (Windows) . . . . . . 17 Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to installing a DB2 product (Windows) . . . . . 18 DB2 system administrator group considerations (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Fast communications manager (Windows) . . . 21 DB2 server installation (Linux and UNIX) . . . . 21 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating System) . . . . . . 27 Listing DB2 products installed on your system (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX) 30 DB2 users and groups (Linux and UNIX) . . . 31 Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries . . 33 Chapter 3. Before you install . . . . . 35 Extending the directory schema (Windows) . . . IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating group and user IDs for a DB2 database installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple CD installation (Linux and UNIX) . . . © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 . 35 . 35 . 37 . 38 Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . Kernel parameters (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX) . . . Recommended kernel configuration parameters (HP-UX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying kernel parameters (Linux) . . . . Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional partitioned database environment preinstallation tasks (Linux and UNIX) . . . . Updating environment settings for a partitioned DB2 installation (AIX) . . . . . . . . . Setting up a working collective to distribute commands to ESE workstations (AIX) . . . Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX) Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . Creating file system for a partitioned database environment (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . Creating required users (Linux and UNIX) . . . 39 . 40 . 40 . 41 . 41 . 43 . 43 . 43 . 45 . 46 47 . 48 . 49 . 57 Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Installing DB2 servers (Windows) . . . . . . . Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX) . . . . Setting up a partitioned database environment . . Installing database partition servers on participating computers using a response file (Linux and UNIX) . Upgrading your 32-bit DB2 instances to 64-bit instances (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2 UDB Version 8 (Windows) . . . . . . . . . Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows) Applying DB2 product licenses . . . . . . . . Working with existing DB2 copies . . . . . . . 63 65 68 70 71 71 72 73 73 Part 2. After DB2 server installation 75 Chapter 5. After you install . . . . . . 77 Verifying the installation . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the installation using the command line processor (CLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying access to the registry on the instance-owning computer (Windows) . . . . Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and Windows) . . . . . . Verifying a partitioned database server installation (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . Verifying a partitioned database environment installation (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . DB2 product licensing . . . . . . . . . . . 77 77 77 78 79 80 81 iii
  • 6. DB2 product license files . . . . . . . . . Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command . . . . . . . . Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center . . . . . . . . . Checking DB2 license compliance . . . . . . Upgrading a Try and Buy license . . . . . . Changing DB2 product editions . . . . . . . Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing DB2 product editions (Windows) . . . Applying fix packs . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up notification and contact lists . . . . . Password rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding your user ID to the DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS user groups (Windows) . . . . . . DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg . . . . Updating the node configuration file (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling communications between database partition servers (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . Enabling the execution of remote commands (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Control Center administration (Linux) . . 81 81 82 83 84 84 84 86 87 88 89 89 90 97 98 99 Appendix A. Language support. . . . 103 103 . 104 . 105 . 105 . 106 Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Uninstalling DB2 products (Windows) . . . . . Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows) . . Uninstalling DB2 products (Linux and UNIX) . . Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) . . Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) . . Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX) . iv Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers Mounting the Mounting the Mounting the Mounting the Environment) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM . . . (AIX) . . . . . (HP-UX) . . . . (Linux) . . . . (Solaris Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 . 116 . 116 . . . 117 Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center . . . . . . . . . 119 DB2 Information Center installation options Features of the DB2 Information Center . Installing the DB2 Information Center using DB2 Setup wizard (Linux) . . . . . . DB2 Information Center daemon (Linux) Installing the DB2 Information Center using DB2 Setup wizard (Windows) . . . . . . . . . the . . . . the . . . 119 . 120 . 122 . 123 . 124 95 Part 3. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 101 Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows) Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and UNIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported DB2 interface languages . . . . . Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup wizard in another language . . . . . . . Displaying the db2setup command in your national language . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C. Mounting the DB2 product CD-ROM (Linux and UNIX) . . 115 109 109 110 110 Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Overview of the DB2 technical information . . . Documentation feedback . . . . . . . . DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format Ordering printed DB2 books . . . . . . . . Displaying SQL state help from the command line processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing different versions of the DB2 Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center . . . . . . . . . . Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server . . . . . . . DB2 tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . DB2 troubleshooting information . . . . . . . Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F. Notices Trademarks . . . . . 127 127 128 130 131 132 132 133 135 135 136 . . . . . . . . 137 . . . . . . . . . 139 Appendix G. First Steps . . . . . . . 141 First Steps interface . . . . . Deleting a Firefox browser profile . . . . . . . . . . . 141 . 142 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 111 Contacting IBM 111 112 112 113 . . . . . . . . . . 149
  • 7. Who should read this book This Quick Beginnings book is intended for users responsible for the following tasks: v Installing DB2 server products v Migrating DB2 server products v Setting up a DB2 server environment For information on installing and configuring DB2 clients, see the Quick Beginnings for DB2 clients book. For information on migrating a previous DB2 version, see the Migration Guide. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 v
  • 9. Part 1. Installing DB2 servers © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 1
  • 10. 2 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 11. Chapter 1. Installation overview DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information For information about DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information, see http://www-1.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?rs=73&uid=swg21219983. Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7 v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6 DB2 installation methods This topic provides information about DB2® installation methods. The following table shows the installation methods that are available by operating system. Table 1. Installation method by operating system. Installation method Windows® Linux™ or UNIX® DB2 Setup wizard Yes Yes db2_install script No Yes Response file installation Yes Yes Manual installation No Yes The following list describes DB2 installation methods. DB2 Setup wizard The DB2 Setup wizard is a GUI installer available on Linux, UNIX, and Windows operating systems. The DB2 Setup wizard provides an easy-to-use interface for installing DB2 products and for performing initial setup and configuration tasks. The DB2 Setup wizard can also be used to create instances and response files. The DB2 Setup wizard on Linux and UNIX requires an X server to display the GUI. db2_install script DB2 product installations are no longer operating system packages, and as a result, you can no longer use operating system commands for installation. Any existing scripts that you use to interface and query with DB2 installations will need to change. The db2_install script installs all components for the DB2 product you specify with the English interface support. You can select additional languages to support with the -L parameter. You cannot select or deselect components. The db2_install script allows more control over the setup process, in exchange for less control over the installation process, as it installs everything in the language(s) you specify. The DB2 Setup wizard allows you more control over the installation process by choosing exactly what gets installed using the custom installation option. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 3
  • 12. The db2_install script does not perform user and group creation, instance creation, or configuration. This method of installation might be preferred in cases where greater control over the setup process than the GUI installer provides is required. On Linux and UNIX operating systems, if you embed the DB2 installation image in your own application, it is possible for your application to receive installation progress information and CD location prompts from the installer in computer-readable form. Response file installation A response file is a text file that contains setup and configuration values. The file is read by the DB2 setup program and the installation is performed according to the values that have been specified. There are a number of ways to create a response file: v Using the response file generator (Windows) v Using the DB2 Setup wizard v Customizing the sample response files that are provided for each DB2 product Using the response file generator, you can create a response file that replicates an existing installation. For example, you might install a DB2 client, fully configure the client, then generate a response file to replicate the installation and configuration of the client to other computers. The response file generator is available only on Windows. The DB2 Setup wizard can create a response file based on the selections you make as you proceed through the DB2 Setup wizard. Your selections are recorded in a response file that you can save to a location on your system. If you select a partitioned database installation, two response files will be generated, one for the instance-owning computer and one for participating computers. You can export a client or server profile with the db2cfexp command to save your client or server configuration, and then easily import the profile using the db2cfimp command. A client or server profile exported with the db2cfexp command can also be imported during a silent installation using the CLIENT_IMPORT_PROFILE keyword. For your convenience, you can create a response file without performing an installation. This feature can be useful in an environment where a DBA does not have the authority required to perform an installation. The DBA can create a response file for the installation and provide it to the system administrator who installs the product on the DBA’s behalf. On Linux and UNIX, you need root authority to generate a response file. An alternative to using the response file generator or the DB2 Setup wizard to create a response file is to manually modify a sample response file. Sample response files are provided on the DB2 product CD. The sample response files provide details about all the valid keywords for each product. They also provide access to parameters that cannot be set using the DB2 Setup wizard. On Linux and UNIX operating systems, if you embed the DB2 installation image in your own application, it is possible for your application to receive installation progress information and CD location prompts from the installer in computer-readable form. Manual installation (Linux and UNIX only) This method is an advanced installation method that is not recommended 4 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 13. for most users. It requires the user to manually install payload files. A payload file is a compressed tarball that contains all of the files and metadata for an installable component. Related tasks: v “Embedding the DB2 installation image (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Installing a DB2 product manually” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Manually installing payload files (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Response file installation of DB2 overview (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Response file installation of DB2 overview (Windows)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement Related reference: v “db2_install - Install DB2 product command” in Command Reference v “db2cfexp - Connectivity configuration export tool command” in Command Reference v “db2cfimp - Connectivity configuration import tool command” in Command Reference v “db2rspgn - Response file generator command (Windows)” in Command Reference v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference Supported combinations of client and server versions This section describes which versions of a client can connect to which versions of a server. This includes support for earlier versions and support for accessing DB2 databases on midrange and mainframe servers. For the most up-to-date information, see http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html Combinations of DB2 UDB Version 8 and DB2 Version 9: DB2 UDB Version 8 is compatible with DB2 Version 9. That is, clients from either version can access a remote server of either version. Note the following restrictions: v There is a restriction when a DB2 client is located on the same system as a DB2 server, and they are different versions. In this case, local client-to-server connections using Interprocess Communication (IPC) are not supported. Instead, a connection can be established by treating the connection as a remote connection (called a loopback connection) using TCP/IP. Access to DB2 Version 9 servers from DB2 UDB Version 7 clients: Access from DB2 UDB Version 7 clients is supported but with the same restrictions as for accessing DB2 UDB Version 8 servers. Restrictions that apply to all DB2 UDB Version 7 clients include: v DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only SQL requests on a DB2 Version 9 server. There is no support for utility or API requests. Additional restrictions that apply to 32-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients include: Chapter 1. Installation overview 5
  • 14. v 32-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only connections to DB2 on Windows. There is no support for connecting to DB2 on other operating systems. To overcome this restriction, use a 32-bit DB2 Connect gateway. Additional restrictions that apply to 64-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients include: v 64-bit DB2 UDB Version 7 clients support only connections to DB2 on operating systems other than Windows. Combinations of DB2 Version 9 and DB2 products on midrange and mainframe platforms: DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows servers support access from the following DB2 clients on midrange and mainframe platforms: v DB2 for z/OS Version 7 and Version 8. v DB2 for iSeries Version 5. v DB2 for VM and VSE Version 7. DB2 Version 9 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows clients can access the following earlier versions of DB2 Connect: v DB2 Connect Version 8. DB2 Connect Personal Edition Version 9 can connect to the same DB2 server versions as can DB2 Version 9 clients or servers. Related concepts: v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes v “Client-to-server communications configuration overview” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “DB2 client setup overview” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “Types of clients - DB2 Runtime Client and DB2 Client” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “Version 9 incompatibilities with previous releases and changed behaviors” in Administration Guide: Planning An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows) This topic outlines the steps for installing your DB2 server product on Windows. Procedure: To install your DB2 server product on Windows: 1. Review your DB2 product prerequisites accessible from the DB2 Setup wizard Launchpad. 2. Review DB2 migration information if applicable. 3. Install your DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard. DB2 Setup wizard features include: v A launchpad from which you can view installation notes, product prerequisites, and release notes, and learn about DB2 Version 9 features. v Selecting DB2 installation type (typical, compact, or custom). v Selecting DB2 product installation location. v Setting up database partitioning options. 6 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 15. v Setting the DB2 copy name. v Enabling Extended Security. v Setting the user interface and product messages. The user interface and product messages are available in several languages and are installed in the languages that you choose. By installing multiple languages, you can view the interface and messages in your preferred languages. v Setting up the DB2 Administration Server (including DAS user setup). v Setting up Administration contact and health monitor notification. v Setting up and configuring your instance setup and configuration (including instance user setup). v Preparing the DB2 tools catalog. v Creating response files; you can save your installation choices in a response file for later installation, or to duplicate the installation on another computer, or to add another participating computer in a partitioned database environment. Related concepts: v “Migration to DB2 Version 9” in Migration Guide Related tasks: v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63 Related reference: v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference v “Disk and memory requirements” on page 9 v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10 v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on page 12 An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX) This topic outlines steps for installing your DB2 server product on AIX®, HP-UX, Linux, and Solaris Operating Environment. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. install your DB2 server product: Review your DB2 product prerequisites. Review DB2 migration information if applicable. Modify kernel parameters on HP-UX, Linux, and Solaris Operating Environment. On all platforms, except for Linux on x86_32, the user must install a 64-bit kernel before proceeding with the installation, otherwise the installation will fail. 4. If the DB2 product CD does not automount, mount your DB2 product CD. Chapter 1. Installation overview 7
  • 16. 5. Install your DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard. DB2 Setup wizard features include: v A launchpad from which you can view installation notes and release notes, and learn about DB2 Version 9 features. v Selecting DB2 installation type (typical, compact, or custom). v Selecting DB2 product installation location. v Setting up database partitioning options for the DB2 instance. v Setting the user interface and product messages. The user interface and product messages are available in several languages and are installed in the languages that you choose. By installing multiple languages, you can view the interface and messages in your preferred languages. v Setting up the DB2 Administration Server (including DAS user setup). v Setting up Administration contact and health monitor notification. v Setting up and configuring your instance setup and configuration (including instance user setup). v Preparing the DB2 tools catalog. v Creating response files. Related concepts: v “Migration to DB2 Version 9” in Migration Guide Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX)” on page 21 v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX)” on page 23 v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24 v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating System)” on page 27 v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference 8 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 17. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites Disk and memory requirements Disk requirements: The disk space required for your product depends on the type of installation you choose and the type of file system you have. The DB2 Setup wizard provides dynamic size estimates based on the components selected during a typical, compact, or custom installation. On Windows, you might require significantly more space on FAT (File Allocation Table) drives with large cluster sizes than with NTFS (New Technology File System) drives. Remember to include disk space for required software and communication products. Memory requirements: At a minimum, a DB2 database system requires 256 MB of RAM. For a system running just DB2 and the DB2 GUI tools, a minimum of 512 MB of RAM is required. However, 1 GB of RAM is recommended for improved performance. These requirements do not include any additional memory requirements for other software that is running on your system. When determining memory requirements, be aware of the following: v DB2 products that run on HP-UX Version 11i v2 (B.11.23) for Itanium-based systems require 512 MB of RAM at a minimum. v For DB2 client support, these memory requirements are for a base of five concurrent client connections. You will need an additional 16 MB of RAM per five client connections. v Memory requirements are affected by the size and complexity of your database system, as well as by the extent of database activity and the number of clients accessing your system. In DB2 Version 9, the new self-tuning memory feature simplifies the task of memory configuration by automatically setting values for several memory configuration parameters. When enabled, the memory tuner dynamically distributes available memory resources among several memory consumers including sort, the package cache, the lock list and buffer pools. v On Linux, SWAP space at least twice as large as RAM is recommended. Related concepts: v “Self tuning memory” in Performance Guide © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 9
  • 18. DB2 server installation (Windows) Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows) For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see v www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, software, and hardware prerequisites must be met: Table 2. Windows installation prerequisites Operating System Service Pack Hardware Windows XP Professional (32-bit) Service Pack 2 or later All Intel® and AMD processors capable of running the supported Windows operating systems (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows XP Professional x64 Windows 2003 Standard Edition (32-bit and 64-bit) Service Pack 1 or later Windows 2003 Advanced Edition (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows 2003 Datacenter Edition (32-bit and 64-bit) Additional client considerations DB2 products continue to be supported on Windows 98, Windows ME, Windows NT®, and Windows 2000 until DB2 Universal Database Version 8.1 goes out of service. For existing installations and new installations of DB2 products, upgrading to a more current operating system version of Windows (such as Windows 2003) is recommended. Version 9 clients cannot be installed on Windows 98, Windows ME, or Windows NT Server 4 operating systems. If you wish to continue running DB2 products on back level releases of Windows, you require the following maintenance levels: v Windows NT Version 4 with Service Pack 6a or later v Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or later v Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack 2 Windows XP Service Pack 1 is required for running DB2 applications in either of the following environments: v Applications that have COM+ objects using ODBC; or v Applications that use OLE DB Provider for ODBC with OLE DB resource pooling disabled If you are unsure about whether your application environment qualifies, then it is recommended that you install the appropriate Windows service level. For more information about this COM+ issue, see the following Microsoft® Knowledge Base article: v http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;EN-US;306414 10 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 19. Additional software considerations v MDAC 2.8 is required. The DB2 Setup wizard will install MDAC 2.8 if it is not already installed. v v v v v Note: If a previous version of MDAC (for example, 2.7) is already installed, DB2 install will upgrade MDAC to 2.8. For a typical install, MDAC 2.8 is installed. For a compact install, MDAC 2.8 is not installed. For a custom install, MDAC 2.8 is installed but only if you have not deselected the default which is to install it. If you deselect MDAC as part of a custom install, it will not be installed. If you plan to use LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), you should use either a Microsoft LDAP client or the IBM® Tivoli® Directory Server v6 client (also known as the IBM LDAP client which is included with DB2). Prior to installation of the Microsoft Active Directory, you will need to extend your directory schema using the db2schex utility, which can be found on the installation media. The Microsoft LDAP client is included with the operating system for Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. If you plan to use the Tivoli Storage Manager facilities for the backup and restoration of your databases, you need the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Version 4.2.0 or later. – For Windows 64-bit operating systems, you require the TSM client API Version 5.1. If you have the IBM Antivirus program installed on your operating system, it must be disabled or uninstalled to complete a DB2 installation. TCP/IP support must be enabled to view online help. One of the following browsers is required to view online help, run the DB2 install launchpad (setup.exe), and to run First Steps (db2fs): – Internet Explorer 5.5 and up – Mozilla 1.4 and up – Firefox 1.0 and up – Netscape 7.0 and up Related concepts: v “Support changes for 32-bit and 64-bit DB2 servers” in Migration Guide Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6 Related reference: v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35 v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients DB2 services running on your system (Windows) The following table lists the DB2 services that run on your system when DB2 9.1 is installed: Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 11
  • 20. Table 3. DB2 Services Service Display Name Service Name Description DB2 - (db2copyname) <instance name> <instance name> Allows applications to create, update, control, and manage relational databases. DB2 Governor (db2copyname) DB2GOVERNOR _db2copyname Collects statistics for applications connected to DB2 databases. DB2 Information Center Server V9.1 DB2ICSERVER_V91 Provides documentation for DB2 Universal Database™ and related DB2 products. DB2 License Server (db2copyname) DB2LICD _db2copyname Monitors DB2 license compliance. DB2 Management Service DB2MGMTSVC _db2copyname Manages DB2 registry entries (db2copyname) for backward compatibility purposes for the DB2 copy. DB2 Query Patroller (db2copyname) DB2QP _db2copyname DB2 Query Patroller DB2 Remote Command Server (db2copyname) DB2REMOTECMD _db2copyname Supports remote DB2 command execution. DB2 Security Server (db2copyname) DB2NTSECSERVER _db2copyname Authenticates DB2 database users when the authentication is performed at the client computer. DB2DAS - DB2DASXX DB2DASXX (where XX is 00-99) Supports local and remote database administrative requests. Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6 Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10 Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows) If you are installing a DB2 server product on Windows, you require the following user accounts: v An installation user account and v Optional - one or more setup user accounts. You can create these accounts during the installation. – A DB2 Administration Server (DAS) user account – A DB2 instance user account. You can also use the Local System account for products other than DB2 Enterprise Server Edition. The installation user account is the account of the user performing the installation. The installation user account must be defined prior to running the DB2 Setup wizard. The setup user accounts can be defined prior to installation or you can have the DB2 Setup wizard create them for you. 12 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 21. All user account names must adhere to your system naming rules and to DB2 naming rules. Extended security on Windows: DB2 products offer extended Windows security. You can install DB2 with a user ID, but unless that user ID belongs to either the DB2ADMNS or DB2USERS group, that user ID won’t be able to run any DB2 commands. The DB2 installer creates these two new groups. You can either specify a new name during a custom installation or accept the default names. To enable this security feature, select the Enable operating system security check box on the Enable operating system security for DB2 objects panel during the DB2 installation. Accept the default values for the DB2 Administrators Group field, and the DB2 Users Group field. The default group names are DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS. If there is a conflict with existing group names, you will be prompted to change the group names. If required, you can specify your own values. DB2 server user accounts: Installation user account A local or domain user account is required to perform the installation. Normally, the user account must belong to the Administrators group on the machine where you will perform the installation. Alternatively, a non-Administrator user account can be used. This alternative requires that a member of the Windows Administrators group first configure the Windows elevated privileges settings to allow a non-Administrator user account to perform an installation. The user right ″Access this computer from the network″ is required for the installation user account. For domain accounts, to verify user IDs on the DB2 server, the installation user ID must belong to the Domain Administrators group on the domain where the accounts are going to be created. You may also use the built-in Local System account to run the installation for all products. User rights granted by the DB2 installer: The DB2 installation program does not grant the Debug Programs user right. The DB2 installer grants the following user rights: v Act as part of the operating system v Create token object v Lock pages in memory v Log on as a service v Increase quotas v Replace a process level token DB2 Administration Server (DAS) user account A local or domain user account is required for the DB2 Administration Server (DAS). If you are performing a response file installation, you can also specify the Local System account in the response file. For more details, refer to the sample response files in the db2windowssamples directory. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 13
  • 22. The Local System account is available for all products, except DB2 Enterprise Server Edition and can be selected through the DB2 Setup wizard. The DB2 Administration Server (DAS) is a special DB2 administration service used to support the GUI tools and assist with administration tasks on local and remote DB2 servers. The DAS has an assigned user account that is used to log the DAS service on to the computer when the DAS service is started. You can create the DAS user account before installing DB2 or you can have the DB2 Setup wizard create it for you. If you want to have the DB2 Setup wizard create a new domain user account, the user account you use to perform the installation must have authority to create domain user accounts. The user account must belong to the Administrators group on the machine where you will perform the installation. This account will be granted the following user rights: v Act as part of the operating system v Debug programs Create token object Lock pages in memory Log on as a service Increase quotas (adjust memory quotas for a process on Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 operating systems) v Replace a process level token v v v v If extended security is enabled, then the DB2ADMNS group will have all these privileges. You can simply add users to that group and you do not need to add these privileges explicitly. However, the user still needs to be a member of the Local Administrators group. The Lock pages in memory privilege is required for AWE (Advanced Windowing Extensions) support. The ″Debug programs″ privilege is only needed when DB2 group lookup is explicitly specified to use the access token. If the user account is created by the install program, the user account will be granted these privileges and if the user account already exists, this account will also be granted these privileges. If the install grants the privileges, some of them will only be effective on first log-on by the account that was granted the privileges or upon reboot. It is recommended that the DAS user have SYSADM authority on each of the DB2 systems within your environment so that it can start or stop other instances if required. By default, any user that is part of the Administrator group has SYSADM authority. DB2 instance user account The user account must belong to the Administrators group on the machine where you will perform the installation. A local or domain user account is required for the DB2 instance. Every DB2 instance has one user that is assigned when the instance is created. DB2 logs on with this user name when the instance is started. You may also use the built-in Local System account to run the installation for all products, except for DB2 Enterprise Server Edition. 14 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 23. You can create the DB2 instance user account before installing DB2 or you can have theDB2 Setup wizard create it for you. If you want to have the DB2 Setup wizard create a new domain user account, the user account you use to perform the installation must have authority to create domain user accounts. This account will be granted the following user rights: v Act as part of the operating system v Debug programs v Create token object v Increase quotas v Lock pages in memory v Log on as a service v Replace a process level token If extended security is enabled, then the DB2ADMNS group will have all these privileges. You can simply add users to that group and you do not need to add these privileges explicitly. However, the user still needs to be a member of the Local Administrators group. The Lock pages in memory privilege is required for AWE (Advanced Windowing Extensions) support. The ″Debug programs″ privilege is only needed when DB2 group lookup is explicitly specified to use the access token. If the user account is created by the install program, the user account will be granted these privileges and if the user account already exists, this account will also be granted these privileges. If the install grants the privileges, some of them will only be effective on first log-on by the account that was granted the privileges or upon reboot. Related concepts: v “User, user ID and group naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 6 v “Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to installing a DB2 product (Windows)” on page 18 Preparing the environment for a partitioned DB2 server (Windows) This topic describes the steps required to prepare your Windows environment for a partitioned installation of the DB2 product. Restrictions: Each participating computer must have the same operating system. For example, you cannot have a partitioned database system that includes both Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Procedure: To prepare your Windows environment for installation: Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 15
  • 24. 1. Ensure that the primary computer and participating computers belong to the same Windows domain. Check the domain to which the computer belongs by using the System Properties dialog, accessible through the Control Panel. 2. Ensure that time and date settings on the primary computer and participating computers are consistent. To be considered consistent, the difference in GMT time between all computers must be no greater than one hour. System date and time can be modified using the Date/Time Properties dialog, accessible through the Control Panel. You can use the max_time_diff configuration parameter to change this restriction. The default is max_time_diff = 60, which allows a difference of less than 60 minutes. 3. Ensure that each computer object that participates in the partitioned database environment has the ″Trust computer for delegation″ privilege flagged. 4. Ensure that all participating computers can communicate with each other using TCP/IP: a. On one participating computer, enter the hostname command, which will return the hostname of the computer. b. On another participating computer, enter the following command: ping hostname where hostname represents the hostname of the primary computer. If the test is successful, you will receive output similar to the following: Pinging ServerA.ibm.com [9.21.27.230] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Reply from 9.21.27.230: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128 Repeat these steps until you are sure that all participating computers can communicate with each other using TCP/IP. Each computer must have a static IP address. If you are planning to use multiple network adapters, you can specify which adapter to use to communicate between database partition servers. Use the db2nchg command to specify the netname field in the db2nodes.cfg file after the installation is complete. 5. During the installation you will be asked to provide a DB2 Administration Server user account. This is a local or domain user account that will be used by the DB2 Administration Server (DAS). The DAS is an administration service used to support the GUI tools and assist with administration tasks. You can define a user now or have the DB2 Setup wizard create one for you. If you want to create a new domain user using the DB2 Setup wizard, the account used to perform the installation must have authority to create domain users. 6. On the primary computer, where you will install the instance-owning partition, you must have a domain user account that belongs to the local Administrators group. You will log on as this user when you install DB2. You must add the same user account to the local Administrators group on each participating computer. This user must have the Act as part of the operating system user right. 7. Ensure that all computers in the instance have the database directory on the same local drive letter. 8. During the installation you will be asked to provide a domain user account to be associated with the DB2 instance. Every DB2 instance has one user assigned. DB2 logs on with this user name when the instance is started. You can define a user now, or you can have the DB2 Setup wizard create a new domain user for you. 16 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 25. When adding a new node to a partitioned environment the DB2 copy name must be the same on all computers. If you want to create a new domain user using the DB2 Setup wizard, the account used to perform the installation must have authority to create domain users. The instance user domain account must belong to the local Administrators group on all the participating computers and will be granted the following user rights: v Act as part of the operating system v Create token object v Lock pages in memory v Log on as a service v Increase quotas v Replace a process level token The installation program grants all of these privileges except for the Debug programs privilege. If extended security was selected, then the account must also be a member of the DB2ADMNS group. The DB2ADMNS group already has these privileges so the privileges would not be required to be added explicitly to the account. Related reference: v “db2nchg - Change database partition server configuration command” in Command Reference v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on page 12 Granting user rights (Windows) This topic describes the steps required to grant user rights on Windows operating systems. Specific user rights are recommended for user accounts required to install and set up DB2. Prerequisites: To grant advanced user rights on Windows you must be logged on as a local Administrator. Procedure: 1. Click Start and select Run .... 2. Type secpol.msc and click OK. 3. Select Local Security Policy. 4. In the left window pane, expand the Local Policies object, then select User Rights Assignment. 5. In the right window pane, select the user right that you want to assign. 6. From the menu, select Action —> Security... 7. Click Add, then select a user or group to assign the right to, and click Add. 8. Click OK. If your computer belongs to a Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 domain, the domain user rights may override your local settings. In this case, your Network Administrator will have to make the changes to the user rights. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 17
  • 26. Related concepts: v “User, user ID and group naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on page 12 Setting up Windows elevated privileges prior to installing a DB2 product (Windows) The usual method to install a DB2 product on Windows is to use an Administrator user account. However, DB2 products can be installed using a non-administrator account. To do so, a Windows Administrator must configure the elevated privileges feature in Windows. This task explains how a Windows Administrator can set up a computer with elevated privileges to allow installation using a non-Administrator user account. The related task of granting DB2 administration authorities to non-Administrator users is also covered. Typically a Windows Administrator would perform this task to enable another person who does not have an Administrator account to install a DB2 product. The role of this person might be only to install DB2 products or to also administer DB2 products once installed. Prior to initiating this procedure, note the following restrictions on non-Administrator installation using elevated privileges: v Non-Administrator users can only install fix packs, add-on products, or upgrade DB2 as long as prior installations or upgrades were also performed by a non-Administrator user. v Non-Administrator users cannot uninstall a DB2 product. Procedure for setting up a computer with elevated privileges: This procedure uses the Windows Group Policy Editor. Instructions for using regedit instead are provided in additional notes. 1. Enter gpedit.msc at the command line. 2. Enable elevated privileges for the computer. a. Click on Computer Configuration –> Administrative Templates –>Windows Components –> Windows Installer. b. Enter the following Group Policy settings: v Enable: Always install with elevated privileges (mandatory) v Enable: Enable user control over installs (mandatory) v Enable: Disable Windows Installer. Then set Disable Windows Installer to Never. (for Windows 2003 and XP). v Enable: Enable user to patch elevated products (optional) v Enable: Enable user to use media source while elevated (optional) v Enable: Enable user to browse for source while elevated (optional) 3. Enable elevated privileges for the user account that will be performing the installation. 18 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 27. a. Click on User Configuration –> Administrative Templates –>Windows Components –> Windows Installer. b. Enter the following Group Policy settings: v Enable: Always install with elevated privileges (mandatory) 4. Perform setup related to the user account that will install DB2. v Identify the user account that will install DB2. If necessary, create that account. v Give that account write permission for the drive on which an installation is planned. 5. Optional: Complete additional steps applicable to installing fix packs: v Provide read access to the sqllibcfg directory. v Ensure that allowlockdownpatch is enabled (as described in the Windows Installer SDK documentation) because fix pack installations are considered minor upgrades to the product. 6. Refresh the computer’s security policy in any one of the following ways: v Reboot the PC. v For Windows XP and Windows 2000: at the command line, enter gpupdate.exe. v For Windows 2000: At the command line, enter secedit.exe / refreshpolicy {machine_policy │user_policy}. By following this procedure you will have set up the computer with elevated privileges and set up a user account that will be able to install DB2 server products, clients and fix packs Using regedit instead of the Windows Group Policy Editor: An alternative to using the Windows Group Policy Editor is to use regedit. 1. In the registry branch HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWAREPolicies MicrosoftWindows, add the key installer 2. Edit the key installer with the following values: v For AlwaysInstallElevated, enter REG_DWORD=1. v For AllowLockdownBrowse, enter REG_DWORD=1. v For AllowLockdownMedia, enter REG_DWORD=1. v For AllowLockdownPatch, enter REG_DWORD=1. v For DisableMSI, enter REG_DWORD=0. v For EnableUserControl, enter REG_DWORD=1. 3. In the registry branch HKEY_CURRENT_USERSOFTWAREPolicies MicrosoftWindows, add the key installer 4. Edit the key installer with the following values: v For AlwaysInstallElevated, enter REG_DWORD=1. Removing elevated privileges: After you have given elevated privileges, you can reverse this action. To do so, remove the registry key Installer under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESOFTWARE PoliciesMicrosoftWindows. Granting a non-administrator user DB2 administration authorities: Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 19
  • 28. At this point, only members of the Windows Administrators group will have DB2 administration authorities. The Windows Administrator has the option to grant one or more DB2 authorities, such as SYSADM, SYSMAINT, or SYSCTRL to the non-Administrator user who installed the DB2 product. Related concepts: v “Authorization, privileges, and object ownership” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on page 12 DB2 system administrator group considerations (Windows) By default, system administrative (SYSADM) authority is granted to any valid DB2 user account that belongs to the Administrators group on the computer where the account is defined. If the account is a local account, then it must belong to the local Administrators group. If the account is a domain account, then it must belong to the Administrators group at the domain controller or the local Administrators group. For example, if a user logs on to a domain account and tries to access a DB2 database, the DB2 database server goes to a domain controller to enumerate groups (including the Administrators group). You can force the DB2 database server to always perform group lookup on the local computer by setting the registry variable DB2_GRP_LOOKUP=local and adding the domain accounts (or global groups) to the local group. For a domain user to have SYSADM authority, they must belong to the local Administrators group or the Administrators group at the domain controller. Since the DB2 database server always performs authorization at the machine where the account is defined, adding a domain user to the local Administrators group on the server does not grant the domain user SYSADM authority to this group. To avoid adding a domain user to the Administrators group at the domain controller, create a global group and add the domain users to which you want to grant SYSADM authority to it. Then update the DB2 configuration parameter SYSADM_GROUP with the name of the global group. To update the DB2 configuration parameter, enter the following commands: db2 update dbm cfg using sysadm_group global_group db2stop db2start Related concepts: v “System administration authority (SYSADM)” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “sysadm_group - System administration authority group name configuration parameter” in Performance Guide 20 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 29. Fast communications manager (Windows) The fast communications manager (FCM) provides communications support for DB2 server products. Each database partition server has one FCM sender, and one FCM receiver daemon to provide communications between database partition servers to handle agent requests and to deliver message buffers. The FCM daemon is started when you start the instance. If communications fail between database partition servers or if they re-establish communications, the FCM thread updates information (that you can query with the database system monitor) and causes the appropriate action (such as the rollback of an affected transaction) to be performed. You can use the database system monitor to help you set the FCM configuration parameters. You can specify the number of FCM message buffers with the fcm_num_buffers database manager configuration parameter and the number of FCM channels with thefcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter. The fcm_num_buffers and fcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter are set to AUTOMATIC as the default value. FCM monitors resource usage when any of these parameter are set to automatic, and incrementally releases resources. It is recommended to leave these parameters set to AUTOMATIC. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 v “Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Windows)” on page 39 DB2 server installation (Linux and UNIX) Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX) For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware, and communications prerequisites must be met: Table 4. AIX installation prerequisites AIX Version Operating System Hardware AIX Version 5.2.0 DB2 client is available using the 64-bit AIX kernel. One of: DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, for either single-partition or partitioned database environment, is available with the required 64-bit AIX kernel. v eServer™ pSeries® DB2 client is available using the 64-bit AIX kernel. One of: DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, for either single-partition or partitioned database environment, is available with the required 64-bit AIX kernel. v eServer pSeries AIX Version 5.3.0 v IBM RISC/6000 v IBM RISC/6000 Software considerations: Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 21
  • 30. v (Clients only:) If you plan to use Kerberos Authentication, you require IBM Network Authentication Service client v1.3 or later. The NAS client is provided with the AIX Bonus CD. v Use the bosboot command to switch to the 64-bit kernel. To switch to a 64-bit kernel, you require root authority and should enter the following commands: ln -sf /usr/lib/boot/unix_64 /unix ln -sf /usr/lib/boot/unix_64 /usr/lib/boot/unix bosboot -a shutdown -Fr v DB2 Version 9 requires the “IBM C++ Runtime Environment Components for AIX” which includes xlC.rte 8.0.0.4. This is available from the IBM AIX support web site. v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First Steps (db2fs): – Mozilla 1.4 and up – Firefox 1.0 and up – Netscape 7.0 and up DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System): The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that involve: v Performance (impacted by network performance) v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure) v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines) v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including: v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be given to the mounting machine) v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting machines v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the mounting machine For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made available. Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7 Related reference: 22 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 31. v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35 v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX) For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware, and communications prerequisites must be met: Table 5. HP-UX installation prerequisites for HP-UX 11iv2 Operating System Hardware DB2 products can run on HP-UX 11iv2 (11.23.0505) for PA-RISC 2.x-based (PA-8x00) and Itanium-based systems with: One of: v May 2005 Base Quality (QPKBASE) bundle v HP Integrity Series server v HP 9000 Series 700 or 800 system v May 2005 Applications Quality (QPAPPS) bundle and the PHNE_32606 patch. (64-bit HP-UX kernel is required; server only) Kernel configuration considerations: A system restart is required if you update the kernel configuration parameters. The kernel configuration parameters are set in /etc/system. Depending on the values of your kernel configuration parameters, you might need to modify some of them before you install the DB2 Version 9 client or server products. If the kernel configuration parameters are modified, a reboot is necessary to make the changes to /etc/system effective. Software considerations: v If you are installing the Application Development Client, you must have a C compiler to build SQL Stored Procedures. v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First Steps (db2fs): – Mozilla 1.4 and up – Firefox 1.0 and up – Netscape 7.0 and up DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System): The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that involve: v Performance (impacted by network performance) v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure) v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines) v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including: v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 23
  • 32. v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be given to the mounting machine) v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting machines v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the mounting machine For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made available. Related tasks: v “Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX)” on page 40 Related reference: v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35 Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux) For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. For the latest information on supported Linux distributions, point your browser to http://www.ibm.com/db2/linux/validate. The supported operating systems for Linux include: v Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 (RHEL4) Update 2 v SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 (SLES9) Service Pack 2 To install a DB2 client or server product, the following distribution requirements, hardware, and communications prerequisites must be met: Table 6. Linux prerequisites Distribution Requirements Hardware You should update your kernel configuration parameters DB2 server products are supported on: in preparation for your Linux distribution. The default v x86 (Intel Pentium®, Intel Xeon®, and AMD Athlon) values for particular kernel parameters are not sufficient v x86–64 (Intel EM64T and AMD64) when running a DB2 database system. v IA64 (Intel Itanium® 2 or higher) You may also have other products or applications that v POWER™ (any iSeries™ or pSeries that support Linux) require Linux system resources. You should set the v (Server only)eServer zSeries®. kernel configuration parameters based on the needs of – The Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) is not your Linux system working environment. supported. The kernel configuration parameters are set in v (Client only)64-bit zSeries or System z9™ boxes. /etc/sysctl.conf. See the Modifying kernel parameters (Linux) section of the DB2 Information Center. Refer to your operating system manual for information on setting and activating these parameters using the sysctl command. 24 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 33. Package requirements (server only): The following tables list the package requirements for SUSE Linux and Red Hat distributions for DB2 Version 9 partitioned servers. v The pdksh Korn Shell package is required for all DB2 systems. v A remote shell utility is required for partitioned database systems. DB2 supports the following remote shell utilities: – rsh – ssh By default, DB2 uses rsh when executing commands on remote DB2 nodes, for example, when starting a remote DB2 database partition. To use the DB2 default, the rsh-server package must be installed (see table below). For a comparison between rsh and ssh, see the “Security issues when installing DB2” section of the Administration Guide: Implementation. If you choose to use the rsh remote shell utility, inetd (or xinetd) must be installed and running as well. If you choose to use the ssh remote shell utility, you need to set the DB2RSHCMD registry variable immediately after the DB2 installation is complete. If this registry variable is not set, rsh is used. For more information on the DB2RSHCMD registry variable, see the Performance Guide book. v The nfs-utils Network File System support package is required for partitioned database systems. All required packages should be installed and configured before continuing with the DB2 setup. For general Linux information, see your Linux distribution documentation. Package requirements for SUSE Linux Package name Description pdksh Korn Shell. This package is required for partitioned database environments. openssh This package contains a set of server programs which allow users to run commands on (and from) remote computers via a secure shell. This package is not required if you use the default configuration of DB2 with rsh. rsh-server This package contains a set of server programs which allow users to run commands on remote computers, login in to other computers, and copy files between computers (rsh, rexec, rlogin, and rcp). This package is not required if you configure DB2 to use ssh. nfs-utils Network File System support package. It allows access to local files from remote computers. Package requirements for Red Hat Directory Package name Description /System Environment/Shell pdksh Korn Shell. This package is required for partitioned database environments. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 25
  • 34. Package requirements for Red Hat Directory Package name Description /Applications/Internet openssh This package contains a set of client programs which allow users to run commands on a remote computer via a secure shell. This package is not required if you use the default configuration of DB2 with rsh. /System Environment/ Daemons openssh-server This package contains a set of server programs which allow users to run commands from a remote computer via a secure shell. This package is not required if you use the default configuration of DB2 with rsh. /System Environment/ Daemons rsh-server This package contains a set of programs which allow users to run commands on a remote computer. Required for partitioned database environments. This package is not required if you configure DB2 to use ssh. /System Environment/ Daemons nfs-utils Network File System support package. It allows access to local files from remote computers. Software considerations: v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First Steps (db2fs): – Mozilla 1.4 and up – Firefox 1.0 and up – Netscape 7.0 and up v An X Window System software capable of rendering a graphical user interface is required if you want to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install DB2 or if you want to use any DB2 graphical tools. (Available only on Linux for x86 and Linux on AMD 64/EM64T.) DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System): The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that involve: v Performance (impacted by network performance) v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure) v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines) v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including: v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be given to the mounting machine) 26 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 35. v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting machines v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the mounting machine For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made available. Related concepts: v “Security issues when installing the DB2 database manager” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Modifying kernel parameters (Linux)” on page 41 v “Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries” on page 33 Related reference: v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35 v “Communications variables” in Performance Guide Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating System) For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. To install a DB2 client or server product, the following operating system, hardware, and communications prerequisites must be met: Table 7. Solaris Operating System installation prerequisites Operating System Hardware DB2 client and server products are supported on the following Solaris Operating System versions: Solaris UltraSPARC-based computer v Solaris 9 The following patches are also required: – 111711-12 – 111712-12 v Solaris 10 Kernel configuration considerations: A system restart is required if you update the kernel configuration parameters. The kernel configuration parameters are set in /etc/system and if these parameters require modification to accommodate the DB2 client, a reboot is necessary to make the changes to /etc/system effective. These parameters must be set before you install a DB2 client. Software considerations: Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 27
  • 36. v (Clients only:) If you plan to use Kerberos Authentication, you require Solaris Operating System 9 or higher with IBM Network Authentication Service (NAS) client v1.4 or higher. The NAS client can be downloaded from Web site: https://www6.software.ibm.com/dl/dm/dm-nas-p. v If you are installing the Application Development Client, you must have a C compiler to build SQL Stored Procedures. v One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First Steps (db2fs): – Mozilla 1.4 and up – Firefox 1.0 and up – Netscape 7.0 and up ″Recommended & Security Patches″ can be obtained from the http://sunsolve.sun.com Web site. From the SunSolve Online Web site, click on the ″Patches″ menu item in the left panel. The Java™2 Standard Edition (J2SE) Solaris Operating System Patch Clusters and the SUNWlibC software are also required and can be obtained from the http://sunsolve.sun.com Web site. For DB2 on 64-bit Fujitsu PRIMEPOWER systems, you require the following: v Solaris 9 Kernel Update Patch 112233-01 or later to get the fix for patch 912041-01. The Fujitsu PRIMEPOWER patches for the Solaris Operating System can be downloaded from FTSI at: http://download.ftsi.fujitsu.com/. DB2 product installation on NFS (Network File System): The installation of DB2 products on NFS (Network File System) is not recommended. Running DB2 products on NFS (for example, NFS mounting /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 and then running off code that was physically installed on a remote system) requires several manual setup steps. There are also a number of potential issues with setting up NFS for DB2. These include possible problems that involve: v Performance (impacted by network performance) v Availability (you are allowing a single point of failure) v Licensing (there is no checking done across machines) v Diagnosing NFS errors can be difficult As mentioned, the setup for NFS will require several manual actions including: v Ensuring that the mount point preserve the install path v Permission must be controlled (for example, write permission should not be given to the mounting machine) v DB2 registries have to be set up manually and maintained across all mounting machines v The list installed DB2 products and features command (db2ls) must be set up and maintained properly if you need to detect DB2 products and features v More care is required when updating your DB2 product environment v More steps are required when cleaning up on the exporting machine and the mounting machine 28 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 37. For detailed instructions, look for the “Setting Up DB2 on NFS Mounted File System” white paper which will be available soon after DB2 Version 9 is made available. Related tasks: v “Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 43 Related reference: v “Communication protocols supported” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients v “IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products” on page 35 Listing DB2 products installed on your system (Linux and UNIX) With the ability to install multiple copies of DB2 products on your system and the flexibility to install DB2 products and features in the path of your choice, you need a tool to help you keep track of what is installed and where it is installed. On supported Linux and UNIX operating systems, the db2ls command lists the DB2 products and features installed on your system, including the DB2 Version 9 HTML documentation. The db2ls command can be used to list: v where DB2 products are installed on your system and list the DB2 product level v all or specific DB2 products and features in a particular installation path Prerequisites: At least one DB2 Version 9 product must already be installed for a symbolic link to the db2ls command to be available in /usr/local/bin directory. Restrictions: The db2ls command is the only method to query a DB2 product. You cannot query DB2 products using Linux or UNIX operating system native utilities. Any existing scripts containing a native installation utility that you use to interface and query with DB2 installations will need to change. You cannot use the db2ls command on Windows operating systems. Procedure: To list the path where DB2 products are installed on your system and list the DB2 product level, enter: db2ls The command lists the following information for each DB2 product installed on your system: v Installation path v Level v Fix pack v Installation date listing when the DB2 product was last modified. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 29
  • 38. To list information about DB2 products or features in a particular installation path the q parameter must be specified: db2ls -q -b baseInstallDirectory where v q specifies you are querying a product or feature. This parameter is mandatory. If a DB2 Version 8 product is queried, a blank value is returned. v b specifies the installation directory of the product or feature. This parameter is mandatory if you are not running the command from the installation directory. Depending on the parameters provided, the command lists the following information: v Installation path. This is specified only once, not for each feature. v The following information is displayed: – Response file ID for the installed feature, or if the p option is specified, the response file ID for the installed product. For example ENTERPRISE_SERVER_EDITION. – Feature name, or if the p option is specified, product name. – Product version, release, modification level, fix pack level (VRMF). For example, 9.1.0.0 – Fix pack, if applicable. For example, if fix pack 1 is installed, the value displayed is 1. This includes interim fix packs, such as fix pack 1a. v If any of the product’s VRMF information do not match, a warning message displays at the end of the output listing. The message suggests the fix pack to apply. Related concepts: v “Multiple DB2 copies on the same computer (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement Related tasks: v “Installing a DB2 product using the db2_install or doce_install command (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 v “Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)” on page 72 Related reference: v “db2ls - List installed DB2 products and features command” in Command Reference v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX) The fast communications manager (FCM) provides communications support for DB2 server products. Each database partition server has one FCM sender, and one FCM receiver daemon to provide communications between database partition servers to handle agent requests and to deliver message buffers. The FCM daemon is started when you start the instance. If communications fail between database partition servers or if they re-establish communications, the FCM daemons updates information (that you can query with 30 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 39. the database system monitor) and cause the appropriate action (such as the rollback of an affected transaction) to be performed. You can use the database system monitor to help you set the FCM configuration parameters. You can specify the number of FCM message buffers with the fcm_num_buffers database manager configuration parameter and the number of FCM channels with thefcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter. The fcm_num_buffers and fcm_num_channels database manager configuration parameter are set to AUTOMATIC as the default value. FCM monitors resource usage when any of these parameter are set to automatic, and incrementally releases resources. It is recommended to leave these parameters set to AUTOMATIC. Related tasks: v “Enabling communications between database partition servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 97 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 DB2 users and groups (Linux and UNIX) The DB2 Setup wizard creates the following users and groups automatically (if needed) during the installation of your DB2 product. If you are using the DB2 Setup wizard, you do not need to manually create these users and groups. Three users and three groups are used to operate DB2 on Linux and UNIX. Instance owner The DB2 instance is created in the instance owner home directory. This user ID controls all DB2 processes and owns all filesystems and devices used by the databases contained within the instance. The default user is db2inst1 and the default group is db2iadm1. When using the DB2 Setup wizard, the default action is to create a new user for your DB2 instance. The default name is db2inst1 – if that user name already exists, DB2 will try to create another user name, db2inst2. If that user name also exists, DB2 will keep searching through user names db2inst3, db2inst4, and so on until it identifies the first user name that is not already an existing user on the system as the default instance owner ID. If you choose to proceed this user would be created by DB2. However, you also have a choice to specify any existing user as the instance owner. This method for user name creation also applies to the creation of fenced users and DB2 administration server users. Fenced user The fenced user is used to run user defined functions (UDFs) and stored procedures outside of the address space used by the DB2 database. The default user is db2fenc1 and the default group is db2fadm1. If you do not need this level of security, for example in a test environment, you may use your instance owner as your fenced user. DB2 administration server user The user ID for the DB2 administration server user is used to run the DB2 administration server on your system. Default user is dasusr1 and default group is dasadm1. This user ID is also used by the DB2 GUI tools to perform administration tasks against the local server database instances and databases. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 31
  • 40. This user does not contain any databases and there is only one administration server per machine. For example, one administration server can service multiple database instances. Related tasks: v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (AIX)” on page 57 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (HP-UX)” on page 58 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Linux)” on page 60 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 61 Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX) In environments that include security software, such as NIS (Network Information Services) or NIS+, there are some installation considerations. The DB2 installation scripts attempt to update objects that are under the control of the security packages, such as users and groups, and will not be able to do so if NIS or NIS+ is being used for user management. At instance creation, without a security component present, instance owner’s group list is modified to include that of the database administrative server (DAS) user’s primary group, if the DAS is created. If the instance creation program is unable to modify these properties (it will not if NIS/NIS+ is controlling the group), it reports that it could not. The warning message provides the necessary information to manually make the changes. These considerations hold true for any environment in which an external security program does not allow the DB2 installation or instance creation programs to modify user characteristics. If the DB2 Setup wizard detects NIS on your computer, you are not given the option of creating new users during the installation. Instead, you must choose existing users. Consider the following restrictions if you are using NIS or NIS+: v Groups and users must be created on the NIS server before running the DB2 Setup wizard. v Secondary groups must be created for the DB2 instance owner and the DB2 Administration Server on the NIS server. You must then add the primary group of the instance owner to the secondary DB2 Administration Server group. Likewise, you must add the primary DB2 Administration Server group to the secondary group for the instance owner. v On a partitioned DB2 database system, before you create an instance, there must be an entry for the instance in the etc/services file. For example, if you want to create an instance for the user db2inst1, you require an entry similar to the following: DB2_db2inst1 Related tasks: 32 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers 50000/tcp
  • 41. v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements System)” on page 27 for for for for DB2 DB2 DB2 DB2 clients clients clients clients and and and and servers servers servers servers (AIX)” on page 21 (HP-UX)” on page 23 (Linux)” on page 24 (Solaris Operating Preparing to install DB2 for Linux on zSeries To install a DB2 product on an IBM zSeries that is running Linux, you must make the installation image accessible to the Linux operating system. You can use FTP to send the installation image to the operating system, or use an NFS mount to make the product CD available to the operating system. Prerequisites: You have already obtained your DB2 product installation image. Using FTP to access the installation image: From the IBM zSeries computer running Linux: 1. Enter the following command: ftp yourserver.com where yourserver.com represents the FTP server where the DB2 product installation image resides. 2. Enter your user ID and password. 3. Enter the following commands: bin get product file where product file represents the appropriate product package name. Using the DB2 product CD over NFS to access the installation image: To use the product CD on a Linux operating system: 1. Mount the appropriate product CD. 2. Export the directory where you mounted the CD. For example, if you mounted the CD under /cdrom, then export the /cdrom directory. 3. On the IBM zSeries computer running Linux, NFS mount this directory using the following command: mount -t nfs -o ro nfsservername:/cdrom /local_directory_name where nfsservername represents the hostname of the NFS server, cdrom represents the name of the directory being exported on the NFS server, and local_directory_name represents the name of the local directory. 4. From the IBM zSeries computer running Linux, change to the directory where the CD is mounted. You can do this by entering the cd /local_directory_name command, where local_directory_name represents the mount point of your product CD. Chapter 2. Installation prerequisites 33
  • 42. Related tasks: v “Installing a DB2 Connect server product (Linux)” in Quick Beginnings for DB2 Connect Servers v “Mounting the CD-ROM (Linux)” on page 116 34 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 43. Chapter 3. Before you install Extending the directory schema (Windows) If you plan to use the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) directory server feature with Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003, you should extend the Active Directory schema to contain DB2 object classes and attribute definitions. You should perform this task before you install any DB2 products. Extending the directory schema ensures that: v The default DB2 instance, created during the installation, is cataloged as a DB2 node in Active Directory provided the installation user ID had sufficient privileges to write to Active Directory. v Any databases that the user creates after installation will automatically be cataloged into Active Directory. If you decide to install your DB2 product and create databases before you extend the directory schema, you will have to manually register the node and catalog the databases. Prerequisites: Your Windows user account must have Schema Administration authority. Procedure: To extend the directory schema: 1. Log onto the domain controller. 2. Run the db2schex.exe program from the installation CD with a user account that has Schema Administration authority. You can run this program without logging off and logging on again, as follows: runas /user:MyDomainAdministrator x:db2Windowsutilitiesdb2schex.exe where x: represents the CD drive letter. When db2schex.exe completes, you can proceed with the installation of your DB2 product. Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10 v “CATALOG LDAP DATABASE command” in Command Reference v “REGISTER command” in Command Reference IBM Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 products You require the appropriate level of IBM Software Development Kit (SDK) for Java listed below to use Java-based tools and to create and run Java applications, including stored procedures and user-defined functions. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 35
  • 44. If the IBM SDK for Java is required by a component being installed and the SDK for Java is not already installed in that path, the SDK for Java will be installed if you use either the DB2 Setup wizard or a response file to install the product. The SDK for Java is not installed with the DB2 Runtime client. The following table lists the installed SDK for Java levels for DB2 according to operating system platform: Operating System Platform SDK for Java level Windows x86 SDK 5 Service Release 1 Windows x64 SDK 5 Service Release 1 Windows IA64 SDK 1.4.2 Service Release 3 AIX 5 SDK 5 Service Release 1 Solaris Operating Environment SDK 1.4.2_07 HP-UX for PA-RISC 2 HP SDK for J2SE HP-UX 11i platform, adapted by IBM for IBM Software, Version 1.4.2 HP-UX for Itanium(R)-based systems HP SDK for J2SE HP-UX 11i platform, adapted by IBM for IBM Software, Version 1.4.2 Linux on x86 SDK 5 Service Release 1 Linux on IPF SDK 1.4.2 Service Release 3 Linux on AMD64/EM64T SDK 5 Service Release 1 Linux on zSeries SDK 5 Service Release 1 Linux on POWER SDK 5 Service Release 1 Notes: 1. With the exception of HP-UX, Linux on IPF, Solaris Operating Environment, and Windows IA64, although the table above lists the installed SDK for Java levels, SDK 1.4.2 to SDK 5 is also supported. The SDK for Java levels can be downloaded from the developerWorks® web page at: http://www.ibm.com/ developerworks/java/jdk/index.html Note: For Windows operating system platforms, use the IBM Development Package for Eclipse downloads. 2. DB2 GUI tools only run on Linux on x86, Linux on AMD64/EM64T, Windows x86, and Windows x64. 3. On Windows x86 and Linux on x86: v the 32-bit SDK is installed v 32-bit applications and Java external routines are supported 4. On Linux on IPF: v only 64-bit applications and Java external routines are supported 5. On all supported platforms (except Windows x86, Linux on x86, and Linux on IPF): v 32-bit applications are supported v 32-bit Java external routines are not supported v 64-bit applications and Java external routines are supported Related tasks: v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 36 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 45. v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63 Creating group and user IDs for a DB2 database installation Three users and groups are required. The DB2 Setup wizard will create these users and groups for you during the installation process. If you want, you can create them ahead of time. The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in the table below. You can specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to system naming rules and DB2 naming rules. The user IDs you create will be required to complete subsequent setup tasks. Table 8. Default users and groups User Example user name Example group name Instance owner db2inst1 db2iadm1 Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 DB2 administration server user dasusr1 dasadm1 v The instance owner home directory is where the DB2 instance will be created. v The fenced user is used to run user defined functions (UDFs) and stored procedures outside of the address space used by the DB2 database. v The user ID for the DB2 administration server user is used to run the DB2 administration server on your system. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to create users and groups. Procedure: To create the required groups and user IDs for DB2: 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. Enter the appropriate commands for your operating system. Note: These command line examples do not contain passwords. They are examples only. You can use the passwd username parameter from the command line to set the password. AIX To create groups on AIX, enter the following commands: mkgroup id=999 db2iadm1 mkgroup id=998 db2fadm1 mkgroup id=997 dasadm1 Create users for each group: mkuser id=1004 pgrp=db2iadm1 groups=db2iadm1 home=/home/db2inst1 db2inst1 mkuser id=1003 pgrp=db2fadm1 groups=db2fadm1 home=/home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1 mkuser id=1002 pgrp=dasadm1 groups=dasadm1 home=/home/dasusr1 dasusr1 Chapter 3. Before you install 37
  • 46. HP-UX To create groups on HP-UX, enter the following commands: groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1 groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1 groupadd -g 997 dasadm1 Create users for each group: useradd -g db2iadm1 -d /home/db2instl -m db2inst1 useradd -g db2fadm1 -d /home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1 useradd -g dbasgrp -d /home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1 Linux To create groups on Linux, enter the following commands: groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1 groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1 groupadd -g 997 dasadm1 Create users for each group: useradd -u 1004 -g db2iadm1 -m -d /home/db2inst1 db2inst1 useradd -u 1003 -g db2fadm1 -m -d /home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1 useradd -u 1002 -g dasadm1 -m -d /home/dasusr1 dasusr1 Solaris To create groups on Solaris, enter the following commands: groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1 groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1 groupadd -g 997 dasadm1 Create users for each group: useradd -g db2iadm1 -u 1004 -d /export/home/db2inst1 -m db2inst1 useradd -g db2fadm1 -u 1003 -d /export/home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1 useradd -g dasadm1 -u 1002 -d /export/home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1 Related concepts: v “General naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Installing a DB2 product manually” in Installation and Configuration Supplement Multiple CD installation (Linux and UNIX) Most DB2 product installation images are contained on a single CD. However, on supported Linux or UNIX platforms, some DB2 product installation image sizes could span more than a single CD, requiring multiple CDs to install the product. If you are installing a non-English version of a DB2 product, you will need an additional CD that contains national language support files. DB2 product files specific to a language are now grouped on one or more CDs called a National Language Package. There is a National Language Package for each supported Linux and UNIX operating system. Each CD contains all supported languages for all products except the DB2 Information Center (DOCE). An installation using a National Language Package is only supported using the DB2 Setup wizard or by using a response file, and only after a product has been installed. You cannot manually install a National Language Package using the db2_install command. 38 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 47. When installing a DB2 product, or a National Language Package, the installation image can be accessed either interactively or from a filesystem: v To access the installation image interactively, you must insert the CDs when prompted. v To access the installation image from a filesystem, prior to installing a DB2 product you must copy the installation image from the CDs to a filesystem. Then, during installation, specify the location of the filesystem. Multiple CD installation support is not required for DB2 Version 9 on Windows. If you are copying the installation images from physical CDs, the CD label contains a label name. For example, if you are installing the Enterprise Server Edition, the label name is ese1. When the installation image from the CD is copied to a filesystem, the installation image is placed in a directory structure such as ese/disk1. Similarly, when an additional CD is required, for example a National Language Package with a label name such as nlpack2, the installation image is copied to a directory structure such as nlpack/disk2. When the subdirectories are in the same directory, the installer is able to automatically find the installation images without prompting. This is referred to as automatic discovery. If you are downloading installation images from the DB2 service site http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support.html, untar the downloaded images into the same directory. This will create the subdirectories in the same directory, and allows the installer to automatically find the installation images without prompting. As in the previous example of copying the installation images from physical CDs, if you downloaded installation images for Enterprise Server Edition and a National Language Package, subdirectories such as ese and nlpack allow the installer to find the installation images automatically without prompting. Related tasks: v “An overview of installing your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 7 v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: v “National language versions” in Administration Guide: Planning v “Response file keywords (Windows and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Windows) This task describes the steps required to verify port range availability on participating computers. The port range is used by the Fast Communications Manager (FCM). FCM is a feature of DB2 that handles communications between database partition servers. When you install the instance-owning database partition server on the primary machine, DB2 reserves a port range according to the specified number of database partition servers participating in partitioned database environment. The default range is four ports. The DB2 Setup wizard must be able to reserve an identical port range when database partition servers are installed on participating computers; the port range needs to be free on each of the database partition servers. Chapter 3. Before you install 39
  • 48. This task should be done after you install the instance-owning database partition server and before you install any participating database partition servers. Procedure: To verify the port range availability on participating computers: 1. Open the services file. The default location of the services file is in the %SystemRoot%system32driversetc directory, where %SystemRoot% is your Windows root directory. 2. Locate the ports reserved for the DB2 Fast Communications Manager (FCM). The entries should appear similar to the following: DB2_DB2 DB2_DB2_1 DB2_DB2_2 DB2_DB2_END 60000/tcp 60001/tcp 60002/tcp 60003/tcp DB2 reserves the first four available ports after 60000. 3. On each participating computer, open the services file and verify that the ports reserved for DB2 FCM in the services file of the primary computer are not being used. 4. In the event that the required ports are in use on a participating computer, identify an available port range for all computers and update each service file, including the services file on the primary computer. Related concepts: v “Fast communications manager (Windows)” on page 21 Related reference: v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90 Kernel parameters (Linux and UNIX) Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX) For your DB2 product to perform properly on HP-UX, you may need to update your system’s kernel configuration parameters. You must restart your computer if you update your kernel configuration parameter values. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters. Procedure: To modify kernel parameters: 1. Enter the sam command to start the System Administration Manager (SAM) program. 2. Double-click the Kernel Configuration icon. 3. Double-click the Configurable Parameters icon. 4. Double-click the parameter that you want to change and type the new value in the Formula/Value field. 5. Click OK. 40 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 49. 6. Repeat these steps for all of the kernel configuration parameters that you want to change. 7. When you are finished setting all of the kernel configuration parameters, select Action --> Process New Kernel from the action menu bar. The HP-UX operating system automatically restarts after you change the values for the kernel configuration parameters. Related reference: v “db2osconf - Utility for kernel parameter values command” in Command Reference Recommended kernel configuration parameters (HP-UX) For HP-UX systems running a DB2 64-bit database system, run the db2osconf command to suggest appropriate kernel configuration parameter values for your system. The db2osconf utility can only be run from $DB2DIR/bin, where $DB2DIR is the directory where you installed your DB2 product. Related tasks: v “Modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX)” on page 40 Modifying kernel parameters (Linux) Before installing a DB2 database system, you should update your Linux kernel parameters. The default values for particular kernel parameters on Linux are not sufficient when running a DB2 database system. DB2 automatically raises the IPC limits where necessary based on the needs of the DB2 database system. However, it may be more practical to set the limits permanently on your Linux system if you have products or applications other than a DB2 database system. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters. Procedure: To update kernel parameters: Red Hat and SUSE Linux The following information can be used to determine if there are any necessary changes required for your system. The following is the output from the ipcs -l command. Comments have been added following the // to show what the parameter names are. # ipcs -l ------ Shared Memory Limits -------max number of segments = 4096 // SHMMNI max seg size (kbytes) = 32768 // SHMMAX max total shared memory (kbytes) = 8388608 // SHMALL min seg size (bytes) = 1 ------ Semaphore Limits -------max number of arrays = 1024 max semaphores per array = 250 max semaphores system wide = 256000 max ops per semop call = 32 // // // // SEMMNI SEMMSL SEMMNS SEMOPM Chapter 3. Before you install 41
  • 50. semaphore max value = 32767 ------ Messages: Limits -------max queues system wide = 1024 max size of message (bytes) = 65536 default max size of queue (bytes) = 65536 // MSGMNI // MSGMAX // MSGMNB Beginning with the first section on Shared Memory Limits, SHMMAX and SHMALL are the parameters that need to be looked at. SHMMAX is the maximum size of a shared memory segment on a Linux system whereas SHMALL is the maximum allocation of shared memory pages on a system. For SHMMAX, the minimum required on x86 systems would be 268435456 (256 MB) and for 64-bit systems, it would be 1073741824 (1 GB). SHMALL is set to 8 GB by default (8388608 KB = 8 GB). If you have more physical memory than this, and it is to be used for DB2, then this parameter should be increased to approximately 90% of the physical memory as specified for your computer. For instance, if you have a computer system with 16 GB of memory to be used primarily for DB2, then 90% of 16 GB is 14.4 GB divided by 4 KB (the base page size) is 3774873. The ipcs output has converted SHMALL into kilobytes. The kernel requires this value as a number of pages. The next section covers the amount of semaphores available to the operating system. The kernel parameter sem consists of 4 tokens, SEMMSL, SEMMNS, SEMOPM and SEMMNI. SEMMNS is the result of SEMMSL multiplied by SEMMNI. The database manager requires that the number of arrays (SEMMNI) be increased as necessary. Typically, SEMMNI should be twice the maximum number of connections allowed (MAXAGENTS) multiplied by the number of logical partitions on the database server computer plus the number of local application connections on the database server computer. The third section covers messages on the system. MSGMNI affects the number of agents that can be started, MSGMAX affects the size of the message that can be sent in a queue, and MSGMNB affects the size of the queue. MSGMAX should be change to 64 KB (that is, 65535 bytes), and MSGMNB should be increased to 65535 on Server systems. To modify these kernel parameters, we need to edit the /etc/sysctl.conf file. If this file does not exist, it should be created. The following lines are examples of what should be placed into the file: kernel.sem=250 256000 32 1024 #Example shmmax for a 64-bit system kernel.shmmax=1073741824 #Example shmall for 90 percent of 16 GB memory kernel.shmall=3774873 kernel.msgmax=65535 kernel.msgmnb=65535 Run sysctl with -p parameter to load in sysctl settings from the default file /etc/sysctl.conf. sysctl -p 42 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 51. To make the changes effective after every reboot, boot.sysctl needs to be active on SUSE Linux. On Red Hat, the rc.sysinit initialization script will read the /etc/sysctl.conf file automatically. Related tasks: v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24 Modifying kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment) For the DB2 database system to operate properly, it is recommended that you update your system’s kernel configuration parameters. You can use the db2osconf utility to suggest recommended kernel parameters. To use the db2osconf command, you must first install the DB2 database system. The db2osconf utility can only be run from $DB2DIR/bin, where $DB2DIR is the directory where you installed your DB2 product. You must restart your system after modifying kernel parameters. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to modify kernel parameters. Procedure: To set a kernel parameter, add a line at the end of the /etc/system file as follows: set parameter_name = value For example, to set the value of the msgsys:msginfo_msgmax parameter, add the following line to the end of the /etc/system file: set msgsys:msginfo_msgmax = 65535 After updating the /etc/system file, restart the system. Related reference: v “db2osconf - Utility for kernel parameter values command” in Command Reference Additional partitioned database environment preinstallation tasks (Linux and UNIX) Updating environment settings for a partitioned DB2 installation (AIX) This task describes the environment settings that you need to update on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database system. Procedure: To update AIX environment settings: Chapter 3. Before you install 43
  • 52. 1. Log on to the computer as a user with root authority. 2. Set the AIX maxuproc (maximum number of processes per user) device attribute to 4096 by entering the following command: chdev -l sys0 -a maxuproc=’4096’ Note: A bosboot/reboot may be required to switch to the 64-bit kernel if a different image is being run. 3. Set the TCP/IP network parameters on all the workstations that are participating in your partitioned database system to the following values. These values are the minimum values for these parameters. If any of the network-related parameters are already set to a higher value, do not change it. thewall sb_max rfc1323 tcp_sendspace tcp_recvspace udp_sendspace udp_recvspace ipqmaxlen somaxconn = = = = = = = = = 65536 1310720 1 221184 221184 65536 65536 250 1024 To list the current settings of all network-related parameters, enter the following command: no -a | more To set a parameter, enter the follow command: no -o parameter_name=value where: v parameter_name represents the parameter you want to set. v value represents the value that you want to set for this parameter. For example, to set the tcp_sendspace parameter to 221184, enter the following command: no -o tcp_sendspace=221184 4. If you are using a high speed interconnect, you must set the spoolsize and rpoolsize for css0 to the following values: spoolsize rpoolsize 16777216 16777216 To list the current settings of these parameters, enter the following command: lsattr -l css0 -E To set these parameters, enter the following commands: /usr/lpp/ssp/css/chgcss -l css0 -a spoolsize=16777216 /usr/lpp/ssp/css/chgcss -l css0 -a rpoolsize=16777216 If you are not using the /tftpboot/tuning.cst file to tune your system, you can use the DB2DIR/misc/rc.local.sample sample script file, where DB2DIR is path where the DB2 product has been installed to, to update the network-related parameters after installation. To update the network-related parameters using the sample script file after installation, perform the following steps: a. Copy this script file to the /etc directory and make it executable by root by entering the following commands: cp /usr/opt/db2_09_01/misc/rc.local.sample /etc/rc.local chown root:sys /etc/rc.local chmod 744 /etc/rc.local 44 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 53. b. Review the /etc/rc.local file and update it if necessary. c. Add an entry to the /etc/inittab file so that the /etc/rc.local script is executed whenever the machine is rebooted. You can use the mkitab command to add an entry to the /etc/inittab file. To add this entry, enter the following command: mkitab "rclocal:2:wait:/etc/rc.local > /dev/console 2>&1" d. Ensure that /etc/rc.nfs entry is included in the /etc/inittab file by entering the following command: lsitab rcnfs e. Update the network parameters without rebooting your system by entering the following command: /etc/rc.local 5. Ensure that you have enough paging space for a partitioned installation of DB2 ESE to run. If you do not have sufficient paging space, the operating system will kill the process that is using the most virtual memory (this is likely to be one of the DB2 processes). To check for available paging space, enter the following command: lsps -a This command will return output similar to the following: Page Space Physical Volume Volume Group Size paging00 hdisk1 rootvg 60MB hd6 hdisk0 rootvg 60MB hd6 hdisk2 rootvg 64MB %Used 19 21 21 Active yes yes yes Auto yes yes yes Type lv lv lv We recommend that the paging space available be equal to twice the amount of physical memory installed on your computer. 6. If you are creating a small to intermediate size partitioned database system, the number of network file system daemons (NFSDs) on the instance-owning computer should be close to: # of biod on a computer X # of computers in the instance We recommended that you run 10 biod processes on every computer. According to the above formula, on a four computer system with 10 biod processes, you would use 40 NFSDs. If you are installing a larger system, you can have up to 120 NFSDs on the computer. For additional information about NFS, refer to your NFS documentation. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Setting up a working collective to distribute commands to ESE workstations (AIX) In a partitioned database environment on AIX, you can set up a working collective to distribute commands to the set of RS/6000® SP™ workstations that participate in your partitioned database system. Commands can be distributed to the workstations by the dsh command. This can be useful when installing or administrating a partitioned database system on AIX, to enable you quickly execute the same commands on all the computers in your environment with less opportunity for error. Chapter 3. Before you install 45
  • 54. Prerequisites: You must know the hostname of each computer that you want to include in the working collective. You must be logged on to the Control workstation as a user with root authority. Procedure: Have a file that lists the hostnames for all of the RS/6000 SP workstations that will participate in your partitioned database system. To set up the working collective to distribute commands to this list of workstations: 1. Create a file called eeelist.txt that will list the hostnames for all of the workstations that will participate in the working collective. For example, assume that you wanted to create a working collective with two SP nodes called workstation1 and workstation2. The contents of this file would be: workstation1 workstation2 2. Update the working collective environment variable. To update this list, enter the following command: export WCOLL=path/eeelist.txt where path is the location where eeelist.txt was created, and eeelist.txt is the name of the file that you created that lists the RS/6000 SP workstations in the working collective. 3. Verify that the names in the working collective are indeed the workstations that you want, by entering the following command: dsh -q You will receive output similar to the following: Working collective file /eeelist.txt: workstation1 workstation2 Fanout: 64 Related tasks: v “Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX)” on page 47 Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX) This task describes the steps for copying the contents of your DB2 product CD to the shared DB2 home file system. Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD is a step unique to partitioned database installations. If you are installing DB2 to multiple computers simultaneously, installing from hard disk is significantly faster than installing from the product CD. This method is recommended for any system that includes more than four computers. 46 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 55. The alternative is to NFS mount the product CD file system from each computer. You may want to mount the product CD from each computer if you do not have enough disk space on the DB2 home file system or if you are installing on fewer than four computers. Procedure: To mount the DB2 product CD and copy its contents: 1. Create a directory on your /db2home file system for the DB2 product CD: mkdir /db2home/db2cdrom 2. Copy the contents of the product CD to directory that you created: cp -R /cdrom /db2home/db2cdrom Related tasks: v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements v “Installation requirements System)” on page 27 for for for for DB2 DB2 DB2 DB2 clients clients clients clients and and and and servers servers servers servers (AIX)” on page 21 (HP-UX)” on page 23 (Linux)” on page 24 (Solaris Operating Verifying that NFS is running (Linux and UNIX) Before setting up a database partitioned environment, you should verify that Network File System (NFS) is running on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database system. Prerequisites: NFS must be running on each computer. Procedure: To verify that NFS is running on each computer: AIX Type the following command on each computer: lssrc -g nfs The Status field for NFS processes should indicate active. After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products. The required processes are: rpc.lockd rpc.statd HP-UX and Solaris Operating Environment Type the following command on each computer: showmount -e hostname Enter the showmount command without the hostname parameter to check the local system. Chapter 3. Before you install 47
  • 56. If NFS is not active you will receive a message similar to the following: showmount: ServerA: RPC: Program not registered After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products: rpc.lockd rpc.statd You can use the following commands to check for these processes: ps -ef | grep rpc.lockd ps -ef | grep rpc.statd Linux Type the following command on each computer: showmount -e hostname Enter the showmount command without the hostname parameter to check the local system. If NFS is not active you will receive a message similar to the following: showmount: ServerA: RPC: Program not registered After you have verified that NFS is running on each system, you should check for the specific NFS processes required by DB2 products. The required process is rpc.statd. You can use the ps -ef | grep rpc.statd commands to check for this process. If these processes are not running, consult your operating system documentation. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Linux and UNIX) This task describes the steps required to verify port range availability on participating computers. The port range is used by the Fast Communications Manager (FCM). FCM is a feature of DB2 that handles communications between database partition servers. When you install the instance-owning database partition server on the primary machine, DB2 reserves a port range according to the specified number of database partition servers participating in partitioned database environment. The default range is four ports. The DB2 Setup wizard must be able to reserve an identical port range when database partition servers are installed on participating computers; the port range needs to be free on each of the database partition servers. This task should be done after you install the instance-owning database partition server and before you install any participating database partition servers. Prerequisites: To make changes to the services file, you require root authority. Procedure: 48 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 57. To verify the port range availability on participating computers: 1. Open the services file located in the /etc/services directory. 2. Locate the ports reserved for the DB2 Fast Communications Manager (FCM). The entries should appear similar to the following: DB2_db2inst1 DB2_db2inst1_1 DB2_db2inst1_2 DB2_db2inst1_END 60000/tcp 60001/tcp 60002/tcp 60003/tcp DB2 reserves the first four available ports after 60000. 3. On each participating computer, open the services file and verify that the ports reserved for DB2 FCM in the services file of the primary computer are not being used. 4. In the event that the required ports are in use on a participating computer, identify an available port range for all computers and update each service file, including the services file on the primary computer. Related concepts: v “Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX)” on page 30 Related reference: v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90 Creating file system for a partitioned database environment (Linux and UNIX) Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (AIX) This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes how to: v create a DB2 home file system v NFS export the home file system v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or greater. Later installation instruction will ask that you copy the contents of the DB2 product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product CD will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to copying the contents to disk. Prerequisites: You must have: v root authority to create a file system v Created a volume group where your file system is to physically reside. Procedure: To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the following steps: Chapter 3. Before you install 49
  • 58. Creating the DB2 home file system Log on to the primary computer (ServerA) in your partitioned database system as a user with root authority and create a home file system for your partitioned database system called /db2home. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter the smit jfs command. Click on the Add a Journaled File System icon. Click on the Add a Standard Journaled File System icon. Select an existing volume group from the Volume Group Name list where you want this file system to physically reside. Set the SIZE of file system (SIZE of file system (in 512–byte blocks) (Num.) field). This sizing is enumerated in 512-byte blocks, so if you only need to create a file system for the instance home directory, you can use 180 000, which is about 90 MB. If you need to copy the product CD image over to run the installation, you can create it with a value of 20 000 000, which is about 1 GB. Enter the mount point for this file system in the MOUNT POINT field. In this example, the mount point is /db2home. Set the Mount AUTOMATICALLY at system restart field to yes. The remaining fields can be left to the default settings. Click OK. Exporting the DB2 home file system 1. NFS export the /db2home file system so that it is available to all of the computers that will participate in your partitioned database system: a. Enter the smit nfs command. b. Click on the Network File System (NFS) icon. c. Click on the Add a Directory to Exports List icon. d. Enter the pathname and directory to export (for example, /db2home) in the PATHNAME of directory to export field. e. Enter the name of each workstation that will participate in your partitioned database system in the HOSTS allowed root access field. Use a comma (,) as the delimiter between each name. For example, ServerA, ServerB, ServerC. If you are using a high speed interconnect, we recommend that you specify the high speed interconnect names for each workstation in this field as well. The remaining fields can be left to the default settings. f. Click OK. 2. Log out. Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer Log on to each participating computer (ServerB, ServerC, ServerD) and NFS mount the file system that you exported by performing the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 50 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers Enter the smit nfs command. Click on the Network File System (NFS) icon. Click on the Add a File System for Mounting icon. Enter the pathname of the mount point in the PATHNAME of the mount point (Path) field. The path name of the mount point is where you should create the DB2 home directory. For this example, use/db2home.
  • 59. 5. Enter the pathname of the remote directory in the PATHNAME of the remote directory field. For our example, you should enter the same value that you entered in the PATHNAME of the mount point (Path) field. 6. Enter the hostname of the machine where you exported the file system in the HOST where the remote directory resides field. This is the hostname of the machine where the file system that you are mounting was created. To improve performance, you may want to NFS mount the file system that you created over a high speed interconnect. If you want to mount this file system using a high speed interconnect, you must enter its name in the HOST where remote directory resides field. You should be aware that if the high speed interconnect ever becomes unavailable for some reason, every workstation that participates in your partitioned database system will lose access to the DB2 home directory. 7. Set the MOUNT now, add entry to /etc/filesystems or both? field to both. 8. Set the /etc/filesystems entry will mount the directory on system RESTART field to yes. 9. Set the MODE for this NFS file system field to read-write. 10. Set the Mount file system soft or hard field to soft. A soft mount means that the computer will not try for an infinite period of time to remotely mount the directory. A hard mount means that your machine will infinitely try to mount the directory. This could cause problems in the event of a system crash. We recommend that you set this field to soft. The remaining fields can be left to the default settings. 11. Ensure that this file system is mounted with the Allow execution of SUID and sgid programs in this file system? field set to Yes. This is the default setting. 12. Click OK. 13. Log out. Related tasks: v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX)” on page 46 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (HP-UX) This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes how to: v create a DB2 home file system v NFS export the home file system v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or greater. Later installation instruction will ask that you copy the contents of the DB2 product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product CD Chapter 3. Before you install 51
  • 60. will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to copying the contents to disk. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to create a file system. Procedure: To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the following steps: Creating the DB2 home file system Manually: 1. Select a disk partition or logical volume and use a utility like newfs to create this file system. For more information, enter the man newfs command. 2. Mount this file system locally and add an entry to the /etc/fstab file so that this file system is mounted each time the system is restarted. Using SAM: 1. Enter the sam command. 2. Click on the Disks and File Systems icon. 3. Click on the File Systems icon. 4. Select Action —> Add Local File systems. 5. You can choose either to use or not to use a Logical Volume Manager. It is recommended to use a Logical Volume Manager. Exporting the DB2 home file system If you are installing DB2 ESE on a cluster of HP-UX systems, you can add an entry to the /etc/exports file to export this file system via NFS, or use SAM. To export the file system using SAM: 1. Enter the sam command. 2. Click on the Networking and Communications icon. 3. Click on the Networked File Systems icon. 4. Click on the Exported Local File Systems icon. 5. Click the Action menu and select Add Exported File System 6. Enter the pathname and directory to export (for example, /db2home) in the Local Directory Name field. 7. Click the User Access button and add read-write access for the other computers in the instance in the window that appears. 8. Click the Root User Access button and add access for the other computers in the instance in the window that appears. 9. Click OK. 10. Log out. Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer After you have exported this file system, you must mount this file system on each of the participating computers. 52 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 61. On 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. each participating computer: Enter the sam command. Click on the Networking and Communications icon. Click on the Networked File Systems icon. Click on the Mounted Remote File Systems icon. Click the Action menu and select Add Remote File System Using NFS 6. Enter the mount point of the file system to mount (for example, /db2home) in the Local Directory Name field. 7. Enter the name of the remote server (for example, ServerA) in the Remote Server Name field. 8. Enter the pathname and directory of the remote directory (for example, /db2home) in the Remote Directory Name field. 9. Set the Mount At System Boot option on. 10. Click the NFS Mount Options button and set soft mount type and the Allow SetUID Execution option on. A soft mount means that the computer will not try for an infinite period of time to remotely mount the directory. A hard mount means that your machine will infinitely try to mount the directory. This could cause problems in the event of a system crash. We recommend that you set this field to soft. The remaining fields can be left to the default settings. 11. Click OK. 12. Log out. Related tasks: v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX)” on page 46 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Linux) This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes how to: v create a DB2 home file system v NFS export the home file system v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer You must have a file system that is available to all machines that will participate in your partitioned database system. This file system will be used as the instance home directory. For configurations that use more than one machine for a single database instance, NFS (Network File System) is used to share this file system. Typically, one machine in a cluster is used to export the file system using NFS, and the remaining machines in the cluster mount the NFS file system from this machine. The machine that exports the file system has the file system mounted locally. For more command information, see your Linux distribution documentation. Procedure: Chapter 3. Before you install 53
  • 62. To create this file system: 1. On one machine, select a disk partition or create one using fdisk. 2. Using a utility like mkfs, create a file system on this partition. The file system should be large enough to contain the necessary DB2 program files as well as enough space for your database needs. 3. Locally mount the file system you have just created and add an entry to the /etc/fstab file so that this file system is mounted each time the system is rebooted. For example: /dev/hda1 /db2home ext3 defaults 1 2 4. To automatically export an NFS file system on Linux at boot time, add an entry to the /etc/exports file. Be sure to include all of the host names participating in the cluster as well as all of the names that a machine might be known as. Also, ensure that each machine in the cluster has root authority on the exported file system by using the ″root″ option. The /etc/exportfs is an ASCII file which contains the following type of information: /db2home machine1_name(rw) machine2_name(rw) To export the NFS directory, run /usr/sbin/exportfs -r 5. On each of the remaining machines in the cluster, add an entry to the /etc/fstab file to NFS mount the file system automatically at boot time. As in the following example, when you specify the mount point options, ensure that the file system is mounted at boot time, is read-write, is mounted hard, includes the bg (background) option, and that setuid programs can be run properly. fusion-en:/db2home /db2home nfs rw,timeo=7, hard,intr,bg,suid,lock where fusion-en represents the machine name. 6. NFS mount the exported file system on each of the remaining machines in the cluster by entering the following command: mount /db2home If the mount command fails, use the showmount command to check the status of the NFS server. For example: showmount -e fusion-en This showmount command should list the file systems which are exported from the machine named fusion-en. If this command fails, the NFS server may not have been started. Run the following command as root on the NFS server to start the server manually: /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs restart Assuming the present run level is 3, you can have this command run automatically at boot time by renaming K20nfs to S20nfs under the following directory: /etc/rc.d/rc3.d. 7. Ensure that the following steps were successful: a. On a single machine in the cluster, you have created a file system to be used as the instance and home directory. b. If you have a configuration that uses more than one machine for a single database instance, you have exported this file system using NFS. 54 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 63. c. You have mounted the exported file system on each of the remaining machines in the cluster. Related tasks: v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX)” on page 46 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris Operating Environment) This task is part of setting up your partitioned database system. This task describes how to: v create a DB2 home file system v NFS export the home file system v NFS mount the home file system from each participating computer It is recommended that you create a home file system that is 1 GB in size or greater. Later installation instructions will ask that you copy the contents of the DB2 product CD to a directory on your DB2 home file system. The DB2 product CD will temporarily occupy approximately 700 MB of space. A DB2 instance will require at least 50 MB of space. If you do not have 1 GB of free space, you can mount the DB2 product CD from each participating computer as an alternative to copying the contents to disk. There are a number of ways to create a local file system on a Solaris Operating Environment system. If you want to use a product, such as Veritas, to create the file system, refer to the product’s documentation. Prerequisites: You must have root authority to create a file system. Procedure: To create, NFS export, and NFS mount the DB2 home file system, perform the following steps: Creating the DB2 home file system 1. On the primary computer (ServerA), select a disk partition or configure one using the format command. When using the format command, ensure that the disk partitions being used do not overlap. Overlapping partitions can cause data corruption or file system failures. Ensure you have correctly entered the command, as mistakes can cause serious problems. 2. Using a utility like newfs or mkfs, create a file system on this partition. The file system should be large enough to contain the necessary DB2 files as well as other non-DB2 files. A minimum of 300 MB is recommended. 3. Locally mount the file system you have just created and add an entry to the /etc/vfstab file so that this file system is mounted each time the system is rebooted. For example: /dev/dsk/c1t0d2s2 /dev/rdsk/c1t0d2s2 /db2home ufs 2 yes - Exporting the DB2 home file system Chapter 3. Before you install 55
  • 64. 1. To automatically export an NFS file system on Solaris at boot time, add an entry to the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. Be sure to include all of the host names of the participating computers as well as all of the names that a given computer might be known as. Also, ensure that each computer has root authority on the exported file system by using the ″root″ option. In the following example, an entry for a four computer partitioned database system is added to the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. The participating computers, ServerB, ServerC, and ServerD, are given permission to mount the file system /db2home, which will be used as the DB2 home file system. share -F nfs -o rw=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com, root=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com rw=ServerC.torolab.ibm.com, root=ServerC.torolab.ibm.com rw=ServerD.torolab.ibm.com, root=ServerD.torolab.ibm.com -d "homes" /db2home If a computer is known by more than one hostname, all aliases must be included in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. For example, if ServerB was also known by the name ServerB-tokenring, the entry in the /etc/dfs/dfstab for ServerB would appear as follows: rw=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com:ServerB-tokenring.torolab.ibm.com, root=ServerB.torolab.ibm.com:ServerB-tokenring.torolab.ibm.com 2. On each of the participating computers, add an entry to the /etc/vfstab file to NFS mount the file system automatically at boot time. As in the following example, when you specify the mount point options, ensure that the file system is mounted at boot time, is read-write, is mounted hard, includes the bg (background) option, and that suid programs can be run properly: ServerA:/db2home - /db2home nfs - yes rw,hard,intr,bg,suid Mounting the DB2 home file system from each participating computer 1. Create and NFS mount the exported file system on each of the participating computers in the partitioned database environment by entering the following commands: mkdir /db2home mount /db2home If the mount command fails, use the showmount command to check the status of the NFS server. For example: showmount -e ServerA This showmount command should list the file systems which are exported from the computer named ServerA. If this command fails, the NFS server may not have been started. To start the server manually, run the following commands as root on the NFS server: /usr/lib/nfs/mountd /usr/lib/nfs/nfsd -a 16 These commands are run automatically at boot time if there are any entries in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file. After starting the NFS server, export the NFS file system again by running the following command: sh /etc/dfs/dfstab 56 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 65. Ensure that you have completed the following steps: 1. On a single computer in the partitioned database environment, you have created a file system to be used as the instance and home directory. 2. You have exported this file system via NFS. 3. You have mounted the exported file system on each participating computer. Related tasks: v “Copying the contents of the DB2 product CD to your computer (Linux and UNIX)” on page 46 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Creating required users (Linux and UNIX) Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (AIX) Three users and groups are required to operate a DB2 database. The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules. If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you. Table 9. Required users and groups (AIX) Required user User name Group name Instance owner db2inst1 db2iadm1 Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 Administration server user dasusr1 dasadm1 If the Administration server user is an existing user, this user must exist on all the participating computers before the installation. If you use the DB2 Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance-owning computer, then this user is also created (if necessary) during the response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists on the participating computers, the user must have the same primary group. Prerequisites: v You must have root authority to create users and groups. v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may be required to when defining DB2 users and groups. Restrictions: The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming rules, and those of DB2. Procedure: To create all three of these users, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the primary computer. Chapter 3. Before you install 57
  • 66. 2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following commands: mkgroup id=999 db2iadm1 mkgroup id=998 db2fadm1 mkgroup id=997 dasadm1 3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home). mkuser id=1004 pgrp=db2iadm1 groups=db2iadm1 home=/db2home/db2inst1 core=-1 data=491519 stack=32767 rss=-1 fsize=-1 db2inst1 mkuser id=1003 pgrp=db2fadm1 groups=db2fadm1 home=/db2home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1 mkuser id=1002 pgrp=dasadm1 groups=dasadm1 home=/home/dasusr1 dasusr1 4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following commands: passwd db2inst1 passwd db2fenc1 passwd dasusr1 5. Log out. 6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1, db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system. 7. Log out. 8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Related reference: v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32 Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (HP-UX) Three users and groups are required to operate DB2. The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules. If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you. Table 10. Required users and groups Required user Group name Instance owner db2inst1 db2iadm1 Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 Administration server user 58 User name dasusr1 dasadm1 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 67. If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2 Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group. Prerequisites: v You must root authority to create users and groups. v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may be required to when defining DB2 users and groups. Restrictions: The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming rules, and those of DB2. Procedure: To create all three of these users, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the primary computer. 2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following commands: groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1 groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1 groupadd -g 997 dasadm1 3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home). useradd -u 1004 db2iadm1 -d /db2home/db2inst1 -m db2inst1 useradd -u 1003 db2fadm1 -d /db2home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1 useradd -u 1002 dbasgrp -d /home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1 4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following commands: passwd db2inst1 passwd db2fenc1 passwd dasusr1 5. Log out. 6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1, db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system. 7. Log out. 8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Related reference: Chapter 3. Before you install 59
  • 68. v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32 Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Linux) Three users and groups are required to operate a DB2 database. The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules. If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you. Table 11. Required users and groups Required user user name group name Instance owner db2inst1 db2iadm1 Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 Administration server user dasusr1 dasadm1 If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2 Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group. Prerequisites: v You must have root authority to create users and groups. v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Additional steps may be required when defining DB2 users and groups. Restrictions: The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming rules, and those of DB2. Procedure: To create all three of these users, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the primary computer. 2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the Administration Server (for example, dasadm1) by entering the following commands: groupadd -g 999 db2iadm1 groupadd -g 998 db2fadm1 groupadd -g 997 dasadm1 Ensure that the specific numbers you are using do not currently exist on any of the machines. 60 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 69. 3. Create a user that belongs to each group that you created in the previous step using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (db2home). useradd -u 1004 -g db2iadm1 -m -d /db2home/db2inst1 db2inst1 -p password1 useradd -u 1003 -g db2fadm1 -m -d /db2home/db2fenc1 db2fenc1 -p password2 useradd -u 1002 -g dasadm1 -m -d /home/dasusr1 dasusr1 -p password3 4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following commands: passwd db2inst1 passwd db2fenc1 passwd dasusr1 5. Log out. 6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1, db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system. 7. Log out. 8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Related reference: v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32 Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Solaris Operating Environment) Three users and groups are required to operate DB2. The user and group names used in the following instructions are documented in the following table. You may specify your own user and group names as long as they adhere to your system naming rules and DB2 naming rules. If you are planning to use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your DB2 product, the DB2 Setup wizard will create these users for you. Table 12. Required users and groups Required user user name group name Instance owner db2inst1 db2iadm1 Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 Administration server user dasusr1 dasadm1 If an existing user is used as the Administration server user, this user must also exist on all the participating computers before installation. If you use the DB2 Setup wizard to create a new user for the Administration server on the instance owning computer, then this user will also be created (if necessary) during the response file installations on the participating computers. If the user already exists on the participating computers, it must have the same primary group. Prerequisites: v You must have root authority to create users and groups. Chapter 3. Before you install 61
  • 70. v If you manage users and groups with NIS/NIS+ or similar security software, see NIS/NIS+ considerations before creating users and groups. Restrictions: The user names you create must conform to both your operating system’s naming rules, and those of DB2. Procedure: To create all three of these users, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to the primary computer. 2. Create a group for the instance owner (for example, db2iadm1), the user that will execute UDFs or stored procedures (for example, db2fadm1), and the Administration Server (for example, dasadm1 ) by entering the following commands: groupadd id=999 db2iadm1 groupadd id=998 db2fadm1 groupadd id=997 dasadm1 3. Create a user for each group using the following commands. The home directory for each user will be the DB2 home directory that you previously created and shared (/db2home). useradd -g db2iadm1 -d /db2home/db2instl -m db2inst1 passwd mypasswrd useradd -g db2fadm1 -d /db2home/db2fenc1 -m db2fenc1 passwd mypasswrd useradd -g dbasgrp -d /export/home/dasusr1 -m dasusr1 passwd mypasswrd 4. Set an initial password for each user that you created by entering the following commands: passwd db2inst1 passwd db2fenc1 passwd dasusr1 5. Log out. 6. Log on to the primary computer as each user that you created (db2inst1, db2fenc1, and dasusr1). You may be prompted to change each user’s password since this is the first time that these users have logged onto the system. 7. Log out. 8. Create the exact same user and group accounts on each computer that will participate in your partitioned database environment. For our example, perform this task on ComputerB, ComputerC, and ComputerD. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Related reference: v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32 62 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 71. Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product Installing DB2 servers (Windows) This task describes how to start the DB2 Setup wizard on Windows. You will use the DB2 Setup wizard to define your installation and install your DB2 product on your system. Prerequisites: Before you start the DB2 Setup wizard: v If you are planning on setting up a partitioned database environment, see the "Setting up a partitioned database environment" topic. v Ensure that your system meets installation, memory, and disk requirements. v If you are planning to use LDAP on Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 to register the DB2 server in Active Directory, you should extend the directory schema before you install. v You must have a local Administrator user account with the recommended user rights to perform the installation. v Although not mandatory, it is recommended that you close all programs so that the installation program can update any files on the computer without requiring a reboot. Restrictions: v The DB2 copy name and the instance name cannot start with a numeric value. v The DB2 copy name and the instance name must be unique among all DB2 copies. v The use of XML features is restricted to a database that is defined with the code set UTF-8 and that has only one database partition. Procedure: To start the DB2 Setup wizard: 1. Log on to the system with the local Administrator account that you have defined for the DB2 installation. 2. Insert your DB2 product CD into the drive. If enabled, the auto-run feature automatically starts the DB2 Setup launchpad. If the auto-run does not work, use Windows Explorer to browse the DB2 product CD and double-click on the setup icon. 3. From the DB2 Setup launchpad, you can view installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You may want to review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking information. 4. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window will display the products available for installation. If you have no existing DB2 products installed on your computer, launch the installation by clicking Install New. Proceed through the installation following the DB2 Setup wizard's prompts. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 63
  • 72. If you have at least one existing DB2 product installed on your computer, you can: v Click Install New to create a newDB2 copy v Click Work with Existing to upgrade an existing DB2 copy, to add functionality to an existing DB2 copy, or to install an add-on product. v Click Migrate to migrate an existing DB2 Version 8 copy. 5. The DB2 Setup wizard will determine the system language, and launch the setup program for that language. Online help is available to guide you through the remaining steps. To invoke the online help, click Help or press F1. You can click Cancel at any time to end the installation. Your DB2 product will be installed, by default, in the x:Program FilesIBMsqllib directory, where x: represent the drive letter of the drive where you have installed your DB2 product. If you are installing on a system where this directory is already being used, the DB2 product installation path will have _xx added to it, where _xx are digits, starting at 01 and increasing depending on how many DB2 copies you have installed. You can also specify your own DB2 product installation path. For information on errors encountered during installation, review the installation log file located in the My DocumentsDB2LOG directory. The log file uses the following format: DB2-ProductAbrrev-DateTime.log, for example, DB2-ESE-Tue Apr 04 17_04_45 2006.log. If you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2 documentation either on your local computer or on another computer on your network, then you must install the DB2 Information Center. TheDB2 Information Center contains documentation for the DB2 database system and DB2 related products. By default, DB2 information will be accessed from the web if the DB2 Information Center is not locally installed. DB2 Express memory limits and the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter: If you are installing DB2 Express Edition or DB2 Express-C Edition on a system that has more memory than the maximum memory limit of 4GB, as outlined in the terms and conditions of the product, you need to explicitly set the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter to 4GB or less, so that the Self Tuning Memory Manager will work within your licensed memory limits. Note: If you have more than one database on that server, the sum of all database memory usage cannot exceed 4GB. You can use the Control Center or the UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION command to make this change. For example, to set the DATABASE_MEMORY limit to 4GB, enter the following command: DB2 UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION using DATABASE_MEMORY 1000000 IMMEDIATE; CONNECT RESET; Also, when using the Configuration Advisor to assist you in configuring the performance of your database, you need to set the Target Memory on the Server page to a percentage of your total system memory that will ensure you stay under the 4GB memory limit. 64 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 73. Related concepts: v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes v “DB2 database object naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 Related tasks: v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Migrating a DB2 server (Windows)” in Migration Guide v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 v “Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows)” on page 72 Related reference: v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Disk and memory requirements” on page 9 v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Windows)” on page 10 v “Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup wizard in another language” on page 105 Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX) This task describes how to start the DB2 Setup wizard on Linux and UNIX systems. The DB2 Setup wizard is used to define your installation preferences and to install your DB2 product on your system. Prerequisites: Before you start the DB2 Setup wizard: v Ensure that your system meets installation, memory, and disk requirements. v You must have root authority to perform the installation. v The DB2 product image must be available. v The DB2 Setup wizard is a graphical installer. You must have X windows software capable of rendering a graphical user interface for the DB2 Setup wizard to run on your machine. Ensure that the X windows server is running. Ensure that you have properly exported your display. For example, export DISPLAY=9.26.163.144:0. v If NIS/NIS+ or similar security software is used in your environment, you must manually create required DB2 users before you start the DB2 Setup wizard. Refer to the referenced Centralized user-management considerations topic before you begin. Restrictions: The use of XML features is restricted to a database that is defined with the code set UTF-8 and has only one database partition. Procedure: Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product 65
  • 74. To start the DB2 Setup wizard: 1. Log on to the system as a user with root authority. 2. Change to the directory where the DB2 product CD is mounted by entering the following command: cd /cdrom where /cdrom represents mount point of the DB2 product CD. 3. If you downloaded the DB2 product image, you must decompress and untar the product file. a. Decompress the product file: gzip -d product.tar.gz where product is the name of the product that you downloaded. b. Untar the product file: tar -xvf product.tar c. Change directory: cd ./product/disk1 4. Enter the ./db2setup command from the directory where the product image resides to start the DB2 Setup wizard. 5. The IBM DB2 Setup Launchpad opens. From this window, you can view installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You may want to review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking information. 6. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window will display the products available for installation. Launch the installation by clicking Install New. Proceed through the installation following the DB2 Setup wizard's prompts. Once you have initiated the installation, proceed through the DB2 Setup wizard installation panels and make your selections. Installation help is available to guide you through the remaining steps. To invoke the installation help, click Help or press F1. You can click Cancel at any time to end the installation. Your DB2 product will be installed, by default, in one of the following directories: AIX, HP-UX, Solaris Operating Environment /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 Linux /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1 If you are installing on a system where this directory is already being used, the DB2 product installation path will have _xx added to it, where _xx are digits, starting at 01 and increasing depending on how many DB2 copies you have installed. You can also specify your own DB2 product installation path. The installation logs, db2setup.log and db2setup.err will be located, by default, in the /tmp directory. You can specify the location of the log files. The db2setup.log file captures all DB2 installation information including errors. The db2setup.err file captures any error output that is returned by Java (for example, exceptions and trap information). 66 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 75. There is no longer a db2setup.his file. Instead, the DB2 installer saves a copy of the db2setup.log file in the DB2_DIR/install/logs/ directory, and renames it db2install.history. If the name already exists, then the DB2 installer renames it db2install.history.xxxx, where xxxx is 0000-9999, depending on the number of installations you have on that machine. Each installation copy has a separate list of history files. If an installation copy is removed, the history files under this install path will be removed as well. This copying action is done near the end of the installation and if the program is stopped or aborted before completion, then the history file will not be created. On Linux 32-bit, if you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2 documentation either on your local computer or on another computer on your network, then you must install the DB2 Information Center. The DB2 Information Center contains documentation for the DB2 database system and DB2 related products. DB2 Express memory limits and the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter: If you are installing DB2 Express Edition or DB2 Express-C Edition on a system that has more memory than the maximum memory limit of 4GB, as outlined in the terms and conditions of the product, you need to explicitly set the DATABASE_MEMORY configuration parameter to 4GB or less, so that the Self Tuning Memory Manager will work within your licensed memory limits. Note: If you have more than one database on that server, the sum of all database memory usage cannot exceed 4GB. You can use the Control Center or the UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION command to make this change. For example, to set the DATABASE_MEMORY limit to 4GB, enter the following command: DB2 UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION using DATABASE_MEMORY 1000000 IMMEDIATE; CONNECT RESET; Also, when using the Configuration Advisor to assist you in configuring the performance of your database, you need to set the Target Memory on the Server page to a percentage of your total system memory that will ensure you stay under the 4GB memory limit. Related concepts: v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 v “DB2 database object naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Notification and contact list setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Tools catalog database and DB2 administration server (DAS) scheduler setup and configuration” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Migrating a DB2 server (Linux and UNIX)” in Migration Guide Related reference: v “Centralized user-management considerations (Linux and UNIX)” on page 32 v “UPDATE ADMIN CONFIGURATION command” in Command Reference v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product 67
  • 76. Setting up a partitioned database environment This topic describes how to set up a partitioned database environment. You will use the DB2 Setup wizard to install your instance-owning database server and to create the response files that will in turn be used to create your participating database servers. If you have purchased DB2 Enterprise Server Edition (ESE), you can create a partitioned instance. This option is called Database Partitioning Feature. A database partition is part of a database that consists of its own data, indexes, configuration files, and transaction logs. A partitioned database is a database with two or more partitions. To take advantage of the Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) of ESE, you must have a DPF license key in addition to the ESE license key. Prerequisites: v During instance creation, a number of ports equal to the number of participating DB2 database servers that the instance is capable of supporting will be reserved in the /etc/services on Linux and UNIX and in the %SystemRoot%system32 driversetcservices on Windows. These ports will be used by the Fast Communication Manager. The reserved ports will be in the following format: DB2_InstanceName DB2_InstanceName_1 DB2_InstanceName_2 DB2_InstanceName_END The only mandatory entries are the beginning (DB2_InstanceName) and ending (DB2_InstanceName_END) ports. The other entries are reserved in the services file so that other applications do not use these ports v To support multiple participating DB2 database servers, the computer on which you want to install DB2 must belong to an accessible domain. However, you can add local partitions to this computer even though the computer doesn’t belong to a domain. v On Linux and UNIX systems, a remote shell utility is required for partitioned database systems. DB2 supports the following remote shell utilities: – rsh – ssh By default, DB2 uses rsh when executing commands on remote DB2 nodes, for example, when starting a remote DB2 database partition. To use the DB2 default, the rsh-server package must be installed (see table below). For a comparison between rsh and ssh, see the “Security issues when installing DB2” section of the Administration Guide: Implementation. If you choose to use the rsh remote shell utility, inetd (or xinetd) must be installed and running as well. If you choose to use the ssh remote shell utility, you need to set the DB2RSHCMD registry variable immediately after the DB2 installation is complete. If this registry variable is not set, rsh is used. For more information on the DB2RSHCMD registry variable, see the Performance Guide book. Restrictions: The use of XML features prohibits later use of the Data Partitioning Feature (DPF). 68 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 77. Procedure: To set up a partitioned database environment: 1. Install your instance-owning database server using the DB2 Setup wizard. For detailed instructions, see the appropriate “Installing DB2 servers” topic. v On the Select installation, response files creation, or both window, ensure that you select the Save my installation settings in a response files option. After the installation has completed, two files will be copied to the directory specified in the DB2 Setup wizard: PROD_ESE.rsp and PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp. The PROD_ESE.rsp file is the response file for instance-owning database servers. The PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp file is the response file for participating database servers. v On the Set up partitioning options for the DB2 instance window, ensure that you select Multiple partition instance, and enter the maximum number of logical partitions. 2. Make the DB2 product source code available to all participating computers in the partitioned database environment. 3. Distribute the participating database servers response file (PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp). 4. Install a DB2 database server on each of the participating computers using the db2setup command on Linux and UNIX, or the setup command on Windows: Linux and UNIX Go to the directory where the DB2 product code is available and run: ./db2setup -r /responsefile_directory/response_file_name Windows setup -r x:responsefile_directoryresponse_file_name For example, here is the command using the PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp as the response file: Linux and UNIX Go to the directory where the DB2 product code is available and run: ./db2setup -r /db2home/PROD_ESE_addpart.rsp where /db2home is the directory where you have copied the response file. Windows setup -r c:resp_filesPROD_ESE_addpart.rsp where c:resp_files is the directory where you have copied the response file. Related tasks: v “Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (HP-UX)” on page 51 v “Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Linux)” on page 53 v “Creating a file system for a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 55 v “Creating a DB2 home file system for a partitioned database system (AIX)” on page 49 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (AIX)” on page 57 Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product 69
  • 78. v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (HP-UX)” on page 58 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Linux)” on page 60 v “Creating required users for a DB2 server installation in a partitioned database environment (Solaris Operating Environment)” on page 61 v “Installing database partition servers on participating computers using a response file (Linux and UNIX)” on page 70 v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63 v “Updating environment settings for a partitioned DB2 installation (AIX)” on page 43 Related reference: v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90 Installing database partition servers on participating computers using a response file (Linux and UNIX) In this task you will use the response file you created using the DB2 Setup wizard to install database partition servers on participating computers. Prerequisites: v You have installed DB2 on the primary computer using the DB2 Setup wizard and have created a response file for installing on participating computers. v You must have root authority on participating computers. Procedure: To install additional database partition servers using a response file: 1. As root, log on to a computer that will participate in the partitioned database environment. 2. Change to the directory where you copied the contents of the DB2 product CD-ROM: cd /db2home/db2cdrom 3. Enter the ./db2setup command as follows: ./db2setup -r /responsefile_directory/response_file_name In our example, we saved the response file, AddPartitionResponse.file, to the /db2home directory. The command for our example, would be: ./db2setup -r /db2home/AddPartitionResponse.file 4. Check the messages in the log file when the installation finishes. You must log onto each participating computer and perform a response file installation. If you want your DB2 product to have access to DB2 documentation either on your local computer or on another computer on your network, then you must install the DB2 Information Center. The DB2 Information Center contains documentation for the DB2 database system and DB2 related products. Related tasks: 70 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 79. v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on page 122 v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Upgrading your 32-bit DB2 instances to 64-bit instances (Windows) DB2 32-bit and 64-bit instances cannot exist on the same system. Any 32-bit instances will be removed when you install any DB2 Version 9 64-bit database product. You cannot install a 64-bit DB2 Version 9 copy on a system with multiple 32-bit DB2 Version 9 copies. Procedure: If you have more than one 32-bit DB2 Version 9 copy on your system and want to upgrade to 64-bit, perform the following steps: 1. Move all your 32-bit instances over to one DB2 copy using the db2iupdt command 2. Uninstall the 32-bit DB2 copies, except for the one where you have moved all your 32-bit instances over to 3. Install DB2 Version 9 64-bit which will upgrade your 32-bit DB2 Version 9 instances to 64-bit DB2 Version 9 instances. Related tasks: v “Listing instances” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “db2iupdt - Update instances command” in Command Reference DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2 UDB Version 8 (Windows) DB2 Version 9 on Windows introduces the ability to install multiple copies of DB2 servers on the same system. Each DB2 installation copy can either be at the same level or at a different level of DB2. When installing a DB2 product on a machine that already has a DB2 Version 9 copy installed, the ″Work with Existing″ window appears, which provides a list of DB2 installations to work with. Through this interface, you can install a new DB2 copy or work with and update an existing DB2 copy. Installing DB2 Version 9 on a machine with an existing DB2 UDB Version 8 copy: Co-existence with a DB2 UDB Version 8 copy does have some restrictions: v The DB2 UDB Version 8 DAS cannot administer DB2 Version 9 installations. A DB2 Version 9 DAS can administer both DB2 Version 9 and DB2 UDB Version 8 instances. v The DB2 UDB Version 8 must always be the default DB2 copy on the physical machine. Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product 71
  • 80. v Multiple DB2 32-bit and 64-bit versions cannot co-exist on Windows x64. If you install a DB2 64-bit version of the product, then the DB2 32-bit version will be removed from the system. . Testing DB2 Version 9 before migrating an existing DB2 UDB Version 8 copy: You can install a copy of DB2 Version 9 on a machine that has DB2 UDB Version 8 already installed on it. You can create DB2 Version 9 instances and use them to test your environment at a DB2 Version 9 level. When you have completed your testing and are satisfied with DB2 Version 9, you can migrate your instances using the db2imigr command and migrate the DB2 Administration Server using the dasmigr command. You can optionally remove DB2 UDB Version 8 and then set the DB2 Version 9 copy to be the default DB2 copy. For more information about migration, see the migration related links. Related concepts: v “Multiple DB2 copies on the same computer (Windows)” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Migrating a DB2 server (Windows)” in Migration Guide v “Migrating DB2 servers in Microsoft Cluster Server environments” in Migration Guide v “Migrating instances” in Migration Guide v “Migrating the DB2 Administration Server (DAS)” in Migration Guide Related reference: v “dasmigr - Migrate the DB2 administration server command” in Command Reference v “db2imigr - Migrate instance command” in Command Reference Using the Default DB2 Selection wizard (Windows) You can use the Default DB2 Selection wizard to select the default DB2 copy on your computer. Applications will use this default DB2 copy by default. Applications which are not enabled to use multiple DB2 copies will only be able to use the default DB2 copy. The otherDB2 copies on your computer can still be accessed and used. You can launch the Default DB2 Selection wizard by running the db2swtch.exe command located in the sqllibbin directory of your DB2 copy. Procedure: v Read the introductory text on the Introduction panel and then click Next. v On the Select your default DB2 copy, the wizard will display the DB2 copies that have been detected on your computer. v Select the DB2 copy that you want to set as your new default DB2 copy. v Click Next to set the selected DB2 copy as the default DB2 copy on this computer. 72 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 81. v The Summary panel displays which DB2 copy has been set as your default DB2 copy on this computer. v Click Finish to close the Default DB2 Selection wizard. Related tasks: v “DB2 Version 9 co-existence and migration with DB2 UDB Version 8 (Windows)” on page 71 Applying DB2 product licenses The DB2 product installation can apply an unlicensed version of the DB2 product. To correctly license your product, you must register the proper license key with your DB2 product. The license key and fully detailed license registration procedures are available on the product Activation CD. If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard. Prerequisites: You must have installed your DB2 product. Procedure: To enable DB2 features or to be in compliance with your current product entitlement, you might be required to: v Install a new DB2 product license key v Install the DB2 code that will install the appropriate license keys Related tasks: v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command” on page 81 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on page 82 Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Working with existing DB2 copies If you have an existing DB2 Version 9 copy installed on your system, when you start the DB2 Launchpad, it will display the available products that you can install. You can install a new DB2 copy or you can also click Work with Existing. The Work with Existing window opens and displays the existing DB2 copies on your system and the possible operation that can be performed. For example on Windows, the actions shown are add new function, install and upgrade. Add-on products are always installed using the Work with Existing option. Related tasks: v “Installing DB2 servers (Windows)” on page 63 Chapter 4. Installing your DB2 server product 73
  • 82. 74 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 83. Part 2. After DB2 server installation © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 75
  • 84. 76 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 85. Chapter 5. After you install Verifying the installation Verifying the installation using the command line processor (CLP) You can verify the installation by creating a sample database and running SQL commands to retrieve sample data. Prerequisites: v The sample database component, found in the features selection, must be installed on your system and is included in a typical installation. v You require a user with SYSADM authority. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. verify the installation: Log on to the system as a user with SYSADM authority. Start the database manager by entering the db2start command. Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database. This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete. The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE when it is created. 4. Connect to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in department 20, and reset the database connection. Enter the following commands from the command line processor (CLP): connect to sample "select * from staff where dept = 20" connect reset After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to free up disk space. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database. Related tasks: v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and Windows)” on page 78 Verifying access to the registry on the instance-owning computer (Windows) This step is only required if you are setting up a partitioned database environment. After installing DB2 on a participating computer, you should verify that you have access to the registry on the instance-owning computer. This verification step should be run from all participating computers. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 77
  • 86. Prerequisites: You must have DB2 installed. Procedure: To verify access to the registry on the instance-owning computer: 1. From a command prompt, type the regedit command. The Registry Editor window opens. 2. Click the Registry menu item. 3. Select Connect Network Registry. 4. Type the name of the instance-owning computer in the Computer name field. If the information is returned, then you have successfully verified that you have access to the registry on the instance-owning computer. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and Windows) You should verify that the DB2 server installation has completed successfully by accessing data from the SAMPLE database. Prerequisites: v You must have the Control Center and the First Steps component installed to perform this task. First Steps is listed as a getting started component in the feature selection window in the DB2 Setup wizard. It is installed as part of a Typical installation or may be selected when performing a Custom installation. The Control Center component is only available on Linux (x86 and AMD64/EM64T only) and Windows. Procedure: 1. On Linux, log on to the system as the instance owner. 2. On Windows, click Start and, select Programs -> IBM DB2 -> [DB2 Copy Name] -> Set-up Tools > First Steps. On Linux and Windows, you can start First Steps by typing the db2fs command. 3. Select Database Creation in the First Steps launchpad. On the Database Creation page, you will see links to the DB2 Information Center for creating the SAMPLE database and the Create SAMPLE Database button. Click Create SAMPLE Database to launch the Create SAMPLE Databases window. 4. You have the options to choose the type of database objects to create and the database location. You can choose the drive on which to create the SAMPLE database on Windows, and the directory on which to create the SAMPLE database on Linux. 5. This command may take a few minutes to process. When the SAMPLE database has been created, you will receive a completion message. Click OK. 6. Launch the Control Center. On Windows, click Start and, select Programs -> IBM DB2 -> [DB2 Copy Name] -> General Administration Tools —> Control Center.. On Linux systems, type the db2cc command 78 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 87. 7. In the left pane of the Control Center screen, expand the object tree to view the SAMPLE database and SAMPLE database objects. Select the Tables object to view the SAMPLE database tables in the right pane of the Control Center screen. Right-click on the table name staff and select Query. In the command editor window, click the run button to execute the query and see the result set. After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to free up disk space. However, you will need to keep the sample database if you plan to make use of the sample applications. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database. Related tasks: v “Verifying the installation using the command line processor (CLP)” on page 77 Related reference: v “db2fs - First steps command” in Command Reference Verifying a partitioned database server installation (Linux and UNIX) To verify that your DB2 server installation was successful, you will create a sample database and run SQL commands to retrieve sample data and to verify that the data has been distributed to all participating database partition servers. Prerequisites: You have completed all of the installation steps. Procedure: To create the SAMPLE database: 1. Log on to the primary computer (ServerA) as the instance-owning user. In our installation example, db2inst1 is the instance-owning user. 2. Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database. By default, the sample database will be created in the instance-owner’s home directory. In our example /db2home/db2inst1/ is the instance owner’s home directory. The instance owner’s home directory is the default database path. This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete. The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE when it is created. 3. Start the database manager by entering the db2start command. 4. Enter the following DB2 commands from a DB2 command window to connect to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in department 20: db2 connect to sample db2 "select * from staff where dept = 20" 5. To verify that data has been distributed across database partition servers, enter the following commands from a DB2 command window: db2 select distinct dbpartitionnum(empno) from employee; Chapter 5. After you install 79
  • 88. The output will list the database partitions used by the employee table. The specific output will depend on the number of database partitions in the database and the number of database partitions in the database partition group that is used by the tablespace where the employee table was created. After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to free up disk space. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database. Related reference: v “db2sampl - Create sample database command” in Command Reference Verifying a partitioned database environment installation (Windows) To verify that your DB2 server installation was successful, you will create a sample database and run SQL commands to retrieve sample data and to verify that the data has been distributed to all participating database partition servers. Prerequisites: You have completed all of the installation steps. Procedure: To create the SAMPLE database: 1. Log on to the primary computer (ServerA). as user with SYSADM authority. 2. Enter the db2sampl command to create the SAMPLE database. This command may take a few minutes to process. There is no completion message; when the command prompt returns, the process is complete. The SAMPLE database is automatically cataloged with the database alias SAMPLE when it is created. 3. Start the database manager by entering the db2start command. 4. Enter the following DB2 commands from a DB2 command window to connect to the SAMPLE database, retrieve a list of all the employees that work in department 20: db2 connect to sample db2 "select * from staff where dept = 20" 5. To verify that data has been distributed across database partition servers, enter the following commands from a DB2 command window: select distinct dbpartitionnum(empno) from employee; The output will list the database partitions used by the employee table. The specific output will depend on the number of database partitions in the database and the number of database partitions in the database partition group that is used by the tablespace where the employee table was created. After you have verified the installation, you can remove the SAMPLE database to free up disk space. However, it is useful to keep the sample database, if you plan to make use of the sample applications. Enter the db2 drop database sample command to drop the SAMPLE database. 80 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 89. Related tasks: v “Setting up a partitioned database environment” on page 68 DB2 product licensing DB2 product license files Each DB2 product and feature has a license file associated with it. The license file is found on the associated activation CD supplied as a part of the product media. You should register the license file before using the DB2 product. The management of licenses for DB2 products or features is done through the License Center within the Control Center, or, through the db2licm License Management Tool command. To assist you in managing your licenses, a compliance report lists the compliance or noncompliance of DB2 features with your current product entitlement. If you installed a DB2 product with a try and buy license and now want to upgrade to a full license, you do not need to reinstall the DB2 product. You simply upgrade your license. This is also true for upgrading from one license type to another, for example upgrading from a User license to a CPU license. For details see Upgrading your DB2 license. Related concepts: v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “DB2 installation methods” on page 3 Related tasks: v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command” on page 81 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on page 82 v “Upgrading a Try and Buy license” on page 84 Related reference: v “db2licm - License management tool command” in Command Reference Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command You should register a DB2 product or feature license key on each computer where the DB2 product or feature is installed. For more information on these product options, see the DB2 Version 9 packaging information on the web. If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard. Procedure: Chapter 5. After you install 81
  • 90. To register a DB2 license key, enter: db2licm -a filename where filename is the full pathname and filename for the license file that corresponds to the product or feature. The license file is located in the /db2/license directory located on the Activation CD associated with your DB2 product or feature. To register a DB2 product or feature license key as the instance owner: 1. Create the instance environment and become the instance owner. 2. Register the DB2 license with the appropriate command: v For Linux and UNIX operating systems: db2instance_path/adm/db2licm -a filename.lic v For Windows operating systems: db2instance_pathadmdb2licm -a filename.lic where db2instance_path is where the DB2 instance was created and filename is the full pathname and filename for the license file that corresponds to the product you have purchased. The license file is in the /db2/license directory located in the root directory of your Activation CD for the product or feature. Related concepts: v “License management” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on page 82 Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center You should register a DB2 product or feature license key where the DB2 product or feature is installed. For more information on these product options, see the DB2 Version 9 packaging information on the web. If you want the product or feature license key added automatically during the installation, you need to copy the license key to the /db2/license directory of the installation image before launching the DB2 Setup wizard. Procedure: To register a DB2 license key: 1. Start the DB2 Control Center and select License Center from the Tools menu. 2. Select the system for which you are installing a license. Select the instance on your systems. Select the product from installed products. The Installed Products field will display the name of the product that you have installed. 3. Select Add from the License menu. 4. In the Add License window, select the license file: 82 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 91. v On Windows servers: x:db2licenselicense_filename.lic v On Linux or UNIX servers: /cd/db2/license/license_filename.lic where x: or /cd represents the CD drive or mount point containing the DB2 Activation CD for the DB2 product or feature. 5. Click Apply to add the license key. Related concepts: v “License management” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command” on page 81 Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Checking DB2 license compliance Each DB2 product and feature has a license file associated with it. The license file should be registered before using the DB2 product or feature. The License Center lists product information on the main panel. DB2 products that do not have the license registered show the License Type as not registered. To verify license compliance of DB2 features, you can generate a compliance report. The compliance report lists DB2 features out of compliance with your current product entitlement. Each DB2 feature status is listed as either: v In compliance: indicating no violations are detected v Violation: indicating the feature is not licensed and has been used. Note: Some DB2 functionality is only available under license when purchased as part of a DB2 feature. You can generate a compliance report using the License Center or the db2licm command. Procedure: To generate the compliance report from the License Center, select License→Generate Compliance Report. To generate compliance report using the db2licm command, enter the following command from the command line: v For Linux and UNIX operating systems: db2instance_path/adm/db2licm -g filename v For Windows operating systems: db2instance_pathadmdb2licm -g filename where v db2instance_path is where the DB2 instance was created. v filename specifies the file name where output is to be stored. Chapter 5. After you install 83
  • 92. DB2 features showing a violation must have the license key registered using either the License Center or the db2licm command. See the related links for details. Related concepts: v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on page 82 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the db2licm command” on page 81 Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 v “db2licm - License management tool command” in Command Reference Upgrading a Try and Buy license If you installed a DB2 product with a try and buy license and now want to upgrade to a full license you need to upgrade the product license key. You can also use this method to upgrade from one license type to another. For example, to upgrade from a User license to a CPU license. Restrictions: You cannot use this method to upgrade from one DB2 product to another. Procedure: To upgrade your DB2 license: 1. Download the activation CD from Passport Advantage. 2. Register the license key using the License Center. Related concepts: v “License Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “DB2 installation methods” on page 3 Related tasks: v “Checking DB2 license compliance” on page 83 v “Registering a DB2 product or feature license key using the License Center” on page 82 Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Changing DB2 product editions Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and UNIX) When changing from one DB2 product edition to another, the following steps are required to preserve all information from the original DB2 product installation. For 84 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 93. example, if you are upgrading from DB2 Workgroup Server Edition to DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, these steps must be completed or you will have to install future fix packs on both products. Do not run the db2_deinstall command. This action will remove all DB2 product components. You do not need to create a new instance during the installation of the new DB2 product edition. Existing instances will be reconfigured by running the db2iupdt command when the installation is complete. Prerequisites: Your system must comply with the system prerequisites for the DB2 product edition that you are installing. Restrictions: These instructions apply only when switching among the same version of a DB2 product. Procedure: To change DB2 product editions: 1. Complete the DB2 product installation for the new edition. 2. To add the license file for the new product edition you must run the db2licm command. db2licm -a LicenseFile The license file is found in the db2/license directory on the product activation CD. 3. Log in as a user with root authority. 4. Obtain a list of the names of all instances on your system using the db2ilist command: DB2DIR/db2ilist where DB2DIR by default is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1 on Linux and /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1 on UNIX-based operating systems. 5. To reconfigure the instances, run the db2iupdt command on all instances: DB2DIR/bin/db2iupdt InstanceName where InstanceName represents the name of the instance. 6. When all the instances have been updated, you must remove the product signature from the DB2 product that was originally installed by performing the following actions. Find the product signature by opening the ComponentList.htm file in the db2/PLAT directory, on the DB2 product CD. PLAT is the platform that the DB2 product is installed on. Related tasks: v “Changing DB2 product editions (Windows)” on page 86 Related reference: v “DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information” on page 3 Chapter 5. After you install 85
  • 94. Changing DB2 product editions (Windows) When changing from one DB2 product edition to another, the following steps are required to preserve all information from the original DB2 product installation. For example, if you are upgrading from DB2 Workgroup Server Edition to DB2 Enterprise Server Edition, these steps must be completed or you will have to install future fix packs on both products. Prerequisites: Your system must comply with the system prerequisites for the new DB2 product edition that you are installing. If there were any fix packs installed on the original DB2 product edition, you should obtain the image for that fix pack level and install that directly, as opposed to installing the DB2 product and then applying the fix pack. The reason for this is that each DB2 fix pack image is a full refresh image. Restrictions: These instructions apply only when switching among the same version of a DB2 product on Windows. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. change DB2 product editions: Log on as a user with administrator access. Stop all DB2 processes and services. Insert the DB2 product CD of the new edition you are installing, into the drive. The IBM DB2 product Launchpad will open. 4. The DB2 product Setup Wizard will determine the system language, and will start the setup program for that language. To start the DB2 product Setup wizard manually a. Click Start and select the Run option. b. In the Open field, type the following command: x:setup /i language where x represents your CD drive and language is the territory identifier for your language, for example, EN for English. If the /i flag is not specified, the installation program will run in the default language of the operating system Click OK 5. Start the installation and proceed by following the setup program’s prompts. Online help is available to guide you through these steps. To invoke the online help, click Help or press F1. You can click Cancel at any time to end the installation. 6. To add the license file for the new product edition you must run the db2licm command. db2licm -a LicenseFile The license file is found in the db2license directory on the product activation CD. 86 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 95. 7. Remove the original edition of the DB2 product using the Add/Remove Control Panel window. 8. When the original DB2 product edition is completely uninstalled, reactivate the administration server and the services using the db2start command or the Services window of the Control Panel. Related tasks: v “Changing DB2 product editions (Linux and UNIX)” on page 84 Related reference: v “DB2 Version 9 product and packaging information” on page 3 Applying fix packs A DB2 fix pack contains updates and fixes for problems (Authorized Program Analysis Reports, or ″APARs″) found during testing at IBM, as well as fixes for problems reported by customers. Every fix pack is accompanied by a document, called APARLIST.TXT, that describes the fixes it contains. Each fix pack contains a Readme and a set of Release Notes: v The fix pack Readme provides instructions for installing and uninstalling the fix pack. v The Release Notes contain information about changes to the product. You can access and read both the fix pack Readme and the Release Notes by selecting the link for fix pack downloads at the DB2 Support Web site before installing a DB2 product. The DB2 Support Web site is found at http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support.html. Fix packs are cumulative. This means that the latest fix pack for any given version of DB2 contains all of the updates from previous fix packs for the same version of DB2. It is recommended that you keep your DB2 environment running at the latest fix pack level to ensure problem-free operation. There are two types of fix pack images: v A fix pack for each individual DB2 product. This fix pack can be applied on an existing installation of the product, or can be used to perform a full product installation where there is no existing DB2 installation. v Universal fix pack (Linux or UNIX only). A universal fix pack services installations where more than one DB2 product has been installed. If national languages have been installed, you also require a separate national language fix pack. The national language fix pack can only be applied if it is at the same fix pack level as the installed DB2 product. If you are applying a universal fix pack, you must apply both the universal fix pack and the national language fix pack to update the DB2 products. When installing a fix pack on a multi-partition database system, the system must be offline and all computers participating in the instance must be upgraded to the same fix pack level. Prerequisites: Each fix pack has specific prerequisites. See the Readme that accompanies the fix pack for details. Chapter 5. After you install 87
  • 96. Procedure: 1. Access and download the latest DB2 fix pack by selecting the link for fix pack downloads from the DB2 Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/software/ data/db2/udb/support.html. Related reference: v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference v “installFixPack - Update installed DB2 products command” in Command Reference v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference Setting up notification and contact lists For your DB2 product to contact you or others regarding the health of your databases, you will have to set up notification and contact lists. If you did not do this during the DB2 installation, you can manually set up these lists. Procedure: To set up notification and contact lists: 1. Log on as the instance owner or a user with SYSADM authority. 2. If the SMTP server was not specified during the installation process, you can configure it manually using the following command: db2 update admin cfg using smtp_server host1 where host1 represents the TCP/IP host name for the SMTP server used for e-mail notification. You can also update this information using the Create Database with Automatic Maintenance wizard, or the Troubleshoot Alert Notification wizard in the Health Center. 3. If you want the contact information to be located on a remote DB2 administration server (DAS), you can specify the contact_host parameter using the following command: db2 update admin cfg using contact_host host2 where host2 represents the TCP/IP host name where the DAS is running. If the contact_host parameter is not specified, the DAS assumes the contact information is local. 4. Turn on the scheduler using the following command: db2 update admin cfg using sched_enable on 5. For these changes to take effect, you need to restart the DAS use the following commands: db2admin stop db2admin start 6. From either the Task Center or the Health Center, click the Contacts icon in the Task bar. Select System name, then click Add Contact. Type in contact information and then click OK. Related reference: v “db2admin - DB2 administration server command” in Command Reference 88 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 97. Password rules When choosing a password, be aware that: v On UNIX, your password can be a maximum of eight (8) characters. v On Windows, your password can be a maximum of fourteen (14) characters. Some operating systems may have more password rules, such as minimum length and simplicity. See the appropriate operating system documentation. Related concepts: v “General naming rules” in Administration Guide: Implementation Adding your user ID to the DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS user groups (Windows) After successfully completing a DB2 installation, you now have to add users to the DB2ADMNS or the DB2USERS groups to give them access to your DB2 product. The DB2 installer creates two new groups. You can either use a new name or accept the default names. The default group names are DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS. Prerequisites: v You must have installed a DB2 product. v You must have selected the Enable operating system security check box on the Enable operating system security for DB2 object panel during the installation of your DB2 product. Procedure: To add users to the appropriate group: 1. Launch the Computer Management tool. Click Start and Select -> Settings -> Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. 2. Select Local Users and Groups. 3. Select Users. 4. Select the user you want to add. 5. Click Properties. 6. Click the Member Of tab. 7. Click Add. 8. Select the appropriate group. 9. Click OK. If you did the install and chose not to enable the new security feature you can still do so post-install by running the db2extsec.exe command. Once you enable this security feature using the db2extsec.exe command, you have two options for backing out: 1. Run the db2extsec.exe command again immediately WITHOUT making any additional changes to the system. If there have been any changes at all made to the system you must use option 2. 2. Add the Everyone group to the DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS groups. Chapter 5. After you install 89
  • 98. Related concepts: v “Extended Windows security using DB2ADMNS and DB2USERS groups” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “Required user accounts for installation of DB2 server products (Windows)” on page 12 v “db2extsec - Set permissions for DB2 objects command” in Command Reference DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg This topic provides information about the format of the node configuration file (db2nodes.cfg). The db2nodes.cfg file is used to define the database partition servers that participate in a DB2 instance. The db2nodes.cfg file is also used to specify the IP address or host name of a high-speed interconnect, if you want to use a high-speed interconnect for database partition server communication. The format of the db2nodes.cfg file is as follows: nodenumber hostname logicalport netname resourcesetname nodenumber, hostname, logicalport, netname, and resourcesetname are defined in the following section. The format of the db2nodes.cfg file on Windows is different than the same file on UNIX. On Windows, the column format is: nodenumber hostname computername logicalport netname nodenumber resourcesetname A unique number, between 0 and 999, that identifies a database partition server in a partitioned database system. To scale your partitioned database system, you add an entry for each database partition server to the db2nodes.cfg file. The nodenumber value that you select for additional database partition servers must be in ascending order, however, gaps can exist in this sequence. You can choose to put a gap between the nodenumber values if you plan to add logical partition servers and wish to keep the nodes logically grouped in this file. This entry is required. hostname The TCP/IP host name of the database partition server for use by the FCM. This entry is required. logicalport Specifies the logical port number for the database partition server. This field is used to specify a particular database partition server on a workstation that is running logical database partition servers. DB2 reserves a port range (for example, 60000 - 60003) in the etc/services file for inter-partition communications at the time of installation. This logicalport field in db2nodes.cfg specifies which port in that range you want to assign to a particular logical partition server. If there is no entry for this field, the default is 0. However, if you add an entry for the netname field, you must enter a number for the logicalport field. 90 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 99. If you are using logical database partitions, the logicalport value you specify must start at 0 and continue in ascending order (for example, 0,1,2). Furthermore, if you specify a logicalport entry for one database partition server, you must specify a logicalport for each database partition server listed in your db2nodes.cfg file. This field is optional only if you are not using logical database partitions or a high speed interconnect. Specifies the host name or the IP address of the high speed interconnect for FCM communication. netname If an entry is specified for this field, all communication between database partition servers (except for communications as a result of the db2start, db2stop, and db2_all commands) is handled through the high speed interconnect. This parameter is required only if you are using a high speed interconnect for database partition communications. resourcesetname The resourcesetname defines the operating system resource that the node should be started in. The resourcesetname is for process affinity support, used for MLNs, provided with a string type field formerly known as quadname. This parameter is only supported on AIX, HP-UX, and Solaris Operating Environment. On AIX 5.2, this concept is known as ″resource sets″ and on Solaris Operating Environment it is called ″projects″. Refer to your operating systems documentation for more information on resource management. On HP-UX, the resourcename parameter is a name of PRM group. Refer to ″HP-UX Process Resource Manager. User Guide. (B8733-90007)″ documentation from HP for more information. On Windows operating systems, process affinity for a logical node can be defined through the db2processor registry variable. See the related links section for more information on system environment variables. The netname parameter must be specified if the resourcesetname parameter is used. Example configurations: Use the following example configurations to determine the appropriate configuration for your environment. One computer, four database partitions servers If you are not using a clustered environment and want to have four database partition servers on one physical workstation called ServerA, update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows: 0 1 2 3 ServerA ServerA ServerA ServerA 0 1 2 3 Chapter 5. After you install 91
  • 100. Two computers, one database partition server per computer If you want your partitioned database system to contain two physical workstations, called ServerA and ServerB, update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows: 0 1 ServerA ServerB 0 0 Two computers, three database partition server on one computer If you want your partitioned database system to contain two physical workstations, called ServerA and ServerB, and ServerA is running 3 database partition servers, update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows: 4 6 8 9 ServerA ServerA ServerA ServerB 0 1 2 0 Two computers, three database partition servers with high speed switches If you want your partitioned database system to contain two computers, called ServerA and ServerB (with ServerB running two database partition servers), and use a high speed interconnect called switch1 and switch2, update the db2nodes.cfg file as follows: 0 1 2 ServerA ServerB ServerB 0 0 1 switch1 switch2 switch2 Examples using resourcename: These restrictions apply to the following examples: v This example shows the usage of resourcename when there is no high speed interconnect in the configuration. v The netname is fourth column and a hostname also can be specified on that column where there is no switch name and you want to use resourcename. The fifth parameter is resourcename if it is defined. The resource group specification can only show as the fifth column in the db2nodes.cfg file. This means that for you to specify a resource group, you must also enter a fourth column. The fourth column is intended for a high speed switch. v If you do not have a high speed switch or you do not want to use it, you must then enter the hostname (same as the second column). In other words, the DB2 database management system does not support column gaps (or interchanging them) in the db2nodes.cfg files. This restriction already applies to the first three columns, and now it applies to all five columns. AIX example: Here is an example of how to set up the resource set for AIX 5.2. In this example, there is one physical node with 32 processors and 8 logical database partitions (MLNs). This example shows how to provide process affinity to each MLN. 1. Define resource sets in /etc/rset: DB2/MLN1: owner group perm resources DB2/MLN2: 92 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00000,sys/cpu.00001,sys/cpu.00002,sys/cpu.00003
  • 101. owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00004,sys/cpu.00005,sys/cpu.00006,sys/cpu.00007 DB2/MLN3: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00008,sys/cpu.00009,sys/cpu.00010,sys/cpu.00011 DB2/MLN4: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00012,sys/cpu.00013,sys/cpu.00014,sys/cpu.00015 DB2/MLN5: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00016,sys/cpu.00017,sys/cpu.00018,sys/cpu.00019 DB2/MLN6: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00020,sys/cpu.00021,sys/cpu.00022,sys/cpu.00023 DB2/MLN7: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00024,sys/cpu.00025,sys/cpu.00026,sys/cpu.00027 DB2/MLN8: owner group perm resources = = = = db2inst1 system rwr-rsys/cpu.00028,sys/cpu.00029,sys/cpu.00030,sys/cpu.00031 2. Enable memory affinity by typing the following command: vmo -p -o memory_affinity=1. 3. Give instance permissions to use resource sets: chuser capabilities= CAP_BYPASS_RAC_VMM,CAP_PROPAGATE,CAP_NUMA_ATTACH db2inst1 4. Add the resource set name as the fifth column in db2nodes.cfg: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta regatta DB2/MLN1 DB2/MLN2 DB2/MLN3 DB2/MLN4 DB2/MLN5 DB2/MLN6 DB2/MLN7 DB2/MLN8 HP-UX example: The sample shows how to use PRM groups for CPU shares on machine with 4 CPUs and 4 MLNs and we want to set 24% of CPU share per MLN, leaving 4% for other applications. The DB2 instance name is db2inst1. 1. Edit GROUP section of /etc/prmconf: Chapter 5. After you install 93
  • 102. OTHERS:1:4:: db2prm1:50:24:: db2prm2:51:24:: db2prm3:52:24:: db2prm4:53:24:: 2. Add instance owner entry to /etc/prmconf: db2inst1::::OTHERS,db2prm1,db2prm2,db2prm3,db2prm4 3. Initialize groups and enable CPU manager by entering the following command: prmconfig -i prmconfig -e CPU 4. Add PRM group names as a fifth column to db2nodes.cfg: 1 2 3 4 voyager voyager voyager voyager 0 1 2 3 voyager voyager voyager voyager db2prm1 db2prm2 db2prm3 db2prm4 PRM configuration (steps 1-3) may be done using interactive GUI tool xprm. Linux example: On Linux operating systems, the resourcesetname column defines a number that corresponds to a Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) node on the system. The numactl system utility must be available in addition to a 2.6 kernel with NUMA policy support. Refer to the man page for numact1 for more information about NUMA support on Linux operating systems. This example shows how to set up a four node NUMA computer with each logical node associated with a NUMA node. 1. Ensure that NUMA capabilities exist on your system. 2. Issue the following command: $ numactl --hardware Output similar to the following displays: available: 4 node 0 size: node 0 free: node 1 size: node 1 free: node 2 size: node 2 free: node 3 size: node 3 free: nodes (0-3) 1901 MB 1457 MB 1910 MB 1841 MB 1910 MB 1851 MB 1905 MB 1796 MB 3. In this example, there are four NUMA nodes on the system. Edit the db2nodes.cfg file as follows to associate each Multiple Logical Node (MLN) with a NUMA node on the system: 0 1 2 3 hostname hostname hostname hostname 0 1 2 3 hostname hostname hostname hostname 0 1 2 3 Solaris Operating Environment example: Here is an example of how to set up the project for Solaris Version 9. In this example, we have 1 physical node with 8 processors: one CPU will be used for the default project, three (3) CPUs will used by the Application Server, and four (4) CPUs for DB2. The instance name is db2inst1. 94 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 103. 1. Create a resource pool configuration file using an editor. For this example, the file will be called pool.db2. Here’s the content: create system hostname create pset pset_default (uint pset.min = 1) create pset db0_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1) create pset db1_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1) create pset db2_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1) create pset db3_pset (uint pset.min = 1; uint pset.max = 1) create pset appsrv_pset (uint pset.min = 3; uint pset.max = 3) create pool pool_default (string pool.scheduler="TS"; boolean pool.default = true) create pool db0_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS") create pool db1_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS") create pool db2_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS") create pool db3_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS") create pool appsrv_pool (string pool.scheduler="TS") associate pool pool_default (pset pset_default) associate pool db0_pool (pset db0_pset) associate pool db1_pool (pset db1_pset) associate pool db2_pool (pset db2_pset) associate pool db3_pool (pset db3_pset) associate pool appsrv_pool (pset appsrv_pset) 2. Edit the /etc/project file to add the DB2 projects and appsrv project as follows: system:0:::: user.root:1:::: noproject:2:::: default:3:::: group.staff:10:::: appsrv:4000:App Serv project:root::project.pool=appsrv_pool db2proj0:5000:DB2 Node 0 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db0_pool db2proj1:5001:DB2 Node 1 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db1_pool db2proj2:5002:DB2 Node 2 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db2_pool db2proj3:5003:DB2 Node 3 project:db2inst1,root::project.pool=db3_pool 3. Create the resource pool: # poolcfg -f pool.db2. 4. Activate the resource pool: # pooladm -c 5. Add the project name as the fifth column in db2nodes.cfg file: 0 1 2 3 hostname hostname hostname hostname 0 1 2 3 hostname hostname hostname hostname db2proj0 db2proj1 db2proj2 db2proj3 Related tasks: v “Updating the node configuration file (Linux and UNIX)” on page 95 v “Verifying port range availability on participating computers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 48 Related reference: v “System environment variables” in Performance Guide Updating the node configuration file (Linux and UNIX) The node configuration file (db2nodes.cfg), located in the instance owner’s home directory, contains configuration information that tells DB2 which servers participate in an instance of the partitioned database environment. A db2nodes.cfg file exists for each instance in a partitioned database environment. Chapter 5. After you install 95
  • 104. The db2nodes.cfg file must contain one entry for each server participating in the instance. When you create an instance, the db2nodes.cfg file is automatically created and an entry for the instance-owning server is added. For example, when you created the DB2 instance using the DB2 Setup wizard, on the instance-owning server ServerA, the db2nodes.cfg file is updated as follows: 0 ServerA 0 This task provides steps for updating the db2nodes.cfg file to include entries for participating computers. Prerequisites: v The DB2 application must be installed on all participating computers. v A DB2 instance must exist on the primary computer. v You must be a user with SYSADM authority. v If you plan to use a high speed switch for communication between database partition servers or if your partitioned configuration will have multiple logical partitions, review the DB2 node configuration file topic for configuration examples and information about file format of db2nodes.cfg. Restrictions: The hostnames used in the steps of the Procedure section must be fully qualified hostnames. Procedure: To update the db2nodes.cfg file: 1. Log on as the instance owner (in our example, db2inst1 is the instance owner). 2. Ensure that the DB2 instance is stopped by entering: INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2stop where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance owner (the db2nodes.cfg file is locked when the instance is running and can only be edited when the instance is stopped). For example, if your instance home directory is /db2home/db2inst1, enter the following command: /db2home/db2inst1/sqllib/adm/db2stop 3. Add an entry to the .rhosts file for each DB2 instance. Update the file by adding the following: <hostname> <db2instance> where <hostname> is the TCP/IP host name of the database server and <db2instance> is the name of the instance you use to access the database server. 4. Add an entry to the db2nodes.cfg file of each participating server. When you first view the db2nodes.cfg file, it should contain an entry similar to the following: 0 ServerA 0 This entry includes the database partition server number (node number), the TCP/IP host name of the server where the database partition server resides, and a logical port number for the database partition server. 96 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 105. If you are installing the partitioned configuration described in the installation overview, with four computers and a database partition server on each computer, the updated db2nodes.cfg should appear similar to the following: 0 1 2 3 ServerA ServerB ServerC ServerD 0 0 0 0 5. When you have finished updating the db2nodes.cfg file, enter the INSTHOME/sqllib/adm/db2start command, where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance owner. For example, if your instance home directory is /db2home/db2inst1, enter the following command: /db2home/db2inst1/sqllib/adm/db2start 6. Log out. Related reference: v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90 Enabling communications between database partition servers (Linux and UNIX) This task describes how to enable communication between the database partition servers that participate in your partitioned database system. Communication between database partition servers is handled by the Fast Communications Manager (FCM). To enable FCM, a port or port range must be reserved in the /etc/services file on each computer in your partitioned database system. Prerequisites: You must have a user ID with root authority. Restrictions: You must perform this task on participating computers only. When you create an instance using the DB2 Setup wizard, a port range is automatically reserved on the primary (instance-owning) computer. Procedure: To enable communications between servers in a partitioned database environment: 1. Log on to the primary computer (instance owning computer) as a user with root authority. 2. View the default port range that has been reserved in the /etc/services file. In addition to the base configuration, the FCM ports should appear similar to the following: db2inst1 50000/tcp #Add FCM port information DB2_db2inst1 60000/tcp DB2_db2inst1_1 60001/tcp DB2_db2inst1_2 60002/tcp DB2_db2inst1_END 60003/tcp By default, the first available four ports above 60000 are reserved. One port is for the instance-owning database partition server and three ports are for logical database partition servers that you might choose to add to the computer after installation is complete. Chapter 5. After you install 97
  • 106. DB2 port entries use the following format: DB2_instance_name port_number where: v instance_name is the name of the partitioned instance. v port_number is the port number that you reserve for database partition server communications. 3. In turn, log onto each participating computer as a root user and add identical entries to the /etc/services file. You can add a comment to describe each entry using the # comment identifier. For example: DB2_db2inst1 DB2_db2inst1_1 DB2_db2inst1_2 DB2_db2inst1_END 60000/tcp 60001/tcp 60002/tcp 60003/tcp # # # # instance-owning partition port logical partition port logical partition port logical partition port Related concepts: v “Fast communications manager (Linux and UNIX)” on page 30 Related reference: v “DB2 node configuration file - db2nodes.cfg” on page 90 Enabling the execution of remote commands (Linux and UNIX) You must update your .rhosts file in both a single-partition and partitioned database environment to execute remote commands. In a partitioned database system, each database partition server must have the authority to perform remote commands on all the other database partition servers participating in an instance. This authority can be granted by updating the.rhosts file in the home directory for the instance. Because the home directory for the instance is on the shared DB2 home file system, only one .rhosts file is required. Prerequisites: v You must have root authority. v You must know the host name of each participating computer v You must know the instance owner’s user name. Procedure: 1. Log onto the primary computer as a user with root authority. 2. Create a .rhosts file in the instance home directory. For example, if your instance home directory is /db2home/db2inst1, you can use a text editor to create the .rhosts file by entering the following command: vi /db2home/db2inst1/.rhosts 3. Add entries to the .rhosts file for each computer including the primary computer. The .rhosts file has the following format: hostname instance_owner_user_name Some systems might require a long host name to be specified, for example: ServerA.yourdomain.com. Before you add host name entries to the .rhosts file, make sure the host names in the /etc/hosts and the /etc/resolv.conf files can be resolved. 98 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 107. The INSTHOME/.rhosts file should contain entries similar to the following: ServerA.yourdomain.com ServerB.yourdomain.com ServerC.yourdomain.com ServerD.yourdomain.com db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 Rather than specifying each host name individually, you can specify the following entry in the .rhosts file, but this action may pose a security risk and should only be done in a test environment. + db2inst1 If you have specified a high speed switch (netname) in the db2nodes.cfg file, you should also add netname entries for each computer to the .rhosts file. The netname values are specified in the fourth column of the db2nodes.cfg file. A .rhosts file with high speed switch (netname) entries may look similar to the following: ServerA.yourdomain.com ServerB.yourdomain.com ServerC.yourdomain.com ServerD.yourdomain.com Switch1.yourdomain.com Switch2.yourdomain.com Switch3.yourdomain.com Switch4.yourdomain.com db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 db2inst1 An alternative to using a .rhosts file is to use /etc/hosts.equiv file. The /etc/hosts.equiv file would contain the exact same entries as the .rhosts file, but must be created on each computer. For more information about the .rhosts file or the /etc/hosts.equiv file, see your operating system documentation. Related tasks: v “Creating a DB2 home file page 49 v “Creating a DB2 home file on page 51 v “Creating a file system for v “Creating a file system for Environment)” on page 55 system for a partitioned database system (AIX)” on system for a partitioned database system (HP-UX)” a partitioned DB2 server (Linux)” on page 53 a partitioned DB2 server (Solaris Operating Enabling Control Center administration (Linux) Before you can use the Control Center to administer your partitioned database system, you must start the DB2 Administration server on all computers. Procedure: To enable Control Center administration for a partitioned database system: Start the DB2 Administration Server on each computer 1. In turn, log on to each computer (ServerA, ServerB, ServerC, ServerD) as the DB2 Administration Server user. In our example, dasusr1 is the DAS user. 2. Enter the following command to start the DB2 Administration Server: /DASHOME/das/bin/db2admin start Chapter 5. After you install 99
  • 108. where DASHOME is the home directory for the DB2 Administration Server. In our example, the DASHOME is /db2home/dasusr1. Related concepts: v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Starting and stopping the DB2 administration server (DAS)” in Administration Guide: Implementation 100 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 109. Part 3. Appendixes © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 101
  • 110. 102 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 111. Appendix A. Language support Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows) The interface language of DB2 is the language that appears in messages, help, and graphical tool interfaces. When installing DB2, you have the option of installing support for one or more languages. If, at some time after installation, you want to change the interface language for DB2 to one of the other installed interface languages, use the steps outlined in this task. Do not confuse languages supported by DB2 with languages supported by the DB2 interface. Languages supported by DB2, that is, languages that data can exist in, are a superset of languages supported by the DB2 interface. Prerequisites: The DB2 interface language you want to use must be installed on your system. DB2 interface languages are selected and installed when you install DB2 using the DB2 Setup wizard. If you change the interface language of DB2 to a supported interface language that has not been installed, the DB2 interface language will default to the operating system language first, and if that is not supported, English. Procedure: Changing the interface language for DB2 on Windows requires that you change the default language setting for your Windows operating system. To change the DB2 interface language on Windows: 1. Through the Control Panel on your Windows operating system, select Regional Options. 2. In the Regional Options dialog window, change the default language setting for the system to the language in which you want to interface with DB2. Refer to your operating system help for additional information about changing the default system language. Related tasks: v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center” on page 132 Related reference: v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105 v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 103
  • 112. Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and UNIX) The interface language of the DB2 product is the language that appears in messages, help, and graphical tool interfaces. When installing your DB2 product, you have the option of installing support for one or more languages. If, at some time after installation, you want to change the interface language to one of the other installed interface languages, use the steps outlined in this task. Do not confuse languages supported by the DB2 product with languages supported by the DB2 interface. Languages supported by the DB2 product, that is, languages that data can exist in, are a superset of languages supported by the DB2 interface. Prerequisites: Support for the DB2 interface language you want to use must be installed on your system. DB2 interface language support is selected and installed when you install DB2 using the DB2 Setup wizard. If you change the interface language of the DB2 product to a supported interface language that has not been installed, the DB2 interface language will default to the operating system language first, and if that is not supported, English. DB2 interface language support is selected and installed when you install your DB2 product using the DB2 Setup wizard or by using the National Language Package. Procedure: To check which public locales are available in your system, run the $ locale -a command. To change the DB2 interface language, set the LANG environment variable to the desired locale. For bourne (sh), korn (ksh), and bash shells: LANG=<locale> export LANG For C shell: setenv LANG <locale> For example, to interface with the DB2 product in French, you must have the French language support installed and you must set the LANG environment variable to a French locale, for example, fr_FR. Related tasks: v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center” on page 132 Related reference: v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105 v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning 104 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 113. Supported DB2 interface languages DB2 language support for DB2 interfaces can be categorized into server group languages and client group languages. Server group languages will translate most messages, help, and DB2 graphical interface elements. Client group languages will translate the DB2 Runtime Client component, which will include most messages and certain help documentation. Server group languages include: Brazilian Portuguese, Czech, Danish, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Spanish, Swedish, and Traditional Chinese. Client group languages include: Arabic, Bulgarian, Croatian, Dutch, Greek, Hebrew, Hungarian, Portuguese, Romanian, Slovak, Slovenian, and Turkish. Do not confuse languages supported by the DB2 product with languages supported by the DB2 interface. Languages supported by DB2 product that is, languages that data can exist in, are a superset of languages supported by the DB2 interface. Related tasks: v “Changing the DB2 interface language (Linux and UNIX)” on page 104 v “Changing the DB2 interface language (Windows)” on page 103 v “Capturing error and diagnostic information during migration” in Migration Guide Related reference: v “Conversion table files for euro-enabled code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning v “Conversion tables for code pages 923 and 924” in Administration Guide: Planning v “National language versions” in Administration Guide: Planning v “Supported territory codes and code pages” in Administration Guide: Planning Language identifiers for running the DB2 Setup wizard in another language If you want to run the DB2 Setup wizard in a language different from the default language on your computer, you can start the DB2 Setup wizard manually, specifying a language identifier. The language must be available on the platform where you are running the installation. Table 13. Language identifiers Language Language identifier Arabic (available on Windows only) ar Brazilian Portuguese br Bulgarian bg Chinese, Simplified cn Chinese, Traditional tw Croatian hr Czech cz Appendix A. Language support 105
  • 114. Table 13. Language identifiers (continued) Language Language identifier Danish dk Dutch nl English en Finnish fi French fr German de Greek el Hungarian hu Italian it Japanese jp Korean kr Norwegian no Polish pl Portuguese pt Romanian ro Russian ru Slovak sk Slovenian sl Spanish es Swedish se Turkish tr Related reference: v “Displaying the db2setup command in your national language” on page 106 Displaying the db2setup command in your national language The db2setup command queries the operating system to determine the existing language settings. If the language setting of your operating system is supported by db2setup, then that language will be used. If your system uses the same code pages but different locale names than those supported by the DB2 interface, you can still see the translated db2setup by setting your LANG environment variable to the appropriate value by entering the following command: bourne (sh), korn (ksh), and bash shells: LANG=<locale> export LANG C shell: setenv LANG <locale> where locale is a locale supported by the DB2 interface. Related reference: 106 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 115. v “Supported DB2 interface languages” on page 105 v “db2setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference v “setup - Install DB2 command” in Command Reference Appendix A. Language support 107
  • 116. 108 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 117. Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products Uninstalling DB2 products (Windows) Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows) This task provides steps for completely removing your DB2 product from your Windows operating system. You should only perform this task if you no longer require existing your DB2 instances and databases. If you are uninstalling the DB2 default copy, and you have other DB2 copies on your system, you should use the db2swtch command to choose a new default copy before you proceed with the uninstallation. Also, if your database administration server (DAS) is running under the copy being removed, you should move your DAS to a copy that is not being removed. Otherwise, you will have to recreate the DAS using db2admin create command after the uninstall and you might have to reconfigure the DAS for some functionality to work. Procedure: To remove your DB2 product from Windows: 1. Drop all databases. You can drop databases using the Control Center or drop database command. If you drop your databases, all of your data will be gone. 2. Stop all DB2 processes and services. This can be done through the Windows Services panel or by issuing the db2stop command. If DB2 services and processes are not stopped before attempting to remove your DB2 product, you will receive a warning containing a list of processes and services that are holding DB2 DLLs in memory. 3. You have two options for removing your DB2 product: Add/Remove Programs Accessible through the Windows Control Panel, use the Add/Remove Programs window to remove your DB2 product. Refer to your operating system’s help for more information about removing software products from your Windows operating system. db2unins command You can run the db2unins command to remove your DB2 product. Using this command, you can uninstall multiple DB2 products at the same time using the /p parameter. You can also silently uninstall DB2 products by using /u parameter which will remove the DB2 products specified in the response file. For more information, see the db2unins command topic. Unfortunately, your DB2 product cannot always be removed by using the Control Panel - Add/Remove Programs facility or using the db2unins /p command or the db2unins /u command. The following uninstallation option should ONLY be attempted if the above method fails. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 109
  • 118. To forcefully remove all DB2 copies from your Windows system, run the db2unins /f command. This command will perform a brute force uninstallation of ALL DB2 copies on the system. Everything except user data, such as DB2 databases, will be forcefully deleted. Related tasks: v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 110 v “Uninstalling a DB2 product using a response file (Windows)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Changing the Default DB2 copy after installation (Windows)” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related reference: v “db2swtch - Switch default DB2 copy command” in Command Reference v “db2unins - Uninstall DB2 database product command” in Command Reference v “DROP DATABASE command” in Command Reference Uninstalling DB2 products (Linux and UNIX) Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX) This task provides steps for removing a DB2 product from your Linux or UNIX operating system. This task is not required to install a new version of a DB2 product. Each version of a DB2 product on Linux or UNIX has a different installation path and can therefore coexist on the same computer. Procedure: To remove your DB2 product: 1. Optional: Drop all databases. You can drop databases using the Control Center or the drop database command. Database files remain intact on your file systems when you drop an instance without dropping databases first. 2. Stop the DB2 Administration Server. 3. Remove the Administration Server. 4. Stop DB2 instances. 5. Remove DB2 instances. 6. Remove DB2 products. Related concepts: v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v v v v “Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111 “Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111 “Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112 “Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112 v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Windows)” on page 109 110 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 119. Related reference: v “DROP DATABASE command” in Command Reference Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX) You must stop the DB2 administration server (DAS) before you remove your DB2 product. You only need to perform this task if the DAS is associated with the DB2 copy you are uninstalling. Procedure: To stop the DB2 administration server: 1. Log in as the DB2 administration server owner. 2. Stop the DB2 administration server by entering the db2admin stop command. Related concepts: v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 Related reference: v “db2admin - DB2 administration server command” in Command Reference Removing the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX) You must remove the DB2 administration server (DAS) before you remove your DB2 product. You only need to remove the DB2 DAS if this is the last DB2 Version 9 copy that you’re removing. Otherwise, you should run the dasupdt command from the DB2 copy that you would like to have the DB2 DAS associated with. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. remove the DB2 administration server: Log in as a user with root authority. Stop the DB2 administration server. Remove the DB2 administration server by entering the following command: DB2DIR/instance/dasdrop where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9 installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1. Related concepts: v “DB2 Administration Server” in Administration Guide: Implementation Related tasks: v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 v “Stopping the DB2 administration server (Linux and UNIX)” on page 111 Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products 111
  • 120. Stopping DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) You must stop all DB2 instances associated with the DB2 copy you are uninstalling. Instances associated with other DB2 copies should not be affected by uninstalling the current copy. Procedure: To stop a DB2 instance: 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. To obtain a list of the names of all DB2 instances associated with your current DB2 copy, enter the following command: DB2DIR/bin/db2ilist where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9 installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1. 3. Log out. 4. Log back in as the owner of the instance you want to stop. 5. Run the start up script if it is not included in .profile. . INSTHOME/sqllib/db2profile source INSTHOME/sqllib/db2cshrc (bash, Bourne, or Korn shells) (C shell) where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance. 6. You might want to save the database manager configuration file, db2systm, the db2nodes.cfg file, or user defined function or fenced stored procedure applications in INSTHOME/sqllib/function. 7. Stop the DB2 database manager by entering the db2stop force command. 8. Confirm that the instance is stopped by entering the db2 terminate command. 9. Repeat these steps for each instance. Related reference: v “db2ilist - List instances command” in Command Reference v “db2stop - Stop DB2 command” in Command Reference v “FORCE APPLICATION command” in Command Reference Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX) You can remove some or all of the DB2 instances on your system. Once an instance is removed, you can use the DB2 databases owned by the instance if you catalog them under another instance of the same release. Even though you remove the instance, the databases are still intact and can be reused unless the database files are expressly deleted. Remove DB2 instances only if you are not planning to use your DB2 products, or if you do not want to migrate existing instances to a later version of the DB2 product. Migration requires that both the new and old DB2 versions are still installed. You cannot migrate an instance if the DB2 copy it is associated with has been removed. Procedure: To remove an instance: 112 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 121. 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. Remove the instance by entering the following command: DB2DIR/instance/db2idrop InstName where DB2DIR is the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9 installation. The default installation path for UNIX is /opt/IBM/db2/V9.1. The default installation path for Linux is /opt/ibm/db2/V9.1. The db2idrop command removes the instance entry from the list of instances and removes the INSTHOME/sqllib directory, where INSTHOME is the home directory of the instance and where InstName is the login name of the instance. If you are storing any files in /sqllib directory, these files will be removed by this action. If you still need these files, you must make a copy of them before dropping the instance. 3. Optional: As a user with root authority, remove the instance owner’s user ID and group (if used only for that instance). Do not remove these if you are planning to re-create the instance. Remove the database files from the systems or drop the databases before dropping the instance if you no longer need the databases. After dropping the instance the database files remain intact. This step is optional since the instance owner and the instance owner group may be used for other purposes. Related tasks: v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 Related reference: v “db2idrop - Remove instance command” in Command Reference Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX) This task provides steps for removing DB2 products or DB2 components using the db2_deinstall command. The db2_deinstall command removes all DB2 products from your system. The doce_deinstall command removes the DB2 Information Center that is in the same install path as the doce_deinstall tool. This command is only available on the Linux operating systems. You cannot remove DB2 products using a native operating system utility, such as rpm or SMIT. Prerequisites: Before you remove DB2 products from your system: v Ensure that you have performed all steps outlined in Uninstalling your DB2 product. v You must have root authority to remove DB2 products. Procedure: To remove ALL DB2 products from a specific path: 1. Log in as user with root authority. Appendix B. Uninstalling DB2 products 113
  • 122. 2. Access the path where the DB2 products are located. To locate the path of the DB2 product to remove, see 3. Run the db2_deinstall -a command from the DB2DIR/install directory or the doce_deinstall -a command from the DB2DIR/doc/install directory, where DB2DIR is the location that you specified when you installed your DB2 product. Related tasks: v “Applying fix packs” on page 87 v “Listing DB2 products installed on your system (Linux and UNIX)” on page 29 v “Removing DB2 instances (Linux and UNIX)” on page 112 v “Uninstalling your DB2 product (Linux and UNIX)” on page 110 Related reference: v “db2_deinstall - Uninstall DB2 products or features command” in Command Reference v “db2_install - Install DB2 product command” in Command Reference v “Multiple DB2 copies roadmap” in Administration Guide: Implementation 114 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 123. Appendix C. Mounting the DB2 product CD-ROM (Linux and UNIX) Mounting the CD-ROM (AIX) Prerequisites: Root authority is required to perform this task. Procedure: To mount the CD-ROM on AIX using the System Management Interface Tool (SMIT), perform the following steps: 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. 3. Create a CD-ROM mount point by entering the mkdir -p /cdrom command, where cdrom represents the CD-ROM mount point directory. 4. Allocate a CD-ROM file system using SMIT by entering the smit storage command. 5. After SMIT starts, select File Systems —> Add / Change / Show / Delete File Systems —> CDROM File Systems —> Add CDROM File System. 6. In the Add a File System window: v Enter a device name for your CD-ROM file system in the DEVICE Name field. Device names for CD-ROM file systems must be unique. If there is a duplicate device name, you may need to delete a previously-defined CD-ROM file system or use another name for your directory. In our example, we will use /dev/cd0 as the device name. v Enter the CD-ROM mount point directory in the MOUNT POINT window. In our example, the mount point directory is /cdrom. v In the Mount AUTOMATICALLY at system restart field, select yes to enable automatic mounting of the file system. v Click OK to close the window, then click Cancel three times to exit SMIT. 7. Next, mount the CD-ROM file system by entering the smit mountfs command. 8. In the Mount a File System window: v Enter the device name for this CD-ROM file system in the FILE SYSTEM name field. In our example, the device name is /dev/cd0. v Enter the CD-ROM mount point in the Directory over which to mount field. In our example, the mount point is /cdrom. v Enter cdrfs in the Type of Filesystem field. To view the other kinds of file systems you can mount, click List. v In the Mount as READ-ONLY system field, select yes. v Accept the remaining default values and click OK to close the window. Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM, place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the CD-ROM mount point directory. Related tasks: © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 115
  • 124. v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (AIX)” on page 21 Mounting the CD-ROM (HP-UX) The following steps will enable you to successfully mount your DB2 for HP-UX product CD-ROM. Prerequisites: Root authority is required to perform this task. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. mount your DB2 for HP-UX product CD-ROM: Log in as a user with root authority. Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. If necessary, define a new directory as the mount point for the CD-ROM drive. Define /cdrom as the mount point using the mkdir /cdrom command. 4. If necessary, identify the drive device file using the ioscan -fnC disk command. This command lists all recognized CD-ROM drives and their associated device files. The filename will be something similar to /dev/dsk/c1t2d0. 5. Mount the CD drive to the mount-point directory: mount -F cdfs -o rr /dev/dsk/c1t2d0 /cdrom 6. Obtain a file listing to verify the mount using the ls /cdrom command. 7. Log out. Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM, place the CD in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the CD-ROM mount point directory. Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (HP-UX)” on page 23 v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Mounting the CD-ROM (Linux) Prerequisites: Root authority is required to perform this task. Procedure: To mount the CD-ROM on Linux: 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. Insert the CD-ROM in the drive and enter the following command: mount -t iso9660 -o ro /dev/cdrom /cdrom where /cdrom represents the mount point of the CD-ROM. 3. Log out. 116 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 125. Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM, place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the CD-ROM mount point directory. Related reference: v “DB2 product license files” on page 81 Mounting the CD-ROM (Solaris Operating Environment) Prerequisites: If you are mounting the CD-ROM drive from a remote system using NFS, the CD-ROM file system on the remote computer must be exported with root access. You must also mount that file system with root access on the local computer. Procedure: To 1. 2. 3. mount the CD-ROM on Solaris Operating Environment: Log in as a user with root authority. Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. If the Volume Manager (vold) is running on your system, the CD-ROM is automatically mounted as /cdrom/cd_label if the CD has a label or /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom if it is unlabeled. If the Volume Manager is not running on your system, complete the following steps to mount the CD-ROM: a. Determine the name of the device by entering the following command: ls -al /dev/sr* |awk ’{print "/" $11}’ This command returns the name of the CD-ROM device. In this example, the command returns the string /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2. b. Enter the following commands to mount the CD-ROM: mkdir -p /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom mount -F hsfs -o ro /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom where /dev/dsk/c0t6d0s2 represents the name of the device that was returned in the preceding step and /cdrom/unnamed_cdrom represents the CD-ROM mount directory. Note: If you are mounting the CD-ROM drive from a remote system using NFS, the CD-ROM file system on the remote machine must be exported with root access. You must also mount that file system with root access on the local machine. 4. Log out. Your CD-ROM file system is now mounted. To view the contents of the CD-ROM, place the disk in the drive and enter the cd /cdrom command where cdrom is the CD-ROM mount point directory. Related tasks: v “Installing DB2 servers (Linux and UNIX)” on page 65 Related reference: Appendix C. Mounting the DB2 product CD-ROM (Linux and UNIX) 117
  • 126. v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Solaris Operating System)” on page 27 118 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 127. Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center DB2 Information Center installation options The DB2 Information Center can be accessed from: v the IBM Web site v a server on your organization’s network v a copy installed on your computer By default, DB2 products access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site. However, if you want to access the DB2 Information Center on an intranet server or on your own computer, you must install the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Information Center CD found in your product Media Pack. The following table provides recommendations on possible options for accessing DB2 product documentation in the DB2 Information Center based on your work environment. Internet access Intranet access Recommendation Yes Yes Access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site, or access the DB2 Information Center installed on an intranet server. Yes No Access the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site. No Yes Access the DB2 Information Center installed on an intranet server. No No Access the DB2 Information Center on a local computer. Accessing the DB2 Information Center at the IBM Web site: The DB2 Information Center can be found on the Internet at http:// publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2help. If you configure your local DB2 installation to use this version of the Information Center, you will always be accessing the most up-to-date information about the DB2 product. Use the db2set command to configure the registry variables on your computer to access the DB2 Information Center from either the IBM Web site or from your computer. You can also change these variables through the DB2 GUI tools, if you have installed the DB2 GUI tools on your system. Accessing the DB2 Information Center on your computer: After installing your DB2 product, you need to install the DB2 Information Center if you want to access DB2 documentation on this computer. Use the DB2 Information Center CD in the media pack to install the Information Center. Accessing the DB2 Information Center on an intranet server: © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 119
  • 128. You may also choose to install a copy of the DB2 Information Center on an intranet server so that everyone on the intranet can have access to DB2 documentation without having to install the documentation on every machine. Using a response file for product installation, you can configure every DB2 client to access the documentation on the intranet server. The response file should contain the configuration information necessary to access the DB2 Information Center using the host name and the port number of the Information Center on the intranet server. You can also change the settings for already-installed DB2 clients to use the Information Center hosted on your Intranet. Use the db2set command or the DB2 GUI tools to change the DB2 Information Center registry variables on each computer. DB2_DOCHOST is the registry variable used for the host name, and DB2_DOCPORT is the registry variable used for the port number. These values must match those set on the intranet server where the DB2 Information Center is installed. Related concepts: v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120 Related tasks: v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on page 122 v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)” on page 124 v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server” on page 133 Related reference: v “db2set - DB2 profile registry command” in Command Reference Features of the DB2 Information Center The DB2 Information Center gives you access to all of the information you need to take full advantage of DB2 products. The DB2 Information Center also contains information for major DB2 features and components including replication, and the DB2 extenders. The following features help you find and work with the information you need. Note that some features require support for JavaScript™ be enabled. Flexible options for accessing documentation You can choose to view the DB2 documentation using the option that best meets your needs: v To view the most up-to-date information, you can access the DB2 Information Center from the IBM.com Web site at http:// publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/ v To keep network traffic inside your intranet, you can install the DB2 Information Center on a single server on your intranet v To reduce your dependence on network connections, you can install the documentation on your own computers 120 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 129. Search You can search all of the topics in the DB2 Information Center by entering a search term in the Search text field. You can retrieve exact matches by enclosing terms in quotation marks (″), and you can refine your search with wildcard operators (*, ?) and Boolean operators (AND, NOT, OR). Table of contents You can locate topics in the DB2 Information Center from the table of contents. The table of contents is organized primarily by the kind of tasks you can perform, but also includes entries for product overviews, goals, reference information, an index, and a glossary. v Product overviews describe the relationship between the available products in the DB2 family, the features offered by each of those products, and up to date release information for each of these products. v Goal categories such as installing, administering, and developing include topics that enable you to quickly complete tasks and develop a deeper understanding of the background information for completing those tasks. v Reference topics provide detailed information about a subject, including statement and command syntax, message help, and configuration parameters. v The index provides access to all of the documentation from an alphabetized index. v The glossary provides definitions of terms used in the DB2 documentation. The glossary is organized in alphabetical order by glossary term. Integrated multi-language support The DB2 Information Center displays information in the preferred language set in your browser preferences. If a topic is not available in your preferred language, the DB2 Information Center displays the English version of that topic. For local or intranet installations, only the languages installed can be displayed. The DB2 Information Center can be viewed in Firefox 1.0 and higher, Mozilla-based browsers 1.7 and higher, or Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 and higher. Related concepts: v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 Related tasks: v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on page 122 v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)” on page 124 v “Accessing different versions of the DB2 Information Center” on page 132 v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center” on page 132 v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center v “Searching the Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server” on page 133 Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center 121
  • 130. Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux) DB2 product documentation can be accessed in three ways: v at the IBM Web site v on an intranet server v on a version installed on your computer By default, DB2 products access DB2 documentation at the IBM Web site. If you want to access the DB2 documentation on an intranet server or on your own computer, you must install the documentation from the DB2 Information Center CD. Using the DB2 Setup wizard, you can define your installation preferences and install the DB2 Information Center on a computer that uses a Linux operating system. Prerequisites: Review the prerequisite information in the Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux) topic. For the most up-to-date prerequisite information, see http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/sysreqs.html. Restrictions: v You must be logged on as a user with root authority to install the DB2 Information Center. v You can only install one copy of the DB2 Version Information Center on your system. Procedure: To install the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard: 1. Log on to the system. 2. Insert and mount the DB2 Information Center product CD on your system. 3. Change to the directory where the CD is mounted by entering the following command: cd /cd 4. 5. 6. 7. 122 where /cd represents the mount point of the CD. Enter the ./db2setup command to start the DB2 Setup wizard. The DB2 Setup Launchpad opens. From the launchpad, you can view installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You should review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking information. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window displays. On the Install a Product page, if you do not have an existing DB2 Information Center installed on your computer, launch the installation by clicking Install New. If you already have an existing DB2 Version 9 Information Center installed on your computer, click Work with Existing to work with the existing DB2 Information Center. Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 131. 8. On the Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard page, click Next. The DB2 Setup wizard will guide you through the program setup process. 9. To proceed with the installation, you must accept the license agreement. On the Software License Agreement page, select Accept and click Next. 10. On the Select installation, response file creation, or both page, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer. If you want to use a response file to install the DB2 Information Center on this or other computers at a later time, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer and save my settings in a response file. You can specify where the response file will be saved. Click Next. 11. Select the languages in which the DB2 Information Center will be installed on the Select the languages to install page. By default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the /opt/ibm/db2ic/V9 directory. However, you can specify your own installation path. Click Next. 12. Configure the DB2 Information Center for incoming communication on the Specify the DB2 Information Center port page. Click Next to continue the installation. 13. Review the installation choices you have made in the Start copying files page. To change any settings, click Back. Click Finish to complete the installation of the DB2 Information Center files onto your computer. The installation logs, db2setup.log and db2setup.err will be located, by default, in the /tmp directory. You can specify the location of the log files. The db2setup.log file captures all DB2 installation information including errors. The db2setup.err file captures any error output that is returned by Java (for example, exceptions and trap information). There is no longer a db2setup.his file. Instead, the DB2 installer saves a copy of the db2setup.log file in the DB2_DIR/install/logs/ directory, and renames it todb2install.history. If db2install.history already exists, the copy of the db2setup.log will be renamed db2install.history.xxxx where xxxx are digits starting at 0000 and increasing by 1 for the next log file. DB2 Information Center daemon (Linux) The DB2 Information Center daemon is the background process that runs the Information Center on Linux. The daemon, which is part of the DB2 Information Center installation, is initialized by the script db2icd which can be found in INST_PATH/doc/bin where INST_PATH is the installation path for your DB2 product. Starting or stopping the Information Center daemon (Linux) The only time you should need to start or stop the daemon manually is when you want to change the configuration variables for the daemon. Normally, the daemon is started at system startup, according to the run levels created during the installation of the DB2 Information Center. Procedure: To stop and start the Information Center daemon: 1. Log in as a user with root authority. 2. Halt the daemon if it is already running. At a command line, enter: INIT_DIR/db2icd stop where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously. Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center 123
  • 132. 3. Change any of the variables for the daemon by editing the db2ic.conf file. Currently, you can modify the TCP port number for the documentation service, and the location of the temporary workspace used by the daemon while it is running. 4. Start the daemon. At a command line, enter: INIT_DIR/db2icd start where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously. When the daemon restarts, it uses the new environment variables. There is also an option to shut down and restart the daemon immediately. At a command line, enter: INIT_DIR/db2icd restart where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously. You can check the status of the daemon at any time. At a command line, enter: INIT_DIR/db2icd status where INIT_DIR is the installation directory of the db2icd file listed previously. The daemon returns the current status, and displays the process ID of the daemon if it is active. Related concepts: v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 Related tasks: v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)” on page 124 v “Removing DB2 products using the db2_deinstall or doce_deinstall command (Linux and UNIX)” on page 113 v “Installing a DB2 product using a response file (Linux and UNIX)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center Related reference: v “Installation requirements for DB2 clients and servers (Linux)” on page 24 v “doce_deinstall - Uninstall DB2 Information Center command” in Command Reference v “doce_install - Install DB2 Information Center command” in Command Reference Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows) DB2 product documentation can be accessed in three ways: v at the IBM Web site v on an intranet server v on a version installed on your computer 124 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 133. By default, DB2 products access DB2 documentation at the IBM Web site. If you want to access the DB2 documentation on an intranet server or on your own computer, you must install the DB2 documentation from the DB2 Information Center CD. Using the DB2 Setup wizard, you can define your installation preferences and install the DB2 Information Center on a computer that uses the Windows operating system. Prerequisites: This section lists the hardware, operating system, software, and communication requirements for installing the DB2 Information Center on Windows. Operating system requirements You require one of the following operating systems: v Windows 2000 v Windows XP v Windows Server 2003 The Information Center will run on 64-bit systems, but it does not exploit the 64-bit architecture. Only 64-bit versions of Windows that run on Intel processors are supported. Software requirements You require one of the following browsers: v Firefox 1.0 and higher v Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 and higher v Mozilla-based browsers 1.7 and higher Communication requirements You require TCP/IP. Restrictions: v You require an account with administrative privileges to install the DB2 Information Center. v You can only install one copy of the DB2 Version Information Center on your system. Procedure: To install the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard: 1. Log on to the system with the account that you have defined for the DB2 Information Center installation. 2. Insert your DB2 product CD into the drive. If enabled, the auto-run feature automatically starts the DB2 Setup launchpad. If the auto-run does not work, use Windows Explorer to browse the DB2 product CD and double-click on the setup icon. 3. From the DB2 Setup Launchpad, you can view installation prerequisites and the release notes, or you can proceed directly to the installation. You should review the installation prerequisites and release notes for late-breaking information. 4. Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window displays Appendix D. Installing the DB2 Information Center 125
  • 134. 5. On the Install a Product window, if you do not have an existing DB2 Information Center installed on your computer, launch the installation by clicking Install New. If you already have an existing DB2 Version 9 Information Center installed on your computer, click Work with Existing to work with the existing DB2 Information Center. 6. On the Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard window, click Next. The DB2 Setup wizard will guide you through the program setup process. 7. To proceed with the installation, you must accept the license agreement. On the License Agreement page, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next. 8. On the Select installation, response file creation, or both page, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer. If you want to use a response file to install the DB2 Information Center on this or other computers at a later time, select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer and save my settings in a response file. You can specify where the response file will be saved. Click Next. 9. Select the languages in which the DB2 Information Center will be installed on the Select the languages to install page. By default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the C:Program FilesIBMDB2 Information CenterVersion 9 directory. However, you can specify your own installation path. Click Next. 10. Configure the DB2 Information Center for incoming communication on the Specify the DB2 Information Center port page. Click Next to continue the installation. 11. Review the installation choices you have made in the Start copying files page. To change any settings, click Back. Click Install to copy the DB2 Information Center files onto your computer. For information on errors encountered during installation, review the installation log file located in the My DocumentsDB2LOG directory. The log file uses the following format: DB2-DOCE-DateTime.log, for example, DB2-DOCE-Tue Apr 11 08_38_35 2006.log Related concepts: v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120 v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 Related tasks: v “Installing a DB2 product using a response file (Windows)” in Installation and Configuration Supplement v “Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center” on page 132 v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on page 122 v “Starting the DB2 Information Center” in Online DB2 Information Center v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server” on page 133 Related reference: v “db2rspgn - Response file generator command (Windows)” in Command Reference 126 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 135. Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information Overview of the DB2 technical information DB2 technical information is available through the following tools and methods: v DB2 Information Center – Topics – Help for DB2 tools – Sample programs – Tutorials v DB2 books – PDF files (downloadable) – PDF files (from the DB2 PDF CD) – printed books v Command line help – Command help – Message help v Sample programs IBM periodically makes documentation updates available. If you access the online version on the DB2 Information Center at ibm.com®, you do not need to install documentation updates because this version is kept up-to-date by IBM. If you have installed the DB2 Information Center, it is recommended that you install the documentation updates. Documentation updates allow you to update the information that you installed from the DB2 Information Center CD or downloaded from Passport Advantage as new information becomes available. Note: The DB2 Information Center topics are updated more frequently than either the PDF or the hard-copy books. To get the most current information, install the documentation updates as they become available, or refer to the DB2 Information Center at ibm.com. You can access additional DB2 technical information such as technotes, white papers, and Redbooks™ online at ibm.com. Access the DB2 Information Management software library site at http://www.ibm.com/software/data/swlibrary/. Documentation feedback We value your feedback on the DB2 documentation. If you have suggestions for how we can improve the DB2 documentation, send an e-mail to db2docs@ca.ibm.com. The DB2 documentation team reads all of your feedback, but cannot respond to you directly. Provide specific examples wherever possible so that we can better understand your concerns. If you are providing feedback on a specific topic or help file, include the topic title and URL. Do not use this e-mail address to contact DB2 Customer Support. If you have a DB2 technical issue that the documentation does not resolve, contact your local IBM service center for assistance. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 127
  • 136. Related concepts: v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120 v “Sample files” in Samples Topics Related tasks: v “Invoking command help from the command line processor” in Command Reference v “Invoking message help from the command line processor” in Command Reference v “Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server” on page 133 Related reference: v “DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format” on page 128 DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format The following tables describe the DB2 library available from the IBM Publications Center at www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order. DB2 Version 9 manuals in PDF format can be downloaded from www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support/ manualsv9.html. Although the tables identify books available in print, the books might not be available in your country or region. The information in these books is fundamental to all DB2 users; you will find this information useful whether you are a programmer, a database administrator, or someone who works with DB2 Connect™ or other DB2 products. Table 14. DB2 technical information Name Available in print Administration Guide: Implementation SC10-4221 Yes Administration Guide: Planning SC10-4223 Yes Administrative API Reference SC10-4231 Yes Administrative SQL Routines and SC10-4293 Views No Call Level Interface Guide and Reference, Volume 1 SC10-4224 Yes Call Level Interface Guide and Reference, Volume 2 SC10-4225 Yes Command Reference SC10-4226 No Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference SC10-4227 Yes Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC10-4228 Yes Developing ADO.NET and OLE DB Applications SC10-4230 Yes Developing Embedded SQL Applications 128 Form Number SC10-4232 Yes Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 137. Table 14. DB2 technical information (continued) Name Form Number Available in print Developing SQL and External Routines SC10-4373 No Developing Java Applications SC10-4233 Yes Developing Perl and PHP Applications SC10-4234 No Getting Started with Database Application Development SC10-4252 Yes Getting started with DB2 GC10-4247 installation and administration on Linux and Windows Yes Message Reference Volume 1 SC10-4238 No Message Reference Volume 2 SC10-4239 No Migration Guide GC10-4237 Yes Net Search Extender Administration and User’s Guide Note: HTML for this document is not installed from the HTML documentation CD. SH12-6842 Yes Performance Guide SC10-4222 Yes Query Patroller Administration and User’s Guide GC10-4241 Yes Quick Beginnings for DB2 Clients GC10-4242 No Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers GC10-4246 Yes Spatial Extender and Geodetic SC18-9749 Data Management Feature User’s Guide and Reference Yes SQL Guide SC10-4248 Yes SQL Reference, Volume 1 SC10-4249 Yes SQL Reference, Volume 2 SC10-4250 Yes System Monitor Guide and Reference SC10-4251 Yes Troubleshooting Guide GC10-4240 No Visual Explain Tutorial SC10-4319 No What’s New SC10-4253 Yes XML Extender Administration and Programming SC18-9750 Yes XML Guide SC10-4254 Yes XQuery Reference SC18-9796 Yes Table 15. DB2 Connect-specific technical information Name Form Number Available in print DB2 Connect User’s Guide SC10-4229 Yes Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information 129
  • 138. Table 15. DB2 Connect-specific technical information (continued) Name Form Number Available in print Quick Beginnings for DB2 Connect Personal Edition GC10-4244 Yes Quick Beginnings for DB2 Connect Servers GC10-4243 Yes Table 16. WebSphere® Information Integration technical information Name Form Number Available in print WebSphere Information SC19-1020 Integration: Administration Guide for Federated Systems Yes WebSphere Information Integration: ASNCLP Program Reference for Replication and Event Publishing SC19-1018 Yes WebSphere Information Integration: Configuration Guide for Federated Data Sources SC19-1034 No WebSphere Information Integration: SQL Replication Guide and Reference SC19-1030 Yes Note: The DB2 Release Notes provide additional information specific to your product’s release and fix pack level. For more information, see the related links. Related concepts: v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127 v “About the Release Notes” in Release notes Related tasks: v “Ordering printed DB2 books” on page 130 Ordering printed DB2 books If you require printed DB2 books, you can buy them online in many but not all countries or regions. You can always order printed DB2 books from your local IBM representative. Keep in mind that some softcopy books on the DB2 PDF Documentation CD are unavailable in print. For example, neither volume of the DB2 Message Reference is available as a printed book. Printed versions of many of the DB2 books available on the DB2 PDF Documentation CD can be ordered for a fee from IBM. Depending on where you are placing your order from, you may be able to order books online, from the IBM Publications Center. If online ordering is not available in your country or region, you can always order printed DB2 books from your local IBM representative. Note that not all books on the DB2 PDF Documentation CD are available in print. 130 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 139. Note: The most up-to-date and complete DB2 documentation is maintained in the DB2 Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ db2help/. Procedure: To order printed DB2 books: v To find out whether you can order printed DB2 books online in your country or region, check the IBM Publications Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/ publications/order. You must select a country, region, or language to access publication ordering information and then follow the ordering instructions for your location. v To order printed DB2 books from your local IBM representative: – Locate the contact information for your local representative from one of the following Web sites: - The IBM directory of world wide contacts at www.ibm.com/planetwide - The IBM Publications Web site at http://www.ibm.com/shop/ publications/order. You will need to select your country, region, or language to the access appropriate publications home page for your location. From this page, follow the ″About this site″ link. – When you call, specify that you want to order a DB2 publication. – Provide your representative with the titles and form numbers of the books that you want to order. Related concepts: v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127 Related reference: v “DB2 technical library in hardcopy or PDF format” on page 128 Displaying SQL state help from the command line processor DB2 returns an SQLSTATE value for conditions that could be the result of an SQL statement. SQLSTATE help explains the meanings of SQL states and SQL state class codes. Procedure: To invoke SQL state help, open the command line processor and enter: ? sqlstate or ? class code where sqlstate represents a valid five-digit SQL state and class code represents the first two digits of the SQL state. For example, ? 08003 displays help for the 08003 SQL state, and ? 08 displays help for the 08 class code. Related tasks: v “Invoking command help from the command line processor” in Command Reference v “Invoking message help from the command line processor” in Command Reference Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information 131
  • 140. Accessing different versions of the DB2 Information Center For DB2 Version 9 topics, the DB2 Information Center URL is http:// publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v9/. For DB2 Version 8 topics, go to the Version 8 Information Center URL at: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2luw/v8/. Related tasks: v “Setting up access to DB2 contextual help and documentation” in Administration Guide: Implementation Displaying topics in your preferred language in the DB2 Information Center The DB2 Information Center attempts to display topics in the language specified in your browser preferences. If a topic has not been translated into your preferred language, the DB2 Information Center displays the topic in English. Procedure: To display topics in your preferred language in the Internet Explorer browser: 1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools —> Internet Options —> Languages... button. The Language Preferences window opens. 2. Ensure your preferred language is specified as the first entry in the list of languages. v To add a new language to the list, click the Add... button. Note: Adding a language does not guarantee that the computer has the fonts required to display the topics in the preferred language. v To move a language to the top of the list, select the language and click the Move Up button until the language is first in the list of languages. 3. Clear the browser cache and then refresh the page to display the DB2 Information Center in your preferred language. To display topics in your preferred language in a Firefox or Mozilla browser: 1. Select the Tools —> Options —> Languages button. The Languages panel is displayed in the Preferences window. 2. Ensure your preferred language is specified as the first entry in the list of languages. v To add a new language to the list, click the Add... button to select a language from the Add Languages window. v To move a language to the top of the list, select the language and click the Move Up button until the language is first in the list of languages. 3. Clear the browser cache and then refresh the page to display the DB2 Information Center in your preferred language. On some browser and operating system combinations, you might have to also change the regional settings of your operating system to the locale and language of your choice. 132 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 141. Related concepts: v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127 Updating the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server If you have a locally-installed DB2 Information Center, updated topics can be available for download. The 'Last updated' value found at the bottom of most topics indicates the current level for that topic. To determine if there is an update available for the entire DB2 Information Center, look for the 'Last updated' value on the Information Center home page. Compare the value in your locally installed home page to the date of the most recent downloadable update at http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/udb/support/ icupdate.html. You can then update your locally-installed Information Center if a more recent downloadable update is available. Updating your locally-installed DB2 Information Center requires that you: 1. Stop the DB2 Information Center on your computer, and restart the Information Center in stand-alone mode. Running the Information Center in stand-alone mode prevents other users on your network from accessing the Information Center, and allows you to download and apply updates. 2. Use the Update feature to determine if update packages are available from IBM. Note: Updates are also available on CD. For details on how to configure your Information Center to install updates from CD, see the related links. If update packages are available, use the Update feature to download the packages. (The Update feature is only available in stand-alone mode.) 3. Stop the stand-alone Information Center, and restart the DB2 Information Center service on your computer. Procedure: To update the DB2 Information Center installed on your computer or intranet server: 1. Stop the DB2 Information Center service. v On Windows, click Start → Control Panel → Administrative Tools → Services. Then right-click on DB2 Information Center service and select Stop. v On Linux, enter the following command: /etc/init.d/db2icdv9 stop 2. Start the Information Center in stand-alone mode. v On Windows: a. Open a command window. b. Navigate to the path where the Information Center is installed. By default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the C:Program FilesIBMDB2 Information CenterVersion 9 directory. c. Run the help_start.bat file using the fully qualified path for the DB2 Information Center: <DB2 Information Center dir>docbinhelp_start.bat v On Linux: Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information 133
  • 142. a. Navigate to the path where the Information Center is installed. By default, the DB2 Information Center is installed in the /opt/ibm/db2ic/V9 directory. b. Run the help_start script using the fully qualified path for the DB2 Information Center: <DB2 Information Center dir>/doc/bin/help_start The systems default Web browser launches to display the stand-alone Information Center. 3. Click the Update button ( ). On the right hand panel of the Information Center, click Find Updates. A list of updates for existing documentation displays. 4. To initiate the download process, check the selections you want to download, then click Install Updates. 5. After the download and installation process has completed, click Finish. 6. Stop the stand-alone Information Center. v On Windows, run the help_end.bat file using the fully qualified path for the DB2 Information Center: <DB2 Information Center dir>docbinhelp_end.bat Note: The help_end batch file contains the commands required to safely terminate the processes that were started with the help_start batch file. Do not use Ctrl-C or any other method to terminate help_start.bat. v On Linux, run the help_end script using the fully qualified path for the DB2 Information Center: <DB2 Information Center dir>/doc/bin/help_end Note: The help_end script contains the commands required to safely terminate the processes that were started with the help_start script. Do not use any other method to terminate the help_start script. 7. Restart the DB2 Information Center service. v On Windows, click Start → Control Panel → Administrative Tools → Services. Then right-click on DB2 Information Center service and select Start. v On Linux, enter the following command: /etc/init.d/db2icdv9 start The updated DB2 Information Center displays the new and updated topics. Related concepts: v “DB2 Information Center installation options” on page 119 Related tasks: v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Linux)” on page 122 v “Installing the DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard (Windows)” on page 124 134 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 143. DB2 tutorials The DB2 tutorials help you learn about various aspects of DB2 products. Lessons provide step-by-step instructions. Before you begin: You can view the XHTML version of the tutorial from the Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/db2help/. Some lessons use sample data or code. See the tutorial for a description of any prerequisites for its specific tasks. DB2 tutorials: To view the tutorial, click on the title. Native XML data store Set up a DB2 database to store XML data and to perform basic operations with the native XML data store. Visual Explain Tutorial Analyze, optimize, and tune SQL statements for better performance using Visual Explain. Related concepts: v “Visual Explain overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation DB2 troubleshooting information A wide variety of troubleshooting and problem determination information is available to assist you in using DB2 products. DB2 documentation Troubleshooting information can be found in the DB2 Troubleshooting Guide or the Support and Troubleshooting section of the DB2 Information Center. There you will find information on how to isolate and identify problems using DB2 diagnostic tools and utilities, solutions to some of the most common problems, and other advice on how to solve problems you might encounter with your DB2 products. DB2 Technical Support Web site Refer to the DB2 Technical Support Web site if you are experiencing problems and want help finding possible causes and solutions. The Technical Support site has links to the latest DB2 publications, TechNotes, Authorized Program Analysis Reports (APARs or bug fixes), fix packs, and other resources. You can search through this knowledge base to find possible solutions to your problems. Access the DB2 Technical Support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/ software/data/db2/udb/support.html Related concepts: v “Introduction to problem determination” in Troubleshooting Guide v “Overview of the DB2 technical information” on page 127 Appendix E. DB2 Database technical information 135
  • 144. Terms and Conditions Permissions for the use of these publications is granted subject to the following terms and conditions. Personal use: You may reproduce these Publications for your personal, non commercial use provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not distribute, display or make derivative work of these Publications, or any portion thereof, without the express consent of IBM. Commercial use: You may reproduce, distribute and display these Publications solely within your enterprise provided that all proprietary notices are preserved. You may not make derivative works of these Publications, or reproduce, distribute or display these Publications or any portion thereof outside your enterprise, without the express consent of IBM. Except as expressly granted in this permission, no other permissions, licenses or rights are granted, either express or implied, to the Publications or any information, data, software or other intellectual property contained therein. IBM reserves the right to withdraw the permissions granted herein whenever, in its discretion, the use of the Publications is detrimental to its interest or, as determined by IBM, the above instructions are not being properly followed. You may not download, export or re-export this information except in full compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including all United States export laws and regulations. IBM MAKES NO GUARANTEE ABOUT THE CONTENT OF THESE PUBLICATIONS. THE PUBLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED ″AS-IS″ AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 136 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 145. Appendix F. Notices IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk, NY 10504-1785 U.S.A. For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country/region or send inquiries, in writing, to: IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku Tokyo 106, Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country/region where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 137
  • 146. Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information that has been exchanged, should contact: IBM Canada Limited Office of the Lab Director 8200 Warden Avenue Markham, Ontario L6G 1C7 CANADA Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases payment of a fee. The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement, or any equivalent agreement between us. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems, and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements, or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility, or any other claims related to non-IBM products. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. All statements regarding IBM’s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only. This information may contain examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious, and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. COPYRIGHT LICENSE: This information may contain sample application programs, in source language, which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work must include a copyright notice as follows: 138 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 147. © (your company name) (year). Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp. Sample Programs. © Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_. All rights reserved. Trademarks Company, product, or service names identified in the documents of the DB2 Version 9 documentation library may be trademarks or service marks of International Business Machines Corporation or other companies. Information on the trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both is located at http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml. The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies and have been used in at least one of the documents in the DB2 documentation library: Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Intel, Itanium, Pentium, and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Appendix F. Notices 139
  • 148. 140 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 149. Appendix G. First Steps First Steps interface First Steps is a DB2 setup tool which introduces you to basic database maintenance tasks, application development, and technical resources available for your DB2 products. First Steps has been redesigned to be more like a portal, where you can find information from a wide range of sources to perform tasks. The information in First Steps is tailored by DB2 products. For example, if you have installed a DB2 database system, you can perform any of the following tasks with the assistance of First Steps: v Create the sample database or your own database. v Basic administration tasks, such as back up, load data, and set up access. v Database administration tasks, such as access configuration, database partitioning, and migration. v Create an application using any of the supported development environments. v Review technical resources that provide more in-depth knowledge. v Check for product updates. Database administration The instructions for database administration tasks reference mostly the Command Line Processor (CLP) interface and the Control Center interface to execute each task. The CLP is a text-based interface that is used to execute DB2 commands, database utilities, and SQL statements. The Control Center is a graphic interface that is used to manage and administer database systems, databases, and database objects, and to open other centers and tools. The CLP is delivered with the DB2 client. The Control Center is delivered with the DB2 client for 32-bit Linux (x86-32), 64–bit Linux (x86-64), and Windows (except on IPF). Application development First Steps includes information about development tools, programming languages, and sample files available for DB2 application development. It introduces DB2 database system programming features such as stored procedures and user-defined functions that can extend your application and use the DB2 server system resources. It also includes references to assist you in implementing Web services and migrating application to DB2 database systems. Technical resources There are many technical resources available from DB2 Information Management software Web sites, user communities, and IBM programs. This interface highlights the most relevant of these technical resources to assist you with database administration, application development, and education. Running First Steps You can manually launch First Steps using the db2fs command: $ db2fs © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 141
  • 150. On Linux and UNIX operating systems The db2fs command is located in the INSTHOME/sqllib/bin directory, where INSTHOME is the instance home directory. You need sysadm authority to run this command. On Windows operating system The db2fs command is located in the DB2DIRbin directory, where DB2DIR is set to the location you specified during the DB2 Version 9 installation. Alternatively, you can launch First Steps on Windows operating system from the Start menu by selecting Programs —> IBM DB2 —> DB2 copy name —> Set Up Tools —> First Steps or from the DB2 product folder on the desktop. To make full use of the resources provided by First Steps, you must have an internet connection and access to the online DB2 Information Center. Related concepts: v “Access to the DB2 Information Center” in Administration Guide: Planning v “Control Center overview” in Administration Guide: Implementation v “Features of the DB2 Information Center” on page 120 Related tasks: v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and Windows)” on page 78 Related reference: v “Command line processor features” in Command Reference v “db2fs - First steps command” in Command Reference Deleting a Firefox browser profile If you use Firefox as your Web browser, a browser profile is created in the following scenarios: DB2 Setup Launchpad If you install your DB2 product using the setup wizard, the DB2 Setup Launchpad runs in a browser and automatically creates a Firefox profile named DB2_LP. DB2 First Steps When you run DB2 First Steps, you are prompted to create a browser profile. If you agree, a Firefox profile named DB2_FIRSTSTEPS is created. If you use either of these profiles to view other Web pages that have javascript, the javascript will run automatically without warnings. After you have run the DB2 Setup wizard or DB2 First Steps, you might want to delete the browser profile to prevent javascript from running automatically when visiting other Web pages with these profiles. Procedure: To delete a Firefox browser profile: 1. If any Firefox browsers are open, close them now. 142 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 151. 2. Open the Firefox Profile Manager: On Windows a. Open the Windows Start menu and select Run... b. Type firefox.exe -profilemanager and click OK. The Firefox Choose User Profile dialog opens. On Linux a. b. c. and UNIX Open a command prompt Switch to the Firefox directory Start Firefox with the -profilemanager switch. For example: ./firefox -profilemanager 3. Select the DB2_LP or DB2_FIRSTSTEPS profile. 4. Click Delete Profile... 5. Click Exit to close the Firefox - Choose User Profile dialog. For further information on Firefox profiles, visit http://www.mozilla.org/support/ firefox/profile Related concepts: v “First Steps interface” on page 141 Related tasks: v “Verifying the installation of DB2 servers using First Steps (Linux and Windows)” on page 78 Appendix G. First Steps 143
  • 152. 144 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 153. Index A AIX creating DB2 home file systems, for a partitioned database system 49 required users, for a partitioned DB2 server installation 57 distributing commands to ESE workstations 45 hardware prerequisites 21 installation prerequisites 21 installing DB2 servers 7 mounting the CD-ROM 115 operating system prerequisites 21 updating environment settings 43 verifying NFS is running 47 C CD-ROM mounting AIX 115 HP-UX 116 Linux 116 Solaris Operating Environment 117 changing DB2 product editions Linux and UNIX 84 Windows 86 Windows default language setting 103 client configurations non-supported 5 supported 5 code pages supported 105 command line processor (CLP) verifying the installation 77 commands db2_deinstall 113 db2fs 141 db2idrop 112 db2ilist 112 db2nchg 15 db2osconf 41 db2sampl 77 db2secv82 89 db2setup 106 db2start 20 db2stop 112 doce_deinstall 113 enabling remote execution 98 force application 112 communications addresses 30 fast communication manager 30 © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 configuration parameters fcm_num_buffers 21 contact lists setting up 88 contacting IBM 147 copying DB2 CD contents 46 creating rhosts file 98 sample databases 78 D daemon configuration file starting for information center 122 database partition servers enabling communications (UNIX) 97 installing response files 70 database partitioning feature enabling communications (UNIX) 97 databases paritioned environment 68 DB2 code pages 105 installation methods 3 installing applying fix packs 87 UNIX 3 verifying the installation 77 Windows 3 interface languages 105 locales 105 partitioned installation updating AIX environment settings 43 removing UNIX 110 stopping instances UNIX 112 stopping the Administration Server UNIX 111 DB2 Administration Server (DAS) removing 111 stopping 111 DB2 CD-ROM copying to your computer 46 DB2 clients installation prerequisites (AIX) 21 installation prerequisites (HP-UX) 23 installation prerequisites (Linux) 24 installation prerequisites (Solaris Operating Environment) 27 installation prerequisites (Windows) 10 DB2 Connect installation methods 3 installing UNIX 3 DB2 Connect (continued) installing (continued) Windows 3 DB2 database for Linux on zSeries installing 33 removing 109 reserved ports 39 uninstalling 109 user accounts (Windows) 12 DB2 Enterprise Server Edition installing Windows 15 DB2 groups UNIX 31 DB2 home file system partitioned database system AIX 49 HP-UX 51 DB2 Information Center features 120 installing 119, 122, 124 supported browsers 120 updating 133 versions 132 viewing in different languages 132 DB2 installation verifying using First Steps 78 DB2 instances removing 112 stopping 112 DB2 license key registering 81 using the License Center 82 DB2 packaging information 3 DB2 product editions changing 84, 86 DB2 product information 3 DB2 product licenses applying 73 DB2 products installing manually listing products 29 removing listing products 29 UNIX 113 DB2 servers creating group IDs 37 user IDs 37 hardware prerequisites 23 installation prerequisites (AIX) 21 installation prerequisites (HP-UX) 23 installation prerequisites (Linux) 24 installation prerequisites (Solaris Operating Environment) 27 installation prerequisites (Windows) 10 installing Windows 6 145
  • 154. DB2 servers (continued) installing on AIX 7 installing on Windows 63 partitioned preparing the Windows environment 15 DB2 services (Windows) 11 DB2 Setup wizard installing DB2 servers UNIX 65 language identifiers 105 DB2 system administrator group 20 DB2 users UNIX 31 DB2 Version 9 co-existence with DB2 UDB Version 8 71 DB2 version co-existence DB2 UDB Version 8 71 DB2 Version 9 71 db2_deinstall 113 DB2ADMNS user groups 89 db2fcms / db2fcmr daemons description 30 db2iupt command upgrading your 32-bit DB2 instances 71 db2licm command compliance report 83 managing licenses 81 registering licenses 81 db2nodes.cfg 95 specifying the netname field 15 db2nodes.cfg file 90 db2osconf command 41 db2setup displaying national languages 106 language setting 106 DB2USERS user groups 89 Default DB2 Selection wizard 72 default language setting Windows 103 Deleting Firefox browser profile 142 directory schema extending on Windows 2000 and Windows .NET 35 disk requirements UNIX 9 Windows 9 doce_deinstall 113 documentation 127, 128 Information Center features 120 Information Center installation 119 terms and conditions of use 136 dropping instances 112 E enabling Control Center administration UNIX 99 146 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers enabling communications database partitioning feature (UNIX) 97 ESE workstations 45 F Fast Communications Manager (FCM) enabling communications between database partition servers 97 message buffers 21 overview 21 port numbers 97 port range 39 Windows 21 FCM Fast Communications Manager 21 fcm_num_buffers configuration parameter 21 fenced user definition 37 file sets db2fcms / db2fcmr daemons 30 description 30 file systems creating for a partitioned DB2 server Linux 53 Solaris Operating Environment 55 Firefox Deleting a browser profile 142 First Steps Deleting a Firefox profile 142 interface 141 verifying DB2 installation 78 fix pack applying 87 G group IDs creating 37 H hardware prerequisites AIX 21 HP-UX 23 Linux 24 Solaris Operating Environment 27 harware prerequisites Windows 10 help displaying 132 for SQL statements 131 HP-UX creating DB2 home file system, for a partitioned database system 51 required users, for a partitioned DB2 installation 58 hardware prerequisites 23 installation prerequisites 23 kernel configuration parameters 41 modifying kernel parameters 40 HP-UX (continued) mounting the CD 116 operating system prerequisites verifying NFS is running 47 23 I Information Center features 120 installing 119, 122, 124 supported browsers 120 updating 133 versions 132 viewing in different languages 132 installation Information Center 119, 122, 124 methods UNIX 3 Windows 3 multiple CDs 38 installation prerequisites AIX 21 Linux 24 Solaris Operating Environment 27 Windows 10 installing database partition servers response files 70 DB2 database user accounts (Windows) 12 DB2 for Linux on S/390 33 hardware prerequisites (Linux) 24 hardware prerequisites (Solaris Operating Environment) 27 hardware prerequisites (Windows) 10 Java prerequisites (AIX) 21 Java requirements 10 manually listing products 29 operating system prerequisites (Linux) 24 operating system prerequisites (Solaris Operating Environment) 27 operating system prerequisites (Windows) 10 prerequisites (AIX) 21 prerequisites (HP-UX) 23 prerequisites (Linux) 24 prerequisites (Solaris Operating Environment) 27 prerequisites (Windows) 10 Windows elevated privileges 18 instances dropping 112 removing 112 stopping 112 interface languages 105 changing UNIX 104 Windows 103
  • 155. J Java prerequisites installing DB2 (HP-UX) 23 K kernel configuration parameters HP-UX 41 modifying (HP-UX) 40 modifying (Linux) 41 modifying (Solaris Operating Environment) 43 kernel parameters db2osconf (HP-UX) 41 HP-UX 41 modifying (HP-UX) 40 modifying (Linux) 41 modifying (Solaris Operating Environment) 43 L LANG environment variable setting 104, 106 language identifiers DB2 Setup wizard 105 Licence Center compliance report 83 License Center managing licenses 81 registering licenses DB2 license key 82 upgrading licenses 84 licenses applying 73 compliance report 83 registering 81, 82 upgrading 84 licensing information 81 checking compliance 83 Linux creating file system for partitioned DB2 servers 53 required users for partitioned DB2 servers 60 hardware prerequisites 24 installation requirements 24 installing DB2 database on zSeries 33 modifying kernel parameters 41 mounting the CD-ROM 116 operating system prerequisites 24 verifying NFS is running 47 locales supported 105 M maintenance password 89 memory requirements UNIX 9 memory requirements (continued) Windows 9 message buffers Fast Communications Manager .(FCM) 21 modifying kernel parameters (HP-UX) 40 kernel parameters (Linux) 41 kernel parameters (Solaris Operating Environment) 43 mounting CD-ROM AIX 115 HP-UX 116 Linux 116 Solaris Operating Environment 117 multiple CDs installation 38 port numbers range availability Windows 39 port range availability UNIX 48 port range availability 39 UNIX 97 port ranges default (UNIX) 97 printed books ordering 130 problem determination online information 135 tutorials 135 R national languages displaying db2setup 106 Network File System (NFS) verifying operation 47 network information service (NIS), installation considerations 32 NFS (Network File System) verifying operation 47 NIS (network information service), installation considerations 32 node configuration file updating (UNIX) 95 node configuration files description 90 nodes FCM daemon (UNIX) 30 notices 137 notification lists, setting up 88 registry verifying access 77 remote commands, enabling on UNIX 98 removing DAS 111 DB2 UNIX 110 DB2 database Windows 109 reserved ports DB2 database 39 response file multiple CDs 38 response files installing database partition servers 70 rhosts file creating 98 updating 98 rules password 89 O S operating system prerequisites Linux 24 Solaris Operating Environment Windows 10 operating systems prerequisites AIX 21 HP-UX 23 ordering DB2 books 130 S/390 installing DB2 Database for Linux 33 sample databases creating 78 DB2 database 78 warehousing 78 SDK levels for DB2 35 searching DB2 documentation 120 security NIS installation considerations 32 user groups 89 set-up tool 141 setting LANG environment variable 104, 106 setting up contact lists 88 notification lists 88 Software Development Kit for Java levels for DB2 database 35 N 27 P paritioned database environment 68 partition database server installing 80 verifying installation Windows 80 partitioned database environments server installation, verifying on UNIX 79 password maintenance 89 passwords rules 89 Index 147
  • 156. Solaris Operating Environment creating file systems, partitioned DB2 servers 55 required users, partitioned DB2 servers 61 hardware prerequisites 27 installation prerequisites 27 modifying kernel parameters 43 mounting the CD-ROM 117 operating system prerequisites 27 verifying NFS is running 47 SQL statements displaying help 131 supported configurations clients 5 SYSADM Windows 20 SYSADM_GROUP configuration parameter 20 system administrator group DB2 database Windows 20 T terms and conditions use of publications 136 troubleshooting online information 135 tutorials 135 tutorials troubleshooting and problem determination 135 Visual Explain 135 U uninstalling DB2 database Windows 109 UNIX changing the DB2 interface language 104 DB2 groups 31 DB2 users 31 default port ranges 97 enabling Control Center administration 99 remote commands 98 installing DB2 servers, using the DB2 Setup wizard 65 removing DB2 110 DB2 instances 112 DB2 products 113 listing products 29 updating the node configuration file 95 verifying a partitioned database server installation 79 updates DB2 Information Center 133 148 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers updates (continued) Information Center 133 updating db2nodes.cfg (UNIX) 95 node configuration file 95 rhosts file 98 Upgrading 32-bit DB2 instances 71 Upgrading to 64-bit DB2 instances 71 user accounts DB2 Administration Server (Windows) 12 instance user (Windows) 12 required for installation (Windows) 12 user groups DB2ADMNS 89 DB2USERS 89 security 89 user IDs creating 37 user privileges, Windows 17 users creating for a partitioned DB2 server AIX 57 HP-UX 58 Linux 60 Solaris Operating Environment 61 V verifying DB2 installation using First Steps verifying access registry 77 verifying port range availability UNIX 48 Windows 39 Visual Explain tutorial 135 78 W Windows changing default language setting 103 DB2 system administrator group 20 DB2 user accounts 12 extending the directory schema Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 35 Windows Server 2003 35 Fast Communications Manager (FCM) 21 granting user rights 17 hardware prerequisites 10 installation elevated privileges 18 installation prerequisites 10 installing DB2 server 6 DB2 servers with the DB2 Setup wizard 63 operating system prerequisites 10 removing DB2 database 109 Windows (continued) verifying partition database server installation 80 Windows elevated privileges installing DB2 products 18 Windows services 11 wizards Default DB2 Selection 72 Z zSeries installing DB2 Database for Linux 33
  • 157. Contacting IBM To contact IBM in your country or region, check the IBM Directory of Worldwide Contacts at http://www.ibm.com/planetwide To learn more about DB2 products, go to http://www.ibm.com/software/data/db2/. © Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 2006 149
  • 158. 150 Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers
  • 160. Part Number: CT3ZLNA GC10-4246-00 (1P) P/N: CT3ZLNA Printed in Ireland
  • 161. IBM DB2 DB2 Version 9 Spine information: Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers